ETC ID78K4

User’s Manual
ID78K Series
Integrated Debugger Ver. 2.30 or Later
Operation (Windows™ Based)
Target Devices
78K/0 Series
78K/0S Series
78K/IV Series
Document No. U15185EJ1V0UM00 (1st edition)
Date Published May 2001 N CP(K)
2001
©
1997
Printed in Japan
[MEMO]
2
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
Windows, Windows NT, and MS-DOS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
3
• The information in this document is current as of February, 2001. The information is subject to
change without notice. For actual design-in, refer to the latest publications of NEC's data sheets or
data books, etc., for the most up-to-date specifications of NEC semiconductor products. Not all
products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an NEC sales representative
for availability and additional information.
• No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of NEC. NEC assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
• NEC does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of
third parties by or arising from the use of NEC semiconductor products listed in this document or any other
liability arising from the use of such products. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted under any
patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC or others.
• Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative
purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples. The incorporation of these
circuits, software and information in the design of customer's equipment shall be done under the full
responsibility of customer. NEC assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third
parties arising from the use of these circuits, software and information.
• While NEC endeavours to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of NEC semiconductor products, customers
agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To minimize
risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in NEC
semiconductor products, customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design, such as
redundancy, fire-containment, and anti-failure features.
• NEC semiconductor products are classified into the following three quality grades:
"Standard", "Special" and "Specific". The "Specific" quality grade applies only to semiconductor products
developed based on a customer-designated "quality assurance program" for a specific application. The
recommended applications of a semiconductor product depend on its quality grade, as indicated below.
Customers must check the quality grade of each semiconductor product before using it in a particular
application.
"Standard": Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment, audio
and visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic equipment
and industrial robots
"Special": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster
systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed
for life support)
"Specific": Aircraft, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life
support systems and medical equipment for life support, etc.
The quality grade of NEC semiconductor products is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC's
data sheets or data books, etc. If customers wish to use NEC semiconductor products in applications not
intended by NEC, they must contact an NEC sales representative in advance to determine NEC's willingness
to support a given application.
(Note)
(1) "NEC" as used in this statement means NEC Corporation and also includes its majority-owned subsidiaries.
(2) "NEC semiconductor products" means any semiconductor product developed or manufactured by or for
NEC (as defined above).
M8E 00. 4
4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
Regional Information
Some information contained in this document may vary from country to country. Before using any NEC
product in your application, pIease contact the NEC office in your country to obtain a list of authorized
representatives and distributors. They will verify:
•
Device availability
•
Ordering information
•
Product release schedule
•
Availability of related technical literature
•
Development environment specifications (for example, specifications for third-party tools and
components, host computers, power plugs, AC supply voltages, and so forth)
•
Network requirements
In addition, trademarks, registered trademarks, export restrictions, and other legal issues may also vary
from country to country.
NEC Electronics Inc. (U.S.)
NEC Electronics (Germany) GmbH
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.
Santa Clara, California
Tel: 408-588-6000
800-366-9782
Fax: 408-588-6130
800-729-9288
Benelux Office
Eindhoven, The Netherlands
Tel: 040-2445845
Fax: 040-2444580
Hong Kong
Tel: 2886-9318
Fax: 2886-9022/9044
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.
Velizy-Villacoublay, France
Tel: 01-3067-5800
Fax: 01-3067-5899
Seoul Branch
Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-528-0303
Fax: 02-528-4411
NEC Electronics (France) S.A.
NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Milton Keynes, UK
Tel: 01908-691-133
Fax: 01908-670-290
Madrid Office
Madrid, Spain
Tel: 091-504-2787
Fax: 091-504-2860
Novena Square, Singapore
Tel: 253-8311
Fax: 250-3583
NEC Electronics Italiana s.r.l.
NEC Electronics (Germany) GmbH
Milano, Italy
Tel: 02-66 75 41
Fax: 02-66 75 42 99
Scandinavia Office
Taeby, Sweden
Tel: 08-63 80 820
Fax: 08-63 80 388
NEC Electronics (France) S.A.
NEC Electronics (Germany) GmbH
Duesseldorf, Germany
Tel: 0211-65 03 02
Fax: 0211-65 03 490
NEC Electronics (UK) Ltd.
NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd.
Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: 02-2719-2377
Fax: 02-2719-5951
NEC do Brasil S.A.
Electron Devices Division
Guarulhos-SP, Brasil
Tel: 11-6462-6810
Fax: 11-6462-6829
J01.2
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
5
INTRODUCTION
Readers
This manual is intended for user engineers who design and develop application
systems of the 78K/0 Series, 78K/0S Series, and 78K/IV Series.
Purpose
This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the ID78K
Series shown in the organization below.
Organization
This manual consists of the following chapters:
• General
• Installation
• Starting and exiting
• Functions of ID78K Series
• Association with project manager
• Window reference
How to read this manual
It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical
engineering, logic circuits, microcontrollers, C language, and assemblers.
For users who are using this manual for products other than ID78K0-NS
→ In CHAPTERS 2 and 3, the ID78K0-NS is treated as the representative product.
In the other chapters, the ID78K0-NS is also treated as the representative product
unless there are differences in function.
As required, take the ID78K0-NS as other products in the ID78K Series.
Product description
ID78K0-NS → ID78K0-NS
ID78K0 (-NS) → ID78K0 and ID78K0-NS
To understand the hardware functions of the 78K/0 Series, 78K/0S Series, and
78K/IV Series.
→ Refer to the Hardware User’s Manual for each product.
To understand the instruction functions of the 78K/0 Series
→ Refer to the 78K/0 Series User’s Manual Instructions.
To understand the instruction functions of the 78K/0S Series
→ Refer to the 78K/0S Series User’s Manual Instructions.
To understand the instruction functions of the 78K/IV Series
→ Refer to the 78K/IV Series User’s Manual Instructions.
6
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
Conventions
Data significance:
Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right
Note:
Footnote for item marked with Note in the text
Caution:
Information requiring paticular attention
Remark:
Supplementary information
Numerical representation:
Binary… ×××× or ××××B
Decimal… ××××
Hexadecimal…××××H
Prefixes indicating power of 2 (address space, memory capacity):
K (kilo):
10
2 = 1,024
20
2
M (mega): 2 = 1,024
Key descriptions:
The key descriptions in this manual are explained in
terms of the PC-9821 series keyboard. When using a
keyboard whose key descriptions differ from the above,
use the keys in accordance with the descriptions in
APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST.
Related Documents
The documents related to this manual are listed below.
The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions.
However, preliminary versions are not marked as such.
Documents related to development tools (user’s manuals) (78K/0 Series)
Document Name
Document No.
IE-78K0-NS
U13731E
IE-78K0-NS-A
U14889E
IE-78K0-NS-PA
To be prepared
CC78K0 C Compiler
Operation
To be prepared
Language
To be prepared
Operation
To be prepared
Language
To be prepared
Structured Assembly Language
U11789E
SM78K0S, SM78K0 System Simulator Ver. 2.10 or
Later Windows Based
Operation
U14611E
SM78K Series System Simulator Ver. 2.10 or Later
External Part User Open Interface
Specifications
U15006E
ID78K Series Integrated Debugger Ver. 2.30 or Later
Windows Based
Operation
This manual
78K/0 Series Real-Time OS
Fundamentals
U11537E
Installation
U11536E
Fundamental
U12257E
RA78K0 Assembler Package
78K/0 Series OS MX78K0
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
7
Documents related to development tools (user’s manuals) (78K/0S Series)
Document Name
Document No.
IE-78K0S-NS
U13549E
IE-78K0S-NS-A
To be prepared
CC78K0S C Compiler
Operation
U11816E
Language
U11817E
Operation
U11622E
Language
U11599E
Structured Assembly Language
U11623E
SM78K0S, SM78K0 System Simulator Ver. 2.10 or
Later Windows Based
Operation
U14611E
SM78K Series System Simulator Ver. 2.10 or Later
External Part User Open Interface
Specifications
U15006E
ID78K Series Integrated Debugger Ver. 2.30 or Later
Windows Based
Operation
This manual
78K/0S Series OS MX78K0S
Fundamental
U12938E
RA78K0S Assembler Package
Documents related to development tools (user’s manuals) (78K/IV Series)
Document Name
Document No.
IE-78K4-NS
U13356E
CC78K4 C Compiler
Operation
U11572E
Language
U11571E
Operation
U11334E
Language
U11162E
Structured Assembler Preprocessor
U11743E
SM78K4 System Simulator Windows Based
Reference
U10093E
SM78K Series System Simulator Ver. 1.40 or Later
External Part User Open Interface
Specifications
U10092E
ID78K Series Integrated Debugger Ver. 2.30 or Later
Windows Based
Operation
This manual
78K/IV Series Real-Time OS
Fundamentals
U10603E
Installation
U10604E
RA78K4 Assembler Package
−
Debugger
78K/IV Series OS MX78K4
8
Fundamentals
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
U11779E
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Overview...................................................................................................................................... 17
Features....................................................................................................................................... 17
System Configuration ................................................................................................................ 18
Operating Environment ............................................................................................................. 19
1.4.1
Hardware environment ...................................................................................................................19
1.4.2
Software environment.....................................................................................................................20
Note for Debugging at Source Level ........................................................................................ 20
CHAPTER 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.3.1
Precautions for installation .............................................................................................................22
2.3.2
Installation procedure .....................................................................................................................23
Uninstalling ID78K0-NS ............................................................................................................. 31
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
STARTING AND EXITING............................................................................................... 34
Starting ........................................................................................................................................ 34
Exiting.......................................................................................................................................... 36
CHAPTER 4
4.1
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................. 21
Device Driver............................................................................................................................... 21
Device File................................................................................................................................... 21
Installation of ID78K0-NS........................................................................................................... 22
CHAPTER 3
3.1
3.2
GENERAL.......................................................................................................................... 17
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES.................................................................................... 37
Mapping Function....................................................................................................................... 37
4.1.1
Mapping function of ID78K0-NS (-NS) and ID78K4 (-NS) ..............................................................37
4.1.2
Mapping functions of ID78K0S-NS .................................................................................................38
Emulation Execution Functions................................................................................................ 38
4.2.1
Real-time execution function ..........................................................................................................38
4.2.2
Non real-time execution function ....................................................................................................39
Event Function............................................................................................................................ 40
4.3.1
Using event function .......................................................................................................................40
4.3.2
Event conditions .............................................................................................................................41
Break Functions ......................................................................................................................... 45
Trace Function............................................................................................................................ 47
4.5.1
Operation of trace...........................................................................................................................47
4.5.2
Trace condition setting function......................................................................................................48
4.5.3
Trace result display function...........................................................................................................49
Coverage Measurement Function (Other than ID78K4-NS) ................................................... 50
Snapshot Function (Other than ID78K4-NS)............................................................................ 50
Load/Save Functions ................................................................................................................. 51
4.8.1
Display files ....................................................................................................................................51
4.8.2
Information files ..............................................................................................................................52
4.9 Register Manipulation Functions.............................................................................................. 53
4.10 Memory Manipulation Functions .............................................................................................. 53
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
9
4.11 Time Measurement Function .....................................................................................................53
4.12 Real-Time RAM Sampling Function..........................................................................................53
CHAPTER 5
ASSOCIATION WITH PROJECT MANAGER................................................................54
5.1
Debugger Registration in PM Project .......................................................................................54
5.2
Starting Up ID78K Series from PM............................................................................................55
5.3
Correction and Auto Load of Source File ................................................................................56
5.1.1
5.2.1
CHAPTER 6
6.1
6.2
Debugger selection........................................................................................................................ 54
Reproducing debug environment................................................................................................... 55
WINDOW REFERENCE....................................................................................................57
Window List.................................................................................................................................57
Explanation of Windows ............................................................................................................59
Main Window.............................................................................................................................................. 60
Configuration Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................... 86
Bank Set Dialog Box (ID78K0 (-NS) only).................................................................................................. 92
Mask Option Dialog Box (ID78K0 (-NS), ID78K0S-NS) ............................................................................. 95
Extended Option Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................... 97
Debugger Option Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 103
Font Dialog Box........................................................................................................................................ 111
Project File Load Dialog Box .................................................................................................................... 114
Project File Save Dialog Box.................................................................................................................... 117
View File Load Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 121
View File Save Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 124
Download Dialog Box............................................................................................................................... 130
Upload Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................... 134
Browse Dialog Box................................................................................................................................... 137
Source Move Dialog Box.......................................................................................................................... 139
Address Move Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 142
Trace Move Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 145
Symbol To Address Dialog Box................................................................................................................ 148
Source Window ........................................................................................................................................ 151
Source Search Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 164
Assemble Window.................................................................................................................................... 167
Assemble Search Dialog Box................................................................................................................... 178
Memory Window ...................................................................................................................................... 181
Memory Search Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 186
Memory Fill Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 189
Memory Copy Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 191
Memory Compare Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 193
Memory Compare Result Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 195
Pseudo DMM dialog box .......................................................................................................................... 197
Watch Window ......................................................................................................................................... 199
Quick Watch Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 204
Add Watch Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................. 208
Change Watch dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 211
Register Window ...................................................................................................................................... 214
10
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
SFR Window.............................................................................................................................................218
SFR Select Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................222
Add I/O Port Dialog Box............................................................................................................................225
Local Variable Window .............................................................................................................................228
Stack Window ...........................................................................................................................................231
Trace View Window ..................................................................................................................................236
Trace Search Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................................246
Trace Data Select Dialog Box...................................................................................................................254
Coverage Window (This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS,
when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.) ............258
Coverage Search Dialog Box (This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS,
when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.) ............263
Coverage-Clear Dialog Box (This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS,
when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.) ............266
Coverage-Condition Setting Dialog Box (This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed
in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used,
or when the IE-784000-R is used.) ...............................................................................................268
Coverage-Efficiency View Dialog Box (This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed
in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used,
or when the IE-784000-R is used.) ...............................................................................................271
Event Manager .........................................................................................................................................274
Software Break Manager (This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS,
when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-78K4-NS
or IE-784000-R is used.) ..............................................................................................................284
Event Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................287
Event Link Dialog Box...............................................................................................................................303
Break Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................313
Trace Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................320
Snap Shot Dialog Box (Not supported in the ID78K4-NS) ........................................................................331
Stub dialog box (Supported only in the ID78K4) .......................................................................................346
Timer Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................354
Timer Result Dialog Box ...........................................................................................................................365
DMM Dialog Box (Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)) .............................................................................368
Pass Count Dialog Box (Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)) ...................................................................374
Delay Count Dialog Box............................................................................................................................376
Reset Debugger Dialog Box .....................................................................................................................378
About Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................380
Exit Debugger Dialog Box.........................................................................................................................381
Error/Warning Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................383
Console Window.......................................................................................................................................384
APPENDIX A
DEBUGGING WITH ID78K SERIES........................................................................... 419
APPENDIX B
TERMINOLOGY ............................................................................................................. 423
B.1
B.2
Terminology .............................................................................................................................. 423
Window Types and Configuration .......................................................................................... 432
B.2.1
Windows.......................................................................................................................................432
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
11
B.2.2
Dialog boxes ................................................................................................................................ 432
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST .............................................................................................433
APPENDIX D
KEY FUNCTION LIST ..................................................................................................455
D.1
D.2
D.3
D.4
D.5
D.6
D.7
D.8
Special Function Key Function List........................................................................................455
Function Key Function List .....................................................................................................456
Special Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key)...........................................................457
Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key) ........................................................................457
Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) ...........................................................458
Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) .........................................................................458
Control Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) ...........................................................................459
Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + SHIFT Key)............................................460
APPENDIX E
12
INDEX .............................................................................................................................461
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
LIST OF FIGURES (1/3)
Figure No.
Title
Page
1-1
ID78Kx-NS Series System Configuration Example ....................................................................................... 18
3-1
ID78K0-NS Icon............................................................................................................................................. 34
3-2
Configuration Dialog Box on Starting............................................................................................................. 34
3-3
Main Window ................................................................................................................................................. 35
3-4
comctl32.dll 4.72 Installer .............................................................................................................................. 35
3-5
Exit Debugger Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................. 36
5-1
Select Debugger Type Dialog Box (PM)........................................................................................................ 54
6-1
Main Window ................................................................................................................................................. 60
6-2
Toolbar .......................................................................................................................................................... 61
6-3
Example of Tool Hint ..................................................................................................................................... 63
6-4
Status Bar...................................................................................................................................................... 64
6-5
File Menu Bar ................................................................................................................................................ 67
6-6
Edit Menu Bar................................................................................................................................................ 68
6-7
View Menu Bar .............................................................................................................................................. 70
6-8
Option Menu Bar ........................................................................................................................................... 76
6-9
Run Menu Bar ............................................................................................................................................... 78
6-10
Event Menu Bar............................................................................................................................................. 80
6-11
Browse Menu Bar .......................................................................................................................................... 82
6-12
Jump Menu Bar ............................................................................................................................................. 83
6-13
Window Menu Bar ......................................................................................................................................... 84
6-14
Help Menu Bar............................................................................................................................................... 85
6-15
Configuration Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................... 86
6-16
Bank Set Dialog Box...................................................................................................................................... 92
6-17
Mask Option Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................ 95
6-18
Extended Option Dialog Box.......................................................................................................................... 97
6-19
Debugger Option Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 103
6-20
Font Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................................... 111
6-21
Project File Load Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 114
6-22
Project File Save Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 118
6-23
View File Load Dialog Box........................................................................................................................... 121
6-24
View File Save Dialog Box........................................................................................................................... 124
6-25
Download Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................. 131
6-26
Upload Dialog Box....................................................................................................................................... 134
6-27
Browse Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................... 137
6-28
Source Move Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................. 139
6-29
Address Move Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................... 143
6-30
Trace Move Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................... 145
6-31
Symbol To Address Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 148
6-32
Source Window ........................................................................................................................................... 151
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
13
LIST OF FIGURES (2/3)
Figure No.
Title
Page
6-33
Source Search Dialog Box...........................................................................................................................164
6-34
Assemble Window .......................................................................................................................................167
6-35
Assemble Search Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................178
6-36
Memory Window ..........................................................................................................................................182
6-37
Memory Search Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................186
6-38
Memory Fill Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................189
6-39
Memory Copy Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................191
6-40
Memory Compare Dialog Box......................................................................................................................193
6-41
Memory Compare Result Dialog Box...........................................................................................................195
6-42
Pseudo DMM Dialog Box.............................................................................................................................197
6-43
Watch Window.............................................................................................................................................200
6-44
Quick Watch Dialog Box ..............................................................................................................................204
6-45
Add Watch Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................208
6-46
Change Watch Dialog Box...........................................................................................................................211
6-47
Register Window..........................................................................................................................................214
6-48
SFR Window................................................................................................................................................218
6-49
SFR Select Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................222
6-50
Add I/O Port Dialog Box...............................................................................................................................225
6-51
Local Variable Window ................................................................................................................................228
6-52
Stack Window ..............................................................................................................................................231
6-53
Trace View Window .....................................................................................................................................236
6-54
Trace Search Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................246
6-55
Trace Data Select Dialog Box......................................................................................................................254
6-56
Coverage Window .......................................................................................................................................258
6-57
Coverage Search Dialog Box.......................................................................................................................263
6-58
Coverage-Clear Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................266
6-59
Coverage-Condition Setting Dialog Box.......................................................................................................268
6-60
Coverage-Efficiency View Dialog Box..........................................................................................................271
6-61
Event Manager ............................................................................................................................................275
6-62
Software Break Manager .............................................................................................................................284
6-63
Event Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................................288
6-64
Event Link Dialog Box..................................................................................................................................304
6-65
Break Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................................314
6-66
Trace Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................................321
6-67
Snap Shot Dialog Box..................................................................................................................................332
6-68
Stub Dialog Box ...........................................................................................................................................347
6-69
Timer Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................................355
6-70
Timer Result Dialog Box ..............................................................................................................................365
6-71
DMM Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................................................368
6-72
Pass Count Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................374
6-73
Delay Count Dialog Box...............................................................................................................................376
6-74
Reset Debugger Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................378
14
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
LIST OF FIGURES (3/3)
Figure No.
Title
Page
6-75
About Dialog Box......................................................................................................................................... 380
6-76
Exit Debugger Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................... 381
6-77
Error/Warning Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 383
6-78
Console Window.......................................................................................................................................... 384
C-1
Display Format of Error Message ................................................................................................................ 433
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
15
LIST OF TABLES
Table No.
Title
Page
4-1
Relationship Between Event Conditions and Setting Dialog Box...................................................................40
4-2
Each Condition That Can Be Set in Event Dialog Box ...................................................................................42
4-3
Event Condition Types...................................................................................................................................43
4-4
Trace Data Display Contents .........................................................................................................................49
4-5
Display Files Handled by ID78K Series .........................................................................................................51
4-6
Information Files Handled by ID78K Series ...................................................................................................52
6-1
Windows of ID78K Series Debugger .............................................................................................................57
6-2
IE Status Display Contents ............................................................................................................................65
6-3
CPU Status Display Contents ........................................................................................................................65
6-4
Display Contents of Break Cause ..................................................................................................................65
6-5
STEP Modes..................................................................................................................................................66
6-6
Key Input Modes............................................................................................................................................66
6-7
Command Specifications .............................................................................................................................385
B-1
Delimiter Symbols ........................................................................................................................................424
B-2
Register Set of 78K Series...........................................................................................................................426
C-1
Error Message Type ....................................................................................................................................433
C-2
Error Message List.......................................................................................................................................434
D-1
Special Function Key Function List..............................................................................................................455
D-2
D-3
Function Key Function List...........................................................................................................................456
Special Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key)..................................................................................457
D-4
Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key) ..............................................................................................457
D-5
Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key)...................................................................................458
D-6
Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) ...............................................................................................458
D-7
Control Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) .................................................................................................459
D-8
Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + SHIFT Key) ...................................................................460
16
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
1.1 Overview
The integrated debuggers for the 78K Series (ID78K0S-NS/ID78K0-NS/ID78K0/ID78K4-NS/ID78K4) are software
tools designed to efficiently debug user programs developed for NEC’s 78K/0, 78K/0S, and 78K/IV Series of 8-/16-bit
microcontrollers for embedded control applications.
This ID78K Series features an easy-to-understand GUI (graphical user interface) on a host machine using
Windows as the operating system.
Moreover, the commands that are frequently used are displayed as buttons that can be activated using the
mouse, providing an environment with excellent operability.
1.2 Features
The features of the ID78K Series are as follows.
(1) GUI function
The ID78K0 Series runs in a Windows environment and their debugging operations can be controlled with a
mouse. Buttons and menus are displayed in each window, and other related information can be selected from
the displayed information.
(2) Debugging at source level
Referencing/setting variables and structures, displaying programs, and setting breakpoints can be efficiently
performed at source text level by manipulating function names and line numbers.
(3) Debugging at instruction level
Referencing/setting symbols and register values, displaying programs, and setting breakpoints can be efficiently
performed at instruction level by manipulating labels and addresses.
(4) Use of in-circuit emulator
Breakpoints can be set and user programs can be traced by using the detailed event setting functions of an incircuit emulator.
(5) Monitor function (automatic display updating function while execution is stopped)
When execution of the user program is stopped, the values displayed in the window are automatically updated.
(6) Saving/restoring debugging environment
The debugging environment can be saved in a file. The saved environment can be restored, and debugging can
be resumed from where the debugging environment was saved.
(7) Function expansion by TIP (Tool Interface Protocol)
Note
By linking up with a task debugger (RD)
, system performance analyzer (AZ)
Note
, etc., it is possible to vastly
improve the debugging efficiency of applications that use a real-time OS (RX).
Note Supported only in the ID78K4 (-NS)
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
17
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
1.3 System Configuration
The ID78K Series offers a comfortable debugging environment for user programs and target boards developed for
the 78K/0, 78K/0S, and 78K/IV Series by connecting the host machine and the in-circuit emulator via a dedicated
parallel interface board.
Figure 1-1 shows an example of the system configuration of the ID78Kx-NS Series.
Figure 1-1. ID78Kx-NS Series System Configuration Example
Host machine
ID78Kx-NS
Device File
Interface board
Device driver
In-circuit emulator
Target system
18
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
1.4 Operating Environment
To use the ID78K Series, the following hardware and software environments are necessary.
1.4.1 Hardware environment
(1) Host machine
• PC-9821 series
• PC98-NX series
• IBM PC/AT
CPU:
TM
or compatibles
TM
Pentium
100 MHz or more (120 MHz or more is recommended)
Memory: RAM: 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended)
(2) In-circuit emulator
• For ID78K0
• IE-78001-R-A
• For ID78K0-NS
• IE-78K0-NS
• IE-78K0-NS-A
• For ID78K0S-NS
• IE-78K0S-NS
• IE-78K0S-NS-A
• For ID78K4
• IE-784000-R
• For ID78K4-NS
• IE-78K4-NS
(3) In-circuit emulator optional board
• For ID78K0
• IE-780xxx-NS-EMx
• IE-78K0-R-EXx
• For ID78K0-NS
<1> Emulation board
• IE-780xxx-NS-EM1
• IE-780xxx-R-EM
• IE-780xxx-NS-EM4
• IE-78K0-NS-P0x
• IE-78K0-NS-P0x
<2> Performance board (78K/0 Series only)
• IE-78K0-NS-PA
• For ID78K0S-NS
• IE-789xxx-NS-EM1
• For ID78K4
• IE-784000-R-EM
• For ID78K4-NS
• IE-784xxx-NS-EM1
• IE-784xxx-NS-EM1
• IE-784xxx-R-EM1
• IE-78K4-R-EXx
Caution
These optional boards are used in combination with the in-circuit emulator.
(4) Interface board
• IE-70000-98-IF-C (PC-9821 series)
• IE-70000-PC-IF-C (IBM PC/AT or compatibles)
• IE-70000-CD-IF-A
• IE-70000-PCI-IF-A
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
19
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
1.4.2 Software environment
(1) OS
TM
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3)
(2) Device file
Device file of target file to be used
(3) Device driver
Device driver for interface board (included with this product)
1.5 Note for Debugging at Source Level
When debugging at the source level, add an option (-g option) that creates debugging information after the source
files have been compiled. If this is not done, debugging cannot be performed at the source level.
20
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
Note that in this chapter, the ID78K0-NS is treated as the representative product. If you are using another
product, take the ID78K0-NS as the other product.
Prior to using the ID78K0-NS, it is necessary to install the ID78K0-NS, a device file, and a device driver.
This chapter explains how to install/uninstall the ID78K0-NS.
2.1 Device Driver
Install the device driver according to the “README_E.TXT
Note
” in the 3.5-inch floppy disk “NEC IE-PC Driver V1.0”
or CD-ROM directory “Driver”.
Note When using Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows 2000, follow the same procedure as when using Windows
95.
2.2 Device File
To install the device file, use the “Device file installer” included with this product. Use of this dedicated installer
enables installation of the device file in the Win32 environment.
Since the installer “SETUP.EXE” in the device file product disk is for the Win16 environment, it registers the device
file information “NECDEV.INI”. However, because this product supports the Win32 environment, the device file
information must be registered in the registry. It is therefore essential to use the “Device file installer”.
An outline of the installation procedure is described below.
<1> Start up the “Device file installer”. When newly installing the device file, click the Install button on the display
following startup and specify the installation information file “NECSETUP.INI” from the device file product
disk.
<2> If the device file is registered in “NECDEV.INI” and needs to be moved to the Win32 environment, specify
“NECDEV.INI” from the DFINST “source selection”. Following the specification, select the type displayed in
the “Source” list and click the Move button. (Note that the FPGA data file (G0XXX.78K) will not be moved
automatically and therefore should be copied manually.)
<3> To uninstall the device file, select the type displayed in the DFINST “registry” list, select “Delete files”, and
click the Uninstall button.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
21
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
2.3 Installation of ID78K0-NS
2.3.1 Precautions for installation
<1> Prior to installation, create a backup of the system disks. The computer may need to be restarted after
installation, so exit all other applications currently being used.
<2> Do not install the ID78K0-NS in a directory in which a version of the ID78K0-NS earlier than V2.xx is
installed. Since products of an earlier version than V2.xx support Win16, addition of an ID78K0-NS
supporting Win32 in the same directory may cause the device to malfunction.
<3> If reinstalling the ID78K0-NS, be sure to uninstall it first. If the ID78K0-NS has not been uninstalled and is
reinstalled in a directory that is different to the one the ID78K0-NS was originally installed in, uninstallation
of the originally installed ID78K0-NS may become impossible.
<4> Do not install the ID78K0-NS in a directory with blank spaces. Related tools, such as the Project Manager,
that are to be installed in the same directory as the ID78K0-NS may not operate correctly, depending on
their version.
<5> The file below created following installation is the file used for uninstallation, and therefore should not be
deleted (it is assumed that the installation destination is C:\nectools32).
C:\nectools32\SETUP\*.*
<6> “comctl32.dll4.72 installation” (40comupd.exe) is registered in the program folder in which the ID78K0-NS is
installed. This file is used to update the comctl32.dll file used in the ID78K0-NS. If an application error
occurs while in use or problems such as a dialog box not displaying data correctly are experienced, install
comctl32.dll using “comctl32.dll4.72 installation”. If Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Microsoft
Internet Explorer 3.0 or later is installed, installation of comctl32.dll is unnecessary.
22
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
2.3.2 Installation procedure
The following describes the method of installing the ID78K0-NS. Here, the installation procedure is explained with
“C:\Windows” as the directory in which Windows is installed and “E” as the floppy disk drive.
<1> Turn on power to the host machine (PC-9821 or IBM PC/AT) and start up Windows.
<2> <When CD-ROM used as supply medium>
Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. The installer will automatically start.
If the installer does not start automatically, start from the directory “DISK1/setup.exe”.
<When 3.5-inch floppy disk used as supply medium>
Insert system disk #1 of the ID78K0-NS in the floppy disk drive (A drive) and start the installer “setup.exe”.
<3> The setup program is activated following setup initialization. Click
Installation can be terminated by clicking the
.
button.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
23
CHAPTER 2
<4> When installing the ID78K0-NS, click
license agreement. Clicking
INSTALLATION
after reading and accepting the terms of the software
will abort installation. Click
previous screen.
<5> Input the product ID. The product ID is indicated on the CD case or on the FD.
24
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
to display the
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
<6> Select the items to be installed and the destination drive or directory. Clear the check mark from the
components that are not to be installed. The default destination drive or directory is C:\nectools32.
Bearing in mind relationships with other NEC tools, installation using the default directory is recommended.
If there is a problem with the drive or directory, click
After setting each item, click
To abort installation, click
and make appropriate modifications.
.
. Click
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
to display the previous screen.
25
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
<7> If newly installing an ID78K0-NS or if previously installed ID78K0-NS has already been uninstalled, follow the
procedure from <8>.
(1) If there is an ID78K0-NS preinstalled in the directory specified by <6>, the following message is displayed.
Click
and the following dialog box appears.
Click
to uninstall the ID78K0-NS.
If
26
is selected, uninstallation will not be executed and the procedure shifts to <8>.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
(2) If the ID78K0-NS is installed in a directory other than a directory specified by <6>, the following message is
displayed.
Note that the execution shifts to <8> by clicking
, in which case the uninstaller will not be
activated.
<8> Specify the name of the folder in which the ID78K0-NS icon is to be registered. The default folder name is
“NEC Tools32”. After specifying the folder name, click
. Click
. To abort installation, click
to display the previous screen.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
27
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
<9> Final confirmation of installation start is made. Check the settings made in <4> to <8>. If there are no
28
changes to these settings, click
. If changes are necessary, click
If there are any problems, click
and abort installation.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
.
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
<10> Start copying files.
<When CD-ROM used as supply medium>
The Change-of-system-disk message will not be displayed. The contents of directory DISK1 to DISK5 are
automatically copied.
The installation status is displayed.
<When 3.5-inch floppy disk used as supply medium>
The change-of-system-disk message (Setup Needs the Next Disk) dialog box will open, so after changing the
disk, click
. This operation is repeated until the insertion of system disk #5.
The Change-of-system-disk message will appear during copying.
<11> If an NEC development tool environment for Win16 (default directory: \nectools) does not exist in the host
machine used, move to procedure <12>.
If a development tool for Win16 exists in the host machine, the following dialog box appears. Click
to move the device file used in the development tool environment for Win16 to the
development tool environment for Win32 (this product). If
is selected, execute the device
file installer “DFINST.EXE” following the installation of the ID78K0-NS to shift the device file. The ID78K0NS will not operate normally unless the device file is moved.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
29
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
<12> After the files have been copied, the Setup Complete dialog box will open, so click
Installation of the ID78K0-NS is now complete.
<13> The ID78K0-NS icon will be registered in the folder specified in procedure <8>.
30
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
.
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
2.4 Uninstalling ID78K0-NS
This section explains how to uninstall the ID78K0-NS, using “C:\WINDOWS” as the directory in which Windows is
installed.
<1> Turn on power to the host machine (PC-9821 or IBM PC/AT) and start up Windows.
<2> Activate “Add/Remove Programs” from the control panel.
<3> Select “NEC ID78K0-NS 78K/0 Integrated Debugger V2.xx” from the list displayed in “Install/Uninstall” and
click
.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
31
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
<4> The Confirm File Deletion dialog box will be displayed next, so click
.
File deletion starts.
<5> The dialog box below will appear during deletion, so click
(if
is selected and
the files are not deleted here, the latest “TIPAD78K0A.DLL” will be overwritten when the ID78K Series is
reinstalled).
32
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
<6> The program will be deleted. When the message “Uninstall completed” appears, click
.
Uninstallation of ID78K0-NS is now complete.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
33
CHAPTER 3
STARTING AND EXITING
Note that in this chapter, the ID78K0-NS is treated as the representative product. If you are using another
product, take the ID78K0-NS as the other product.
This chapter explains how to start and exit the ID78K0-NS.
3.1 Starting
The start method is as follows:
<1> Turn on power to the in-circuit emulator and target system.
<2> Start Windows on the PC.
<3> Double-click the shortcut icon of the ID78K0-NS on the desktop to start up the ID78K0-NS (See Figure 3-1).
The Configuration dialog box will be displayed (See Figure 3-2).
Figure 3-1. ID78K0-NS Icon
Figure 3-2. Configuration Dialog Box on Starting
34
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 3
STARTING AND EXITING
<4> Operating environment parameters for the ID78K0-NS are set in this dialog box (refer to CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE). After setting the parameters, click the
button in the dialog box.
<5> The main window will then be opened (See Figure 3-3) and the ID78K0-NS can be operated.
Debugging operations are all carried out from this window.
Figure 3-3. Main Window
(1) Toolbar
(2) Window display area
(3) Status display area
Caution
Problems such as dialog boxes not displaying data correctly are sometimes experienced
when the ID78K0-NS is started up, or if an application error occurs while in use. One cause
of such problems may be that an old version of comctl32.dll, which comes with Windows
95, is being used. If this is the case, it will be necessary to update comctl32.dll using the
comctl32.dll 4.72 Installer (40comupd.exe) included with this product.
Note that if Windows 98 or Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.X or 4.X has been installed, this
update is unnecessary.
Figure 3-4. comctl32.dll 4.72 Installer
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
35
CHAPTER 3
STARTING AND EXITING
3.2 Exiting
The exit method is as follows:
<1> In the main window, select [File] → [Exit].
→ The following Exit Debugger dialog box will be displayed.
Figure 3-5. Exit Debugger Dialog Box
<2> Click the No button.
If the Yes button is clicked, the Save As dialog box is displayed
Note
, the current debugging environment is
saved to the project file, and all the windows are closed.
Note The Save As dialog box is displayed only when a project file name is not determined (otherwise, it is
not displayed).
36
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
This chapter explains the basic functions and processing conventions of the ID78K Series.
4.1 Mapping Function
4.1.1 Mapping function of ID78K0-NS (-NS) and ID78K4 (-NS)
The following seven types of mapping functions are available.
These mapping functions are set in the Configuration dialog box (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE).
(1) Internal ROM
The memory area specified as internal ROM is equivalent to the internal ROM of the target device.
If the target device writes data to the memory area, a write protect break occurs.
(2) Internal RAM
The memory area specified as internal RAM is equivalent to the internal RAM of the target device.
In this case, the target device accesses the memory in the in-circuit emulator.
(3) User area mapping (Target)
Note
The memory area specified for user area mapping is an area that accesses the memory on the target system.
In this case, the target device accesses the memory on the target system.
Note These memory areas can be set in address areas other than the internal ROM and internal RAM areas.
(4) Emulation ROM
Note
The memory area specified as emulation ROM is equivalent to the ROM connected to the target device.
Note These memory areas can be set in address areas other than the internal ROM and internal RAM areas.
(5) Emulation RAM
Note
The memory area specified as emulation RAM is equivalent to the RAM connected to the target device.
In this case, the target device accesses the memory in the in-circuit emulator.
Note These memory areas can be set in address areas other than the internal ROM and internal RAM areas.
(6) I/O protect area (I/O Protect)
The I/O protect area can be set in the area specified as Target. This area is displayed in the same manner as an
unmapped area on the Memory window (the symbol ?? is displayed). If this area is mapped with this attribute, it
can no longer be read or written easily, protecting it from erroneous access from the Memory window.
To read or write a value of the area mapped with this attribute, register in the SFR window or Watch window
(Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE).
(7) Stack area
Note
The area used as a stack area can be set as the stack area. Setting the stack area enables deletion of a “stack
overflow error” when data has overflowed from the stack area during program execution.
Note The ID78K4-NS does not support stack mapping.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
37
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
4.1.2 Mapping functions of ID78K0S-NS
For the ID78K0S-NS, the following type of mapping function is available.
This mapping function is set in the Configuration dialog box (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE).
(1) Stack area
The area used as a stack can be set as the stack area. Setting the stack area enables detection of a “stack
overflow error” when data has overflowed from the stack area during program execution.
4.2 Emulation Execution Functions
The emulation execution functions start the execution of the user program and the operation of the tracer and
timer by the emulation CPU.
These functions are classified as follows by the execution mode of the user program.
4.2.1 Real-time execution function
Real-time execution can be performed by the following commands.
• Go command (
button)
• Ignore break points and Go command (
button)
• Start command (no button)
• Go & Go command (no button)
• Come command (no button)
• Restart command (
• Return Out command (
button)
button)
button)
(1) Go command (
This command executes the user program starting from the address indicated by the current PC register.
Execution of the user program is stopped when a specified break event condition is satisfied.
Each analyzer gets ready to operate when the user program is executed, and is executed or stopped
depending on whether each event condition (trace event condition, timer event condition, etc.) is satisfied or
not.
(2) Ignore break points and Go command (
button)
This command executes the user program, ignoring the set break conditions (both hardware and software
conditions).
(3) Start command
This command executes the user program starting from a specified address. Execution of the user program
is stopped when a specified break event condition is satisfied.
(4) Go & Go command
This command executes the user program starting from the address indicated by the current PC register.
Execution of the user program is stopped once if a specified break event condition is satisfied. The contents
of each window are updated, and the user program is then executed again starting from the address where it
stopped. These operations are repeated until the user issues a Stop command.
38
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
(5) Come command
This command executes the user program starting from the address indicated by the current PC register to
the address selected in the line/address display area on the Source window or Assemble window (Refer to
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE), and then a break occurs.
While the user program is being executed by this command, the break event currently set does not occur.
(6) Restart command (
button)
This command resets the emulation CPU and then executes the user program starting from address 0.
This operation is the same as when the Go command is executed following reset of the emulation CPU prior
to user program execution.
(7) Return Out command (
button)
This command executes until execution returns to the calling function.
This command may not operate properly with assembler functions, etc.
4.2.2 Non real-time execution function
Non real-time execution can be performed by using the following commands.
• Step In command (
• Return Out command (
• Next Over command (
button)
button)
button)
• Slowmotion command (no button)
button)
(1) Step In command (
The operation performed by this command differs as follows depending on the debugging mode.
(a) “Source level” mode
One line of the source text is executed starting from the current PC register value, and the contents of
each window are updated.
(b) “Instruction level” mode
One instruction is executed starting from the current PC register value, and the contents of each window
are updated.
(2) Return Out command (
button)
This command executes the program in real-time from the current PC register value to the calling source,
and updates the contents of each window.
(3) Next Over command (
button)
The operation of this command differs depending on the debugging mode.
(a) Source level
Next step execution is performed for one line of the source text from the current PC register value and
the contents of each window are updated.
(b) Instruction level
Next step execution is performed for one instruction from the current PC register value and the contents
of each window are updated.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
39
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
(4) Slowmotion command
This command executes one line in the “source level” mode, or one instruction in the “instruction level”
mode, starting from the address indicated by the current PC register. The contents of each window are
updated each time this command is executed. These operations are repeated until the user issues a Stop
command.
4.3 Event Function
An event is a “specific status of the target system” during the execution of the user program, for example “address
0x1000 fetched” and “data written to address 0x1000” showing the specific status of the target system during
debugging.
The ID78K Series use these events as action triggers for break, trace, timer measurement, snapshot, DMM
event
Note
, and stub functions. An event function sets, deletes, or references the “specific status of the target system”
that triggers an action (debug action) as an “event condition”.
Note The DMM event function is provided only in the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS.
4.3.1 Using event function
To use an action that is triggered by an event in accordance with the user’s debugging aims, the event conditions
shown in Table 4-1 must be set.
Table 4-1. Relationship Between Event Conditions and Setting Dialog Box
Event Condition
Setting Dialog Box
Function
Break event condition
Break dialog box
Condition to execute user program or stop operation of tracer and
timer
Trace event condition
Trace dialog box
Start/end condition when execution process of user program is
saved in trace memory
Timer event condition Note 1
Timer dialog box
Start/end condition when execution time of user program is
measured
Snap event conditionNote 1
Snap Shot dialog box
Trigger condition for executing snapshot
DMM dialog box
Condition to write arbitrary data to specified address when a
specified event is established during execution of user program
Stub dialog box
Condition in which execution jumps to specified address if
specified event is established.
DMM event condition
Note 2
Stub event conditionNote 3
Notes 1. Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2. Supported only in the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS
3. Supported only in the ID78K4
These event conditions are set by using an “event condition” or “event link condition” alone or in combination.
To use the event function of the ID78K Series, therefore, the necessary “event condition” and “event link condition”
are first created, and then the event conditions shown in Table 4-1 are set by using these conditions.
40
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
4.3.2 Event conditions
How to create each event condition is explained next.
(1) Creating event conditions
An “event condition” is set in the Event dialog box (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). An address
condition, status condition, data condition, external sense data condition, and access size condition are set in
this dialog box. A name is given to the combination of these conditions for registration. The maximum number of
event conditions that can be registered in the Event dialog box is 256. The maximum number of event conditions
that can be simultaneously used for each event condition is 28 (16 execution events and 12 access events) for
the IE-78K0-NS + IE-78K0S-NS-PA, IE-78K0-NS-A, and IE-78K0S-NS-A, 12 (8 execution events and 4 access
events) for the IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0S-NS, 10 (3 execution events and 7 access events) for the IE-784000-R,
and 8 (4 execution events and 4 access events) for the IE-78K4-NS.
Table 4-2 lists the contents of each condition that can be set in the Event dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
41
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
Table 4-2. Each Condition That Can Be Set in Event Dialog Box
Condition
Contents
Address condition
Uses a specified address or address range as an event.
In the ID78K0 (-NS) and ID78K0S-NS, a mask value cannot be set for the specified address. A
mask value can only be set for the specified address in the ID78K4 (-NS).
To set an address range, an error occurs unless the start address is an even address and the
end address is an odd address.
Note that bits can also be set (address.bit).
Status condition
Uses a status for an address condition as an event. The status is selected from the following.
[ID78K (-NS), ID78K0S-NS]
Execution of instruction
ExecutionNote 1:
Before Execution Note 2: Execution of instruction (Break before execution)
Read:
Write:
R/W:
External Trigger1 Note 2:
External Trigger2 Note 2:
Reading memory
Writing memory
Reading/writing memory
External trigger (1 bit)
External trigger (ID78K0-NS:
8 bits)
(ID-78K0S-NS: 16 bits)
[ID78K4 (-NS)]
ExecutionNote 1:
Execution of instruction
Opcode Fetch:
Before Execution:
R/WNote 3:
ReadNote 3:
WriteNote 3:
Op code fetch
Execution of instruction (break before execution)
Reading/writing memory
Reading memory
Writing memory
R/W by Macro:
Read by Macro:
Write by Macro:
R/W by Program:
Read by Program:
Write by Program:
Vector Read:
Access:
External Trigger:
Data read/write by macro service
Data read by macro service
Data write by macro service
Data read/write by program
Data read by program
Data write by program
Vector read by interrupt
All accesses
External trigger (1 bit)
Data condition
Uses the data detected by a status condition as an event. A mask value can be set for the
data.
External sense data condition
Uses the data of the external probe signal as an event. A mask value can be set for an
external sense data condition.
Notes 1. If Execution is selected as the status condition, the address mask, data, data mask, and access size
conditions are invalid.
2. Not supported in the ID78K0
3. Not supported in the ID78K4
42
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
(2) Event condition type
Event conditions are classified into the three event types shown in the table below. These event types are
automatically determined by selecting the desired status condition when creating an event condition.
Table 4-3 lists the event condition types.
Table 4-3. Event Condition Types
[ID78K (-NS), ID78K0S-NS]
Event Type
Status
Function
Execution event
Execution
Before Execution
External Trigger1
External Trigger2
Event condition is satisfied when user program begins
execution of instruction at specified address and when data
is input to external sense clip at that time. Up to 18 event
conditions of this type can be used for each event condition.
Access event
Program Read
Program Write
Program R/W
When the user program accesses specified memory, up to
12 event conditions of this type can be used for each event
condition.
[ID78K4 (-NS)]
Event Type
Status
Function
Execution event
Execution
An event condition is satisfied when the user program
attempts to execute an instruction at the specified address
and when data is input to an external sense clip at that time.
Up to 18 event conditions of this type can be used for each
event condition.
Access event
Opcode Fetch
Before Execution
R/WNote
ReadNote
WriteNote
When the user program accesses specified memory, up to
12 event conditions of this type can be used for each event
condition.
R/W by Macro
Read by Macro
Write by Macro
R/W by Program
Read by Program
Write by Program
Vector Read
Access
External TriggerNote
Note Not supported in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
43
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
(3) Creating event link condition
An “event link condition” is a condition under which a sequential rule is applied to the respective events to treat
the events as a single event. An event link condition is created in the Event Link dialog box (Refer to CHAPTER
6 WINDOW REFERENCE). By arranging the event conditions first registered in the Event dialog box in random
order in the Event Link dialog box, these event conditions can be registered under one name as single event link
condition. The registered event link condition can be used to set various event conditions in the same manner as
event conditions.
The maximum number of event link conditions that can be set in the Event Link dialog box is 256. However, up to
three event conditions can be simultaneously used in the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS, and up to two event
conditions can be used in the ID78K4. Only one event condition can be used in the ID78K0 and ID78K4-NS.
(4) Displaying setting status of event condition
All the registered event conditions and event link conditions are managed or displayed in the Event Manager
(Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). The setting status of all the event conditions created by using
the event conditions or event link condition are also managed or displayed in the Event Manager.
In the Event Manager (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE), a mark indicating the type of each event
condition, and an icon indicating an event name specified for registration are displayed.
(5) Setting each event condition
The event conditions shown in Table 4-1 are created in each setting dialog box. Each event condition is created
by dragging the event condition registered in the Event Manager, or the icon of an event link condition, to the
condition item in each setting dialog box.
A created event condition is “set” by clicking the function button Set or OK in the setting dialog box, or by
clicking the mark of the event icon in the Event Manager and display it in red. By setting a created event
condition, a debug action occurs as an event condition.
For all the event conditions it is possible to “register” up to 256 conditions, but the number of conditions that can
be “set” differs depending on each event condition.
44
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
4.4 Break Functions
The break functions stop the execution of the user program and the operation of the tracer and timer by the
emulation CPU.
The following six types of break functions are available.
• Event detection break
• Break by Come function
• Software break
• Break on satisfaction of condition during step execution
• Forced break
• Fail-safe break
When the Come, Step In, Return Out, or Next Over command of the emulation execution functions is executed,
event detection break and detection of software break are not performed.
Each break function is explained below.
(1) Event detection break
An event detection break is a function to stop the execution of the user program by detecting a set break event
condition. This function is used to stop a user program executed by the Go, Go & Go, and Restart commands.
When the Go & Go command has been executed, the contents of each window are updated and the user
program is then executed again after an event detection break has been implemented. Set break events as
follows:
• Set a break event in the Source window or Assemble window as an execution event.
• Set a break event in the Break dialog box (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE).
(2) Break by Come function
The break by Come function is a function to stop a user program executed by the Come command by detecting
an address specified in the Source window or Assemble window. After user program execution has been
stopped, the breakpoint by Come function is eliminated.
While the user program is being executed using this function, the currently set break event does not occur.
(3) Software break
A software break is a function to stop a user program executed by the Go, Go & Go, or Restart command, by
detecting a specified address.
While event detection breaks use one hardware resource for one event condition, a software break can set a
breakpoint to two or more addresses.
(4) Break on satisfaction of condition during step execution
This is a function to stop the execution of the user program when the end condition of each command (Step In,
Next Over, Return Out, or Slowmotion) is satisfied.
Because one instruction at a time is executed, stopped, and condition checked, the processing time of this
function is slower than that of real-time execution.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
45
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
(5) Forced break
A forced break is a function to forcibly stop the execution of the user program. This function is valid for all the
program execution commands. A forced break is implemented by the following command.
• Stop command
Forcibly stops the execution of the user program.
(6) Fail-safe break
A fail-safe break is a function to forcibly stop the user program when there has been an execution prohibiting the
user program from accessing the memory and registers.
The following three types of fail-safe break functions are available.
(a) Non-map break
This break occurs if an attempt is made to access non-mapping area.
(b) Write-protect break
This break occurs if an attempt is made to write to memory that must not be written to, such as ROM.
(c) SFR illegal access break
This break occurs if an attempt is made to access an SFR illegally.
If a fail-safe break occurs, the chances are the user program has a problem or the set environment of the ID78K
Series is wrong.
Caution
A non-map break may occur if the user program is written in the vicinity of the boundary
between the mapping area and non-mapping area. This non-map break occurs in the following
case.
[Maximum address value of mapping area − 5] ≤ [Program address]
≤ [Maximum address value of mapping area]
46
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
4.5 Trace Function
The trace function is to save the history of the data indicating the execution process of the user program in the
trace memory. The trace data saved in the trace memory can be displayed on the Trace View window (refer to
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE).
The functions related to the trace operation and trace are explained below.
4.5.1 Operation of trace
The trace memory of the ID78K0 (-NS) and ID78K0S-NS is a ring buffer with a capacity of 8,192 frames, and that
of the ID78K4 (-NS) is a ring buffer with a capacity of 32,768 frames. If trace is executed exceeding these frame
limits, therefore, the newest frame data overwrites the oldest frame.
The operation of the tracer differs as follows depending on the execution mode of the user program.
(1) Operation during real-time execution
The operation of the tracer differs depending on the specified trace mode.
Trace Mode
Operation of Tracer
All trace
Starts trace when real-time execution of program is specified, and ends trace
when break occurs
Conditional trace
Starts/ends trace when condition set on Trace dialog box is satisfied (if break
occurs before that, however, trace is immediately stopped)
(2) Operation during Step In execution
The tracer operates each time one step is executed, and the trace data of one step is consecutively added to
the trace memory.
(3) Operation during Next Over execution
The operation of the tracer is the same as in Step In execution.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
47
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
4.5.2 Trace condition setting function
The setting function of a trace condition is as follows.
(1) Setting of trace mode
The following two trace modes can be set.
Trace Mode
Trace Contents
All trace
Unconditionally traces all execution processes of user program (default)
Conditional trace
Traces only specified zone
These trace modes are set by selecting [Run] from the main window (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW
REFERENCE) followed by [Uncond. Trace ON]/[Cond. Trace ON].
To stop the tracer function, select [Run] from the main window, followed by [Tracer Stop] (this is valid only
when [Ignore Break Point] under [Run] in the main window has been checked).
(2) Setting trace event condition
A trace event condition is a condition under which trace execution is started/ended if the conditional trace is
selected as the trace mode.
The trace event condition can be set on the Trace dialog box (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW
REFERENCE). Up to 256 trace event conditions can be registered, of which only one (ten in the ID78K4)
can be set.
The following two modes can be selected for the conditional trace.
(a)
Section trace
In this mode, trace is started when a specified trace start condition is satisfied, and ends when a
specified trace end condition is satisfied. As a start/end condition, an event condition or event link
condition is used.
(b)
Qualify trace
In this mode, trace is executed only when a specified address is executed or accessed. An event
condition is used as the event trigger.
48
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
4.5.3 Trace result display function
The result of a trace can be checked in the Trace View window (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE).
The Trace View window displays each frame of the trace contents of the following items shown in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4. Trace Data Display Contents
Displayed Item
Frame
Contents
Frame number of trace memory indicating time sequence
Note
Time
Execution time of each frame
Address
Fetch address
Data
Fetch data
Status
Fetch status
Address
Access address
Data
Access data
Status
Access status
Note
Ext Probe
Input data of external sense clip
DisAsm
Disassemble result
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Displayed Item and Contents can be selected by opening the Trace Data Select dialog box under [View] →
[Select…] in the main window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
49
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
4.6 Coverage Measurement Function (Other than ID78K4-NS)
The coverage measurement function is for registering a status for each address when the user program is
executed. The ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS have a coverage memory of 64 KB and can measure any 64 KB space.
In the ID78K4, a 1 MB space of 0 to FFFFFH can be measured.
Coverage measurement can be performed by selecting [Option] → [Coverage ON] in the main window, and the
measurements are recorded in the coverage memory when a program is executed.
The result of coverage can be checked in the Coverage window. The coverage efficiency can be displayed in the
Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box.
4.7 Snapshot Function (Other than ID78K4-NS)
The snapshot function is used to preserve the contents of register memory in the course of user program
execution and the contents of the SFRs in the trace memory as snap data.
A trigger that executes this snapshot is specified by a snap event condition. The snap event condition is set in the
Snap Shot dialog box. When the snap event condition set in this dialog box is satisfied, the following data can be
collected as snap data.
• Register values (program registers and system registers)
• SFR values
• Memory contents
One snap event condition can be specified to collect snap data up to 16 times.
50
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
4.8 Load/Save Functions
The load/save functions are for loading load modules and symbol information, and loading/saving data and
debugging environments.
The ID78K Series individually loads/saves each file. The following two types of files are loaded/saved.
• Display files:
Files recording the screen information when they are saved. By loading these files, the
reference file is opened in the Source window.
Files recording various set data and debugging environments as the internal information of
the ID78K Series.
• Information files:
4.8.1 Display files
Table 4-5 lists the display files handled by the ID78K Series.
Table 4-5. Display Files Handled by ID78K Series
File Name (Extension)
Outline
Variable display file (.WCH)
Shows variable information in Watch window
Assemble display file (.DIS)
Shows assemble information in Assemble window
Memory display file (.MEM)
Shows memory information in Memory window
Register display file (.REG)
Shows register information in Register window
Stack trace display file (.STK)
Shows stack trace information in Stack window
SFR display file (.SFR)
Shows SFR information in SFR window
Local variable display file (.LOC)
Shows local variable information in Local Variable
window
Trace display file (.TVW)
Shows trace information in Trace View window
Note
Coverage display file
(.COV)
Source display file (.SVW)
Operation Window
View File Load dialog box,
View File Save dialog box
Shows coverage information in Coverage window
Shows text information in Source window
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
51
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
4.8.2 Information files
Table 4-6 lists the information files handled by the ID78K Series.
Table 4-6. Information Files Handled by ID78K Series
File Name (Extension)
Outline
Operation Window
Object file (.HEX)
Stores object code of user program
Download dialog box
Upload dialog box
Load module file (.LNK, .LMF, .D2BNote 1)
Stores object code of user program, symbol, and
source information
Download dialog box
Project file (.PRJ)
Stores debugging environment
Project File Load dialog box
Project File Save dialog box
Binary file (.BIN)
Stores data of binary format
Download dialog box
Upload dialog box
Event set file (.EVN)
Stores event set information of Event Manager
View File Load dialog box
View File Save dialog box
Coverage result fileNote 2 (.CVB)
Stores coverage result
Download dialog box
Upload dialog box
Notes 1. “.D35” in ID78K4 (-NS)
2. Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
The project file sets window/dialog box display information, size, and display area when it is loaded to restore the
previous debugging environment (the status when the project file was saved).
52
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 4
FUNCTIONS OF ID78K SERIES
4.9 Register Manipulation Functions
The register manipulation functions are for displaying or changing the contents of the 78K/0 Series and 78K/0S
Series microprocessors’ program registers (PC and rp0 to rp3), system registers (SP and PSW) (program registers
(rp0 to 7) and system registers (PC, SP, and PSW) for the 78K/IV Series), and SFRs. These functions can be used in
the Register window or SFR window (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE).
4.10 Memory Manipulation Functions
The memory manipulation functions are for displaying or changing the contents of the memory by using
mnemonic, hexadecimal, and ASCII codes. These functions can be used in the Memory window or Assemble window
(refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE).
4.11 Time Measurement Function
The time measurement function is for measuring the total execution time from the start of execution of the user
program to the end, and the execution time in a certain zone of the user program by using timer event.
Only Run-Break can be executed in the ID78K0.
In the ID78K4-NS, the time of the zone set for zone trace can be measured.
This function can be used in the Timer dialog box (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE).
Caution
The number of usable timers is 1.
4.12 Real-Time RAM Sampling Function
The real-time RAM sampling function reads the memory contents in real time and updates the displayed contents
when a variable allocated to any 1 KB in internal RAM area, whose contents can be read even during execution of
the user program, is displayed (Variable window) or the memory contents are displayed (Memory window).
In the ID78K4-NS, RRM can be executed only in the internal high-speed RAM (IRAM).
In the ID78K4, RRM can be executed in the internal high-speed RAM (IRAM) and internal peripheral RAM
(PRAM). However, the values of ROM/RAM in the entire memory space can be read, stopping the program
temporarily, depending on the setting of the Extended Option setting dialog box (pseudo-RRM function)
Note
.
The sampling time for real-time RAM sampling can be set in units of 1 ms in the Extended Option dialog box (refer
to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE).
Note The pseudo-RRM function is supported in Ver.2.30 or later.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
53
CHAPTER 5
ASSOCIATION WITH PROJECT MANAGER
This chapter explains the procedure and notes on using the functions associated with the Project Manager (PM
hereafter). The ID78K Series can automatically perform a sequence of tasks such as creating a program, compiling,
debugging, and correcting the program, in association with the PM.
To debug a load module file created in the PM at the source level, confirm that the item [Option] → [Debug] is
checked for building.
TM
Caution When a load module file is created by using an MS-DOS
prompt, the functions of the ID78K
Series associated with the PM cannot be used.
5.1 Debugger Registration in PM Project
Either of the debuggers for ID78K Series/SM78K Series can be specified for each project in the PM.
The selection procedure is explained below (the ID78K0-NS is treated as the representative product in the
following explanation).
5.1.1 Debugger selection
The procedure for selecting the debugger is as follows.
<1> Select [Project] → [New] in the PM to create a new project for the PM. Alternatively, read an existing PM
project by selecting [Project] → [Open…].
→ For details of the setting items, refer to the PM online help or user’s manual.
<2> Select [Option] → [Select Debugger…] from the PM menu bar.
→ This opens the Select Debugger Type dialog box. Figure 5-1 shows the Select Debugger Type dialog
box.
Figure 5-1. Select Debugger Type Dialog Box (PM)
54
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 5
ASSOCIATION WITH PROJECT MANAGER
<3> Either click “78K/0 System Debugger” by mouse from the debugger list, or specify the execution file name
IDK032A.EXE (with path) for the debugger file name.
<4> Click OK.
→ ID78K0-NS will now be registered as the project debugger of the open PM.
The ID78K0-NS icon will also be displayed on the PM toolbar.
5.2 Starting Up ID78K Series from PM
One of the following three methods can be used to start up the ID78K Series from the PM.
(1) Click the ID78K Series startup button on the PM toolbar.
(2) Select [Build] → [Debug] from the PM menu bar.
(3) Select [Build] → [Build and Debug] from the PM menu bar. Alternatively, click the batch-processing button on
the PM toolbar (however, the ID78K Series will start up only if Build has finished normally).
5.2.1 Reproducing debug environment
By following the procedure shown below, it is possible to reproduce the debug environment of the previous time the
ID78K Series was started up from the PM.
<1> Create a new project file
Note
with the PM (eg: aaa.prj)
Note Use the project file to save and reference the environment data for the debugger (ID78K Series) and
the PM. The project file extension when dealing with the debugger and PM is prj. Refer to the online
help or user’s manual of each product regarding the data that is saved and reproduced using a project
file.
<2> Start up the ID78K Series from the PM. Because the project file is new, set items other than the device
classification in the Configuration dialog box, in the same way as when starting up the ID78K Series
individually.
<3> Debug the target device with the ID78K Series.
<4> When the ID78K Series has finished debugging, click the Yes button in the Exit Debugger dialog box and
exit the ID78K Series.
→ The debug environment at the completion of ID78K Series debugging is saved to the aaa.prj file (the
debug environment can also be saved to the aaa.prj file at times other than the completion of ID78K
Series debugging).
<5> When the ID78K Series is next started up after the aaa.prj file is read by the PM, the debug environment
saved in <4> above is automatically reproduced.
→ The project file currently being used by the PM (aaa.prj) is automatically read when the ID78K Series is
started up.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
55
CHAPTER 5
ASSOCIATION WITH PROJECT MANAGER
5.3 Correction and Auto Load of Source File
If a bug is found as a result of debugging using the ID78K Series, source file editing, compiling, and redownloading can be automatically executed using the following procedure while the ID78K Series remains activated
(the ID78K0-NS is treated as the representative product in the following explanation).
Caution If [Option] → [Project Manager Options...] is selected in the PM, and if an editor other than the
standard editor is selected, this processing cannot be performed.
<1> Read the source file to be corrected with the ID78K0-NS in the Source window. With the Source window
displayed at the foremost position, select [File] →[Open…] on the main window to specify the corresponding
file (if the corresponding file has already been displayed in the Source window, activate the window).
→ The corresponding file is displayed in the Source window.
<2> Select [Edit] → [Edit Source] in the ID78K0-NS main window.
→ The corresponding source file is automatically read to the standard editor and opened.
<3> Correct the source file in the editor.
<4> Select [File] → [Save] in the editor and save the file.
<5> Select [File] → [Exit idea-L] in the editor to terminate the editor.
→ As a result, the PM automatically executes compiling, assembling, and linking in accordance with the
settings of the project. When these operations have been completed normally, the created load module
file is automatically downloaded to the ID78K0-NS.
Cautions 1. When the load module file is automatically downloaded, CPU reset is not executed.
2. The debug window, which was opened when the editor was called, and all event
settings are restored. However, if the previously used lines and symbols have been
deleted because of source file correction, an error message is displayed, and an event
using the deleted symbol cannot be used.
56
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
This chapter explains in detail the functions of the windows and dialog boxes of the ID78K Series. For the
configuration and details of the types of the windows and dialog boxes, refer to APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY.
6.1 Window List
Table 6-1 lists the windows of the ID78K Series debugger.
Table 6-1. Windows of ID78K Series Debugger (1/2)
Window Name
Outline
Page
Main window
This window is displayed first when the debugger is started.
It controls execution of the user program. In addition, various windows are opened
from this window.
p.60
Configuration dialog box
Sets/displays the debugger environment
p.86
Bank Set dialog box
Sets the memory banks
p.92
Mask Option dialog box
Sets the mask options
p.95
Extended Option dialog box
Sets/displays each extended option
p.97
Debugger Option dialog box
Sets/displays each option
p.103
Font dialog box
Sets the type and size of the display font in the Source window
p.111
Project File Load dialog box
Reads debugging environment
p.114
Project File Save dialog box
Saves the debugging environment
p.117
View File Load dialog box
Reads the display files of each window and the source text and event setting files
p.121
View File Save dialog box
Saves the display files of the current window and the event setting files
p.124
Download dialog box
Downloads the object files, binary files, and coverage results
p.130
Upload dialog box
Saves the memory or coverage contents to a file
p.134
Browse dialog box
Selects the files to be set in the Debugger Option and Source Search dialog boxes
p.137
Source Move dialog box
Specifies the files to be displayed in the Source window and the display start
position
p.139
Address Move dialog box
Specifies the display start address for the Memory, Assemble, and Coverage
windows
p.142
Trace Move dialog box
Specifies the display start position for the Trace View window
p.145
Symbol To Address dialog box
Displays the addresses and symbol values of variables and functions
p.148
Source window
Displays source files and text files
p.151
Source Search dialog box
Searches a character string in a source file
p.164
Assemble window
Displays the disassemble text and executes on-line assemble
p.167
Assemble Search dialog box
Searches the contents of the Assemble window
p.178
Memory window
Displays/changes the memory contents
p.181
Memory Search dialog box
Searches the contents of the Memory window
p.186
Memory Fill dialog box
Initializes the memory contents by specified data
p.189
Memory Copy dialog box
Copies the memory contents
p.191
Memory Compare dialog box
Compares the memory contents
p.193
Memory Compare Result dialog
box
Displays the result of comparison of memory contents
p.195
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
57
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 6-1. Windows of ID78K Series Debugger (2/2)
Window Name
Outline
Page
Pseudo DMM dialog box
Sets the address and data for DMM.
p.197
Watch window
Displays/changes variables
p.199
Quick Watch dialog box
Displays/changes variable values temporarily
p.204
Add Watch dialog box
Registers variables to be displayed in the Watch window
p.208
Change Watch dialog box
Changes data on the line selected in the Watch window.
p.211
Register window
Displays/changes register (program register, system register) contents
p.214
SFR window
Displays/changes contents of SFR
p.218
SFR Select dialog box
Selects SFRs and I/O ports to be displayed in the SFR window
p.222
Add I/O Port dialog box
Registers I/O ports to be displayed in the SFR window
p.225
Local Variable window
Displays/changes local variable in current function
p.228
Stack window
Displays/changes the stack contents of the current user program
p.231
Trace View window
Displays the trace results
p.236
Trace Search dialog box
Searches the trace data
p.246
Trace Data Select dialog box
Selects items to be displayed in the Trace View window
p.254
Coverage window
Displays the coverage results
p.258
Coverage Search dialog box
Searches the coverage results
p.263
Coverage Clear dialog box
Clears the coverage results
p.266
Coverage-Condition Setting
dialog box
Sets the coverage efficiency of the measurement range
p.268
Coverage-Efficiency View dialog
box
Displays the coverage results in terms of efficiency
p.271
Event Manager
Displays, switches enable/disable, or deletes each event
p.274
Software Break Manager
Displays, switches enable/disable, or deletes a software break
p.284
Event dialog box
Registers/displays an event condition
p.287
Event Link dialog box
Registers/displays an event link condition
p.303
Break dialog box
Registers/sets/displays a break event condition
p.313
Trace dialog box
Registers/sets/displays a trace event condition
p.320
Snap Shot dialog box
Registers/sets/displays a snap event condition
p.331
Stub dialog box
Registers/sets/displays a stub event condition
p.346
Timer dialog box
Displays the result of execution time measurement and registers/sets/displays
timer event conditions
p.354
Timer Result dialog box
Displays the results of the executed measurement
p.365
DMM dialog box
Sets dynamic memory modification
p.368
Pass Count dialog box
Sets the pass count
p.374
Delay Count dialog box
Sets the delay count
p.376
Reset Debugger dialog box
Initializes the ID78K Series, and target CPU and symbol information
p.378
About dialog box
Displays the version of the ID78K Series
p.380
Exit Debugger dialog box
Terminates the ID78K Series
p.381
Error/Warning dialog box
Displays an error/warning message
p.383
Console window
Command input window.
p.384
58
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
6.2 Explanation of Windows
This section explains each window using the format shown below.
Window Name
The window name is indicated in this frame.
General
Briefly explains the window.
Opening method
Explains how to open the window.
Window
Shows the screen image of the window configuration.
Function
Explains each function of the window.
Function buttons
Explains the operations of the function buttons in the window.
Menu bar
Enumerates the menus pulled down from the menu bar, and explains the function of each menu.
Caution
Explains points of caution to be noted.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
59
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Main Window
General
This window is automatically opened after the ID78K Series is started and initialization is complete. It remains
displayed until the ID78K Series is terminated. Various windows are opened and manipulated from this window.
Execution of the user program is also controlled in this window. Execution of the user program can be controlled in
three modes: source mode, instruction mode, and automatic mode.
• Source mode
Debugging is performed at the source level.
• Instruction mode
Debugging is performed at the instruction level.
• Automatic mode
Switches automatically between the source mode and instruction mode.
This window is in the source mode (other than mixed display mode) or the instruction mode when the Source
window is active and in the instruction mode when the Assemble window is active. When neither window is
active, this window is in the source mode.
When starting the ID78K Series, the automatic mode is assumed.
Window
Figure 6-1. Main Window
(1) Toolbar
(2) Window display area
(3) Status display area
60
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The main window consists of the following areas.
• Menu bar
• Toolbar
• Window display area
• Status display area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Toolbar
The toolbar consists of buttons that can execute frequently used commands with a single click. Each button is
graphically displayed and easy to understand. This button group can be switched between “Graphics-only
buttons” and “Graphics + Text buttons” by the Debugger Option dialog box. The function of each button can
also be executed using the menu bar in this window. This toolbar is not shown when it is specified not to be
displayed by selecting [Option] → [Tool Bar] from the menu bar of this window.
Figure 6-2. Toolbar
Graphics-only toolbar
Graphics + text toolbar
An explanation of each button is given below.
This button stops execution of the user program.
The same function as [Run] → [Stop] on the menu bar.
This button runs the user program after the emulation CPU is reset.
The same function as [Run] → [Restart] on the menu bar.
This button runs the user program without resetting the emulation CPU.
The same function as [Run] → [Go] on the menu bar.
This button executes the user program, ignoring the set break conditions (both hardware and
software conditions).
The same function as [Run] → [Ignore break points and Go] on the menu bar.
This button executes the program in real-time until execution returns to the calling function.
The same function as [Run] → [Return Out] on the menu bar.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
61
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
This button is used for step execution.
By clicking this button successively, the program is executed by as many steps as the number
of times this button is clicked. Step execution is performed in line units in the source mode,
and in instruction units in the instruction mode.
The same function as [Run] → [Step In] on the menu bar.
This button executes the next step (i.e. executes the program, regarding the function/call
statement as one step.).
By clicking this button successively, next step execution is performed as many times as the
number of times this button is clicked. Next step execution is performed in line units in the
source mode, and in instruction units in the instruction mode.
The same function as [Run] → [Next Over] on the menu bar.
This button resets the emulation CPU.
The same function as [Run] → [CPU Reset] on the menu bar.
This button opens the View File Load dialog box.
The same function as [File] → [Open…] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Download dialog box.
The same function as [File] → [Download…] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Project File Load dialog box.
The same function as [File] → [Project] → [Open…] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Source window and displays the contents of the source text.
The same function as [Browse] → [Source Text] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Assemble window, where the user program is disassembled and
displayed.
The same function as [Browse] → [Assemble] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Memory window and displays the memory contents.
The same function as [Browse] → [Memory] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Watch window and displays the watch contents.
The same function as [Browse] → [Watch] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Register window and displays the contents of the registers.
The same function as [Browse] → [Register] on the menu bar.
This button opens the SFR window and displays the contents of the SFRs.
The same function as [Browse] → [SFR] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Local Variable window and displays the local variable contents.
The same function as [Browse] → [Local Variable] on the menu bar.
62
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
This button opens the Stack window and displays the contents of the stack.
The same function as [Browse] → [Stack Trace] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Trace View window and displays the result of a trace.
The same function as [Browse] → [Trace] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Coverage window and displays the coverage measurement results
Note
.
The same function as [Browse] → [Coverage] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Event Manager.
The same function as [Event] → [Event Manager] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Event dialog box and registers or sets events.
The same function as [Event] → [Event...] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Break dialog box and registers, sets, or displays break events.
The same function as [Event] → [Break…] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Trace dialog box and registers, sets, or displays trace events.
The same function as [Event] → [Trace…] on the menu bar.
This button opens the Timer dialog box, registers, sets, or displays timer events, and displays
the result of timer measurement.
The same function as [Event] → [Timer…] on the menu bar.
Note This is valid when the performance board is attached, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used,
or when the IE-784000-R is used.
(a) Tool hint function
If the mouse cursor is pointed at any of the buttons on the toolbar, a tool hint pops up after a few
seconds.
Figure 6-3. Example of Tool Hint
(b) Moving the toolbar
By dragging toolbar with the mouse, it can be moved to any desired position within or outside the main
window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
63
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Window display area
This area displays various debug windows.
The displayed window can be changed in size or registered as an icon in this area. The list of the windows
displayed in this area is as follows.
• Source window
• Local variable window
• Assemble window
• Stack window
• Watch window
• Trace View window
• Memory window
• Coverage window
• Register window
• Event Manager
• SFR window
(3) Status display area
Figure 6-4. Status Bar
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
This area displays the status of the debugger and in-circuit emulator.
<1> Program name $ Source name # Line No.
Program name:
Displays the program file name indicated by the PC value.
Source name:
Displays the source file name indicated by the PC value.
Line No.:
Displays the line number indicated by the PC value.
<2> Function name:
Displays the function name indicated by the PC value.
<3> PC value:
Displays the current PC value.
<4> CPU status:
Displays the status of the CPU (target device) (not displayed in the ID78K0-NS).
<5> IE status:
Displays the status of the in-circuit emulator (RUN, BREAK mode).
Displays the character “|” as a delimiter if there are multiple states.
If “RUN” is displayed (while the user program is being executed), the color of the status
bar changes to red, indicating that program execution is in progress.
64
<6> Break cause:
Displays the cause of the break.
<7> STEP mode:
Displays the step execution mode.
<8> Key input mode:
Displays the key input mode.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The types of IE and CPU statuses are shown below.
Table 6-2. IE Status Display Contents
Status Indication
Note
Meaning
RUN
Currently running a user program.
STEP
Currently executing a step.
TRC
Currently operating a trace.
TIM
Currently operating a timer.
COV
Currently operating coverage.
BREAK
Break
Note If “RUN” is displayed, the color of the status bar changes to red, indicating that program
execution is in progress.
Table 6-3. CPU Status Display Contents
Status Indication
Meaning
STANDBY
In standby mode
H-STOP
In hardware stop mode
HOLD
Bus holdNote
WAIT
Bus waitNote
POW OFF
Power is not supplied to the target system
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
The causes of a break are as follows.
Table 6-4. Display Contents of Break Cause
Displayed Cause
Meaning
Manual Break
Forcible break
Temporary Break
Temporary break
Event Break
Break by event
Software Break
Break by software break event
Non Map Break
Access in non-map area
Write Protect
Write access to write-protected area
SFR Illegal
Illegal access to SFR
Note 1
Stack Overflow
Relocation Break
Notes 1.
2.
Note 2
Break by stack overflow
Execution of LOCATION instruction different from default
Cannot be detected in the ID78K4-NS
Supported only in the ID78K4 (-NS)
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
65
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The types of STEP modes are shown below.
Table 6-5. STEP Modes
STEP Mode
Meaning
SRC
STEP execution is in the source mode. This is displayed when
[Option] → [Source Mode] in the menu bar is selected.
INST
STEP execution is in the instruction mode. This is displayed
when [Option] → [Instruction Mode] in the menu bar is
selected.
AUTO
STEP execution is in the automatic mode. This is displayed
when [Option] → [Auto Mode] on the menu bar is selected.
The types of key input modes are shown below.
Table 6-6. Key Input Modes
Key Input Mode
66
Meaning
INS
Displayed when key input is in the insert mode.
OVR
Displayed when key input is in the overwrite mode.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Menu bar
(1) File
Figure 6-5. File Menu Bar
File
_
Edit
_
View
_
Option
_
Run
_
Event
_
Browse
_
Jump
_
Window
_
Help
_
Open...
_
Save As...
_
Close
_
Download...
_
Upload...
_
Project
_
Debugger Reset...
_
Open...
_
Save
_
Save As...
_
Exit
_
[Open…]
This loads the display file or a source file or text file.
Opens the View File Load dialog box.
Operation differs depending on the file type selected in the dialog box.
When it is a source file in which symbol information is read:
Files are displayed in the Source window.
When it is an event setting file (.EVN):
The Event Manager is opened and the
event is set.
When it is a source file in which symbol information is not read, or a display file:
Files are displayed in the Source window
as text format files.
[Save As…]
Saves the displayed contents of the current window in a file under another
name.
Opens the View File Save dialog box.
[Close]
Closes the current window.
[Download…]
Downloads the program.
Opens the Download dialog box.
[Upload…]
Uploads the program.
Opens the Upload dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
67
CHAPTER 6
[Project >]
WINDOW REFERENCE
Operates a project file.
[Open…]
Opens a project file.
Opens the Project File Load dialog box.
[Save]
Overwrites the current status to the project file.
The file to be overwritten is the project file that is currently being read in the
debugger.
Saves the current status in a project file.
[Save As…]
Opens the Project File Save dialog box.
Resets the target CPU, symbols, and debugger.
[Debugger Reset…]
Opens the Reset Debugger dialog box.
[Exit]
Terminates the debugger. Opens the Exit Debugger dialog box.
[Open File]
Displays a list of the downloaded files.
If a file name is selected, that file is downloaded again.
(2) Edit
Figure 6-6. Edit Menu Bar
_
Edit
FIle
_
View
_
_
Option
Run
_
Event
_
Browse
_
Jump
_
Window
_
_
Help
Cut_
Copy
_
Paste
_
Write
in
_
Restore
_
Fill...
_
Copy...
_
Memory
_
Edit
_ Source
Compare...
_
Modify...
_
[Cut]
Cuts the selected character string and places it in the clipboard buffer.
[Copy]
Copies the selected character string to the clipboard buffer.
[Paste]
Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer at the text cursor position.
[Write in]
Writes corrections to the target.
[Restore]
Cancels the correction.
[Memory >]
Manipulates the memory contents.
[Fill...]
Initializes the memory contents.
Opens the Memory Fill dialog box.
68
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
[Copy...]
WINDOW REFERENCE
Copies values from memory to memory.
Opens the Memory Copy dialog box.
[Compare...]
Compares values between memories.
Opens the Memory Compare dialog box.
[Modify…]
Modifies the memory while the user program is being executed.
The pseudo-DMM dialog box is opened.
[Edit Source]
When the Project Manager is operating, opens the source file displayed in an
active Source window by using the editor specified by the Project Manager.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
69
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) View
The display menu consists of a common part, in which the menu items are common to all windows and a
dependent part, in which the menu items differ according to the active window.
An explanation of each dependent part is given in (b) to (k).
Figure 6-7. View Menu Bar
File
_
Edit
_
View
_
Option
_
Event
_
Run
_
Browse
_
Jump
_
Window
_
Help
_
Search...
_
Move...
_
Quick
Watch...
_
Add Watch...
_
Common part
View
_ Watch
Change
_ Watch
Delete
_ Watch
Symbol...
_
Source Window
Local Variable Window
Stack Window
Register Window
Event
?
_
Bin
_
Mix
_
Oct
_
Bin
_
Dec
_
Oct
_
Hex
_
Dec
_
Assemble Window
Event
?
_
Hex
_
Absolute
Name
_
String
_
Function Name
_
Proper
_
Memory Window
Bin
_
SFR Window
Oct
_
Bin
_
Dec
_
Oct
_
Hex
_
Dec
_
Nibble
_
Coverage WindowNote
1 Byte
_
64 Bytes
_
1024 Bytes
_
Hex
_
Byte
_
Sort By Name
_
Word
_
Sort By Address
_
Double
Word
_
UnSort
_
Ascii
_
Attribute
_
Little
_ Endian
Pick
Up
_
Big_ Endian
Select...
_
Event Manager
Select All
_ Event
Delete Event
_
Sort By Name
_
Sort By Kind
_
Compulsion
Read
_
Unsort
_
Detail
_
Watch Window
Overview
_
Create Break_ Event
Bin
_
Trace Window
Oct
_
Dec
_
Select...
_
Off
_
Hex
_
Pick_ Up
Search
_
String
_
Mix
_
Proper
_
Window Synchronize
_
Snap
_
BRM1
_
Byte
_
Source
Text
_
Word
_
General
_
Double
Word
_
Adaptive
_
Assemble
_
Break when Access
to this Valiable
_
Memory
_
Break when Write
to this Valiable
_
Note
Coverage
_
Break when Read
from this Valiable
_
Up
_
Down
_
Compulsion
Read
_
Note The Coverage window is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NSA or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
70
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(a) Common part
[Search…]
[Move…]
Performs a search. Opens the search dialog box according to the current
window. Performs the same operation as the Search button.
Moves the display position. Opens the Source Move dialog box, Address
Move dialog box or Trace Move dialog box corresponding to the current
window.
[Quick Watch…]
Displays the contents of the specified data temporarily. Opens the Quick
Watch dialog box.
[Add Watch…]
Adds the specified data to the Watch window. Opens the Add Watch
dialog box.
[View Watch]
Adds the selected data to the Watch window. In the case of a symbol, it
adds it in accordance with the settings in the Debugger Option dialog box.
[Change Watch]
Changes the character string of the variable name at the selected watch
point.
Opens the Add Watch dialog box. This menu is valid only when a variable
is specified in the Watch window.
[Delete Watch]
Deletes the selected watch point from the Watch window. This menu is
active only when variables are specified in the Watch window.
[Symbol…]
Displays the address of the specified variable or function and the value of
the specified symbol. Opens the Symbol To Address dialog box.
(b) Source window dependent part
[Event?]
Displays the cursor position line or the address’s event information. If an
event is set, it opens the Event dialog box.
[Mix]
Switches between mixed display and no mixed display for the assemble
display.
No check mark (“ ”): No mixed display (default).
Check mark (“√”):
Mixed display.
(c) Assemble window dependent part
[Event?]
Displays event information for the cursor position address. If an event is
set, it opens the Event dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
71
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(d) Memory window dependent part
[Bin]
Displays the current window in binary.
[Oct]
Displays the current window in octal.
[Dec]
Displays the current window in decimal.
[Hex]
Displays the current window in hexadecimal (default).
[Nibble]
Displays data in 4-bit units.
[Byte]
Displays data in 8-bit units (default).
[Word]
Displays data in 16-bit units.
[Double Word]
Displays data in 32-bit units.
[Ascii]
Turns ON/OFF display of ASCII characters.
No check mark (“ ”): Not displayed.
Check mark (“√”):
Displayed (default).
[Little Endian]
Displays words and double words in little endian.
[Big Endian]
Displays words and double words in big endian.
(e) Watch window dependent part
[Bin]
The selected item is displayed in binary.
[Oct]
The selected item is displayed in octal.
[Dec]
The selected item is displayed in decimal.
[Hex]
The selected item is displayed in hexadecimal.
[String]
The selected item is displayed as a character string.
[Proper]
The selected item is displayed as the standard value for each variable. In
the case of symbols, they are displayed in accordance with the settings in
the Debugger Option dialog box (default).
[Byte]
The selected item is displayed in 8-bit units.
[Word]
The selected item is displayed in 16-bit units.
[General]
Note
[Double Word]
The selected item is displayed in 20-bit units.
The selected item is displayed in 32-bit units.
Note Supported only in the ID78K4 (-NS)
72
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
[Adaptive]
WINDOW REFERENCE
The selected item is displayed as standard values for each variable. In
the case of C language symbols, only this item is valid. In the case of
assembler symbols, they are displayed in accordance with the settings in
the Debugger Option dialog box.
[Up]
The selected data is moved 1 line up.
[Down]
The selected data is moved 1 line down.
[Compulsion Read]
The data in the SFRs, where reading is prohibited because the values will
change if they are read, the I/O ports added in the Add I/O Port dialog
box, and the I/O protected areas is subjected to compulsory reading.
Creates an access event for the variable being watched.
[Create Break Event >]
[Break when Access
Creates a Read/Write event for a specified variable.
to this Variable]
[Break when Write to
Creates a Write event for a specified variable.
this Variable]
[Break when Read
Creates a Read event for a specified variable.
from this Variable]
(f) Register window dependent part
[Bin]
Displayed in binary.
[Oct]
Displayed in octal.
[Dec]
Displayed in decimal.
[Hex]
Displayed in hexadecimal (default).
[Absolute Name]
Displays register names as absolute names.
[Function Name]
Displays register names as function names (default).
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
73
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(g) SFR window dependent part
[Bin]
Displayed in binary.
[Oct]
Displayed in octal.
[Dec]
Displayed in decimal.
[Hex]
Displayed in hexadecimal (default).
[Sort By Name]
Displayed in alphabetical order.
[Sort By Address]
Displayed in address order (default).
[UnSort]
Not sorted.
[Attribute]
Selects whether to display or not to display the Attribute field.
No check mark (“ ”): Not displayed.
Check mark (“√”):
[Pick Up]
Displayed (default).
Only the SFR selected in the SFR Select dialog box is displayed.
No check mark (“ ”): All are displayed (default).
Check mark (“√”):
The selected register only is displayed.
[Select…]
Opens the SFR Select dialog box.
[Compulsion Read]
The data in the SFRs, where reading is prohibited because the values will
change if they are read, the I/O ports added in the Add I/O Port dialog box, and
the I/O protected areas is subjected to compulsory reading.
(h) Local Variable window dependent part, Stack window dependent part
74
[Bin]
Displayed in binary.
[Oct]
Displayed in octal.
[Dec]
Displayed in decimal.
[Hex]
Displayed in hexadecimal.
[String]
Displayed as a character string.
[Proper]
Displayed as the standard value for each variable (default).
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(i) Trace View window dependent part
[Select…]
Selects the content of the display.
Opens the Trace Data Select dialog box.
Performs pick up display settings.
[Pick Up >]
[Off]
Pick up display is not performed (default).
[Search]
Picks up the frames which match the search conditions and displays them.
Note 1
[Snap]
Picks up snap frames and displays them.
[BRM1]
Picks up the first M1 fetch frame after a program branch and displays it (BRM1
cannot be set in this version).
Switches between mixed display or no mixed display of sources.
[Mix]
No mixed display (default).
Mixed display.
[Window
This links together the Trace View window and Source window, Assemble
Synchronize >]
window, Memory window and Coverage window.
[Source Text]
[Assemble]
[Coverage]
Selects whether the Source window will be linked or not linked.
No check mark (“ ”):
Not linked (default).
Check mark (“√”):
Linked.
Selects whether the Assemble window will be linked or not linked.
No check mark (“ ”):
Not linked (default).
Check mark (“√”):
Linked.
Selects whether the Memory window will be linked or not linked.
[Memory]
(j)
No check mark (“ ”):
Check mark (“√”):
Note 2
No check mark (“ ”):
Not linked (default).
Check mark (“√”):
Linked.
Selects whether the Coverage window will be linked or not linked.
No check mark (“ ”):
Not linked (default).
Check mark (“√”):
Linked.
Coverage window dependent part
Note 2
[1 Byte]
Displays in 1-byte units (default).
[64 Bytes]
Displays in 64-byte units.
Note 3
[1024 bytes]
Notes 1.
2.
Displays in 1,024-byte units.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
This is displayed when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NSA or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
75
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(k) Event Manager dependent part
[Select All Event]
Selects all the events entered in the Event Manager.
[Delete Event]
Deletes the selected event.
[Sort By Name]
Displays the icons sorted by event name.
[Sort By Kind]
Displays the icons sorted by event type.
[UnSort]
Icons are not sorted (default).
[Detail]
Displays details.
[Overview]
Displays a list.
(4) Option
Figure 6-8. Option Menu Bar
File
_
Edit
_
View
_
Run
_
Option
_
Event
_
Browse
_
Jump
_
Window
_
_
Help
Tool_ Bar
Status
Bar
_
Button
_
Source
Mode
_
_Instruction Mode
Auto
_ Mode
Configuration...
_
Mask
Option...
_
Extended
Option...
_
Debugger
Option...
_
Add I/O Port...
_
Clear...
_
Trace
Clear
_
Coverage
_
Condition...
_
Coverage
ON
_
Efficiency...
_
Timer
_ ON
[Tool Bar]
Selects whether the toolbar is displayed or not.
No check mark (“ ”): Not displayed.
Check mark (“√”):
[Status Bar]
Displayed (default).
Selects whether the status bar is displayed or not.
No check mark (“ ”): Not displayed.
Check mark (“√”):
[Button]
Displayed (default).
Selects whether the function buttons on each window are displayed or not.
No check mark (“ ”): Not displayed.
Check mark (“√”):
Displayed (default).
76
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
[Source Mode]
Performs step execution at the source level (line units).
[Instruction Mode]
Performs step execution at the instruction level (instruction units).
[Auto Mode]
Switches automatically between source level step execution and instruction
level step execution, and executes step execution (default).
When the Source window is active, source level step execution (except in the
mixed display mode) or instruction level step execution (in the mixed display
mode) is performed, and when the Assemble window is active, instruction level
step execution is performed.
When neither window is active, source level step execution is performed.
Sets the environment.
[Configuration…]
Opens the Configuration dialog box.
[Mask Option...]
Note 1
Specifies the mask option for the device and sets the mode of each pin.
Opens the Mask Option dialog box.
[Extended Option…]
Sets the extended functions.
Opens the Extended Option dialog box.
[Debugger Option…]
Sets the debugger.
Opens the Debugger Option dialog box.
[Add I/O Port…]
Adds a user-defined I/O port.
Opens the Add I/O Port dialog box.
[Trace Clear]
Clears the trace data.
Displays the Trace View window if it is active.
Note 2
Opens the coverage-measurement related dialog boxes.
Note 2
Initializes the coverage measurement results.
[Coverage >]
[Clear…]
Opens the Coverage-Clear dialog box.
[Condition…]
Note 2
Sets the coverage efficiency measurement conditions.
Opens the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box.
Note 2
Displays the coverage efficiency results.
[Efficiency…]
Opens the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box.
[Coverage ON]
Note 2
Selects whether coverage measurement is turned on or off.
During emulation, this setting cannot be changed.
No check mark (“ ”): Coverage measurement is not performed.
Check mark (“√”):
[Timer ON]
Note 3
Coverage measurement is performed (default).
Selects whether the timer measurement is turned on or off.
During emulation, this setting cannot be changed.
No Check Mark (“ ”): Timer measurement is not performed.
Check Mark (“√”):
Timer measurement is performed (default).
Note that Run-Break event timer measurement cannot be stopped.
Notes 1.
2.
Supported only in the ID78K0 (-NS)
This is displayed when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or
IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
3.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
77
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) Run
Figure 6-9. Run Menu Bar
File
_
Edit
_
View
_
Run
_
Option
_
Event
_
Browse
_
Jump
_
Window
_
Help
_
Restart
_
Stop
_
Go
_
Ignore break points
and Go
_
Return
Out
_
Step
_ In
Next
_ Over
Start
_ From Here
Come
_ Here
Go
_ & Go
Slowmotion
_
CPU
_ Reset
Change
PC
_
Break
Point
_
Software
Break Point
_
Delete All Software
Break
_
Uncond.
_ Trace ON
Cond.
_ Trace ON
Coverage
Start
_
Timer
Start
_
Tracer
_ Start
[Restart]
Executes the program after resetting the emulation CPU.
Performs the same operation as the
[Stop]
button.
Forcibly stops execution of the program. Performs the same operation as the
button.
[Go]
Executes the program without resetting the CPU. Performs the same operation
as the
[Ignore break points
and Go]
[Return Out]
button.
This button executes the program, ignoring the set break points.
Performs the same operation as the
Executes the program in real time until execution returns to the calling function.
Performs the same operation as the
[Step In]
button.
button.
Performs step execution. Performs the same operation as the
button. In
the source mode, the program is executed in line units, and in the instruction
mode, it is executed in instruction units.
[Next Over]
Performs next step execution. Performs the same operation as the
button.
Executes the program, regarding a function or subroutine statement as 1 step.
In the source mode, the program is executed in line units, and in the instruction
mode, it is executed in instruction units.
[Start From Here]
Executes the program from the cursor position of the Source window or
Assemble window.
78
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Executes the program until the cursor position of the Source window or
[Come Here]
Assemble window.
[Go & Go]
Continues execution of the program. If a break occurs because a break
condition is satisfied, it updates the window and then executes the user
program again. Performs the same operation as clicking the
time a break occurs.
button each
Continues step execution of the program.
[Slowmotion]
After updating the window for each step execution, it performs step execution
again.
Performs the same operation as clocking the
button each time step
execution is performed.
[CPU Reset]
Resets the emulation CPU. Performs the same operation as the
[Change PC]
Sets the address at the cursor position of the Source window or Assemble
window to the PC.
[Break Point]
Sets/cancels a breakpoint at the cursor position of the Source window or
Assemble window.
[Software Break Point]
Sets/cancels a software breakpoint at the cursor position of the Source window
or Assemble window.
[Delete All Software Break]
Cancels all software breakpoints that are set.
[Uncond. Trace ON]
Validates the unconditional trace function. Always traces while the user
program is being executed (default).
When the tracer is started, the trace mode cannot be changed.
[Cond. Trace ON]
Validates the trace function. Traces while the user program is being executed
according to a trace condition.
When the tracer is started, the trace mode cannot be changed.
[Coverage Start or
When coverage measurement is stopped, this starts it.
Coverage Stop]
Note
button.
When coverage measurement is being performed, this stops it.
The display definitions are as follows.
“Coverage Start”: Measurement is stopped. If selected, measurement will be
started.
“Coverage Stop”: Measurement is in progress. If selected, measurement will
be stopped.
If there is currently no emulation, and if coverage measurement is off (no “√”
mark next to the [Option] → [Coverage ON] item), this item is invalid (it is
dimmed).
Coverage measurement starts operating immediately after coverage has been
turned on and emulation is started.
Note This is displayed when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
79
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
[Timer Start or
When timer measurement is stopped, this starts it.
Timer Stop]
When timer measurement is being performed, this stops it.
The display definitions are as follows.
“Timer Start”: Measurement is stopped. If selected, measurement will be
started.
“Timer Stop”: Measurement is in progress. If selected, measurement will be
stopped.
If there is currently no emulation, and if timer events are not used (no “√” mark
next to the [Ignore Break Point] → [Run] item), this item is invalid (it is
dimmed).
Timer measurement starts operating immediately after the timer has been
turned on and emulation is started.
[Tracer Start or
When tracer measurement is stopped, this starts it.
Tracer Stop]
When tracer measurement is being performed, this stops it.
The display definitions are as follows.
“Tracer Start”: Measurement is stopped. If selected, measurement will be
started.
“Tracer Stop”: Measurement is in progress. If selected, measurement will be
stopped.
This button is invalid (displayed in gray) while emulation is not in progress and
when a command other than [Ignore break points and Go] or the
button is
selected.
Tracer measurement starts operating immediately after the tracer has been
turned on and emulation is started.
(6) Event
Figure 6-10. Event Menu Bar
File
_
Edit
_
View
_
Option
_
Run
_
Event
_
Browse
_
Event Manager
_
Software
Break Manager
_
Event...
_
Event Link...
_
Break...
_
Trace...
_
Snap
Shot...
_
Stub...
_
Timer...
_
DMM...
_
Pass
Count...
_
Delay
_ Count...
80
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
Jump
_
Window
_
_
Help
CHAPTER 6
[Event Manager]
WINDOW REFERENCE
Manages each type of event condition.
Opens the Event Manager.
Operates the same as the
[Software Break
Manager]
Note 1
button.
Switches enable/disable and cancels software break.
Opens the Software Break Manager.
Enters event conditions.
[Event…]
Opens the Event dialog box.
Operates the same as the
button.
Enters event link conditions.
[Event Link…]
Opens the Event Link dialog box.
Enters and sets break conditions.
[Break…]
Opens the Break dialog box.
Operates the same as the
button.
Enters and sets trace event conditions.
[Trace…]
Opens the Trace dialog box.
Operates the same as the
[Snap Shot…]
Note 2
button.
Enters and sets snap event conditions.
Opens the Snap Shot dialog box.
Note 3
[Stub]
Enters and sets stub event conditions.
Opens the Stub dialog box.
Enters and sets timer event conditions and displays the measurement results.
[Timer…]
Opens the Timer dialog box.
The ID78K4-NS displays the Section timer measurement result.
Operates the same as the
Note 4
[DMM...]
button.
Opens the DMM dialog box.
Note 5
[Pass Count...]
Sets the pass count and displays the pass count value.
Opens the Pass Count dialog box.
[Delay Count...]
Sets the delay count and displays the delay count value.
Opens the Delay Count dialog box.
Notes 1.
This is displayed when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or
IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-78K4-NS or IE-784000-R is used.
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
4.
These functions are valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used.
5.
Supported only in the ID78K0 (-NS)
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
81
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(7) Browse
Figure 6-11. Browse Menu Bar
File
_
Edit
_
View
_
Option
_
Run
_
Event
_
Browse
_
Jump
_
Window
_
Help
_
Source
Text
_
Assemble
_
Memory
_
Watch
_
Register
_
SFR
_
Local
Variable
_
Stack_ Trace
_Trace
Coverage
_
Console
_
Others
_
[Source Text]
Displays the source text. Opens the Source window. Performs the same
operation as the
button.
If a window exists that is already in the active state, it opens the window in the
static state.
[Assemble]
Disassembles and displays the user program. Opens the Assemble window.
Performs the same operation as the
button.
If a window exists that is already in the active state, it opens the window in the
static state.
[Memory]
Displays the memory contents. Opens the Memory window. Performs the
same operation as the
button.
If a window exists that is already in the active state, it opens the window in the
static state.
[Watch]
Displays the watch contents (variable and other data). Opens the Watch
window. Performs the same operation as the
[Register]
Displays the register contents. Opens the Register window. Performs the same
operation as the
[SFR]
button.
Displays the contents of the SFRs. Opens the SFR window. Performs the
same operation as the
[Local Variable]
button.
Displays the result of a trace. Opens the Trace View window. Performs the
same operation as the
82
button.
Displays the stack contents. Opens the Stack window. Performs the same
operation as the
[Trace]
button.
Displays the local variable. Opens the Local Variable window. Performs the
same operation as the
[Stack Trace]
button.
button.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
[Coverage]
Note
WINDOW REFERENCE
Displays the result of coverage measurement. Opens the Coverage window.
Performs the same operation as the
button.
If a window exists that is already in the active state, it opens the window in the
static state.
[Console]
Opens the Console window.
[Others]
Opens another window.
[Expansion window]
Adds the name of a user-defined window. When this is selected, the window is
opened.
Note This is displayed when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
(8) Jump
Figure 6-12. Jump Menu Bar
File
_
Edit
_
View
_
Option
_
Run
_
Event
_
Browse
_
Jump
_
Window
_
Help
_
SourceText
_
Assemble
_
Memory
_
Coverage
_
[SourceText]
Sets the data selected in the current window as the jump address, and displays
the source text and source line starting from that address. No jump can be
performed if the jump address contains no line information. Opens the Source
window.
If the Source window is being displayed in the active state, that window is
displayed on the front plane (operation object).
[Assemble]
Sets the data selected in the current window as the jump address, and displays
the disassembled text starting from that address. Opens the Assemble window.
If the Assemble window is being displayed in the active state, that window is
displayed on the front plane (operation object).
[Memory]
Sets the data selected in the current window as the jump address, and displays
the memory contents starting from that address. Opens the Memory window.
If the Memory window is being displayed in the active state, that window is
displayed on the front plane (operation object).
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
83
CHAPTER 6
[Coverage]
Note
WINDOW REFERENCE
Sets the data selected in the current window as the jump address, and displays
the coverage measurement results from that window. Opens the Coverage
window.
If the Coverage window is being displayed in the active state, that window is
displayed on the front plane (operation object).
Note This is displayed when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
(9) Window
Figure 6-13. Window Menu Bar
File
_
Edit
_
View
_
Option
_
Run
_
Event
_
Browse
_
Jump
_
Window
_
Help
_
New
Window
_
Cascade
_
Tile
_
Arrange Icons
_
Close All
_
Refresh
_
Active
_
Static
_
[New Window]
Opens a new window displaying the same contents as the current window.
This is valid only in cases where the current window is the Source window,
Assemble window, Memory window or Coverage window.
[Cascade]
Cascades the windows in the main window.
[Tile]
Tiles the windows in the main window.
[Arrange Icons]
Rearranges the icons in the main window.
[Close All]
Closes all the windows except the main window.
[Refresh]
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
[Active]
Switches the window to the active state.
If it is currently in the active state, a check mark is entered on the left of this item.
[Static]
Switches the window to the static state.
If it is currently in the static state, a check mark is entered on the left of this item.
[Open window]
Lists the opened windows. The window with a check mark added at the side of
the number is the current window. The window selected by selecting a window
name is displayed as the current window.
84
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(10) Help
Figure 6-14. Help Menu Bar
File
_
Edit
_
View
_
Option
_
Run
_
Event
_
Browse
_
_Jump
Window
_
Help
_
Help
Topics
_
Main
Window Help
_
Current
WEindow Help
_
About...
_
[Help Topics]
Displays the table of contents of the Help window.
[Main Window Help]
Displays the help for the main window.
[Current Window Help]
Displays the help for the current window.
[About…]
Displays the version of the debugger.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
85
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Configuration Dialog Box
General
Displays and sets the operating environment of the in-circuit emulator.
This dialog box is displayed automatically after the debugger is started. To use the debugger, the operating
environment of the in-circuit emulator must be set first in this dialog box.
When a project file is read, however, it doesn’t need to be set. The result of reading the project file is reflected in
the Configuration dialog box.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• When the debugger is started
Automatically opened
• In the main window
Select [Option] → [Configuration…].
Press the GRPH + O , and C keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-15. Configuration Dialog Box
(3) Location setting
area
(1) Emulation CPU
select area
(4) Information display
area
(2) Internal ROM/RAM
setting area
(7) Break mode
select area
(5) CPU clock source
select area
(8) Mask setting area
(6) Power supply
select area
(9) Mapping setting
area
86
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The Configuration dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Emulation CPU select area
• Internal ROM/RAM setting area
• Location setting area (ID78K4 (-NS) only)
• Information display area (ID78K4-NS only)
• CPU clock source select area
• Power supply select area
• Break mode select area (ID78K0 (-NS) only)
• Mask setting area
• Mapping setting area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Emulation CPU select area
This area selects an emulation CPU. Note that this area can be selected only when the ID78K0-NS is started.
A chip name can be specified by inputting a name using the keyboard or selecting one from the Name dropdown list.
Only the chip name registered by the DFINST utility is displayed.
The chip name previously selected is selected as the default chip name.
Caution
A product that was selected when starting the debugger cannot be changed after the
debugger has been started (this area is dimmed). Even if a project file in which a different
device is selected is read after the debugger has been started, the device specified in the
project file is not selected.
(2) Internal ROM/RAM setting area
This area displays the size of the internal ROM and RAM of the emulation CPU.
The default size is automatically displayed followed by an asterisk (*) when the emulation CPU is selected.
To change the size of the internal ROM and RAM, select a size from the internal ROM and RAM drop-down
list.
If the selected size cannot be realized due to in-circuit emulator limitations, the debugger automatically
adjusts the size.
For that reason, when the Configuration dialog box is displayed again, the size being displayed may be
greater than the size specified the previous time.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
87
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Sizes that can be set are as follows.
Size
Internal ROM Size
Internal RAM Size
Alignment
(KB)
Set Range
(KB)
Alignment
(Bytes)
Set Range
(Bytes)
78K/0 Series
(ID78K0 (-NS))
4
0 to 64
64
64 to 1,024
78K/0S Series
(ID78K0S-NS)
2
0 to 8,
12 to 64
78K/IV Series
(ID78K4 (-NS))
8
0 to 1,024
Part Number
(3) Location setting area (ID78K4 (-NS) only)
This area sets a location.
Two types, 00H and 0fH, can be set. Select a location in accordance with the environment used.
If a Location instruction that differs from this setting is executed, a Relocation Break occurs.
If a load module file is loaded, the location is automatically re-set in accordance with the location information
in the load module file.
(4) Information display area (ID78K4-NS only)
This area displays the execution status of the emulation memory and trace memory.
It is not displayed when the program is started. It is displayed after the debugger is started or when the
Configuration dialog box is opened by selecting a menu.
• (MEM): Number of bytes of emulation memory
• (TRC): If this is ON, trace memory is mounted; if it is OFF, the trace memory is not mounted.
88
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) CPU clock source select area
This area selects the clock source to be input to the emulation CPU.
Select one of the following.
• Internal: The clock in the in-circuit emulator will be used as the CPU clock (default).
• External: The clock of the target device will be used as the CPU clock.
(6) Power supply select area
This area selects the power supply to be input to the emulation CPU.
Select one of the following.
• Internal:
The power supply in the in-circuit emulator is used as the operating voltage (default).
The operation voltage is fixed to 5 V.
• Target:
The power supply of the target is used as the operating voltage. The operating voltage
can be changed within the range of the device's specifications.
(7) Break mode select area (ID78K0 (-NS) only)
This area selects the peripheral emulation operation of the in-circuit emulator during a break.
Select one of the following.
• Break:
Stops the peripheral emulation function during a break.
• Non Break:
Does not stop the peripheral emulation function during a break (default).
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
89
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(8) Mask setting area
This area specifies a mask for the signal sent from the target.
The signal of the masked pin cannot be input to the in-circuit emulator.
Mask pins only when the operation of the target is unstable at the debugging stage.
In models other than the ID78K4, only the RESET pin can mask signals. In the ID78K4, NMI, WAIT, HLDRQ,
and STOP can also be selected.
(9) Mapping setting area
This area specifies the mapping attribute and address, and sets mapping.
(a) Mapping attribute specification
The following types of mapping attributes can be selected. Select a suitable attribute.
Note, however, that Emulation ROM, Emulation RAM, Target, and I/O Protect cannot be selected for
devices without external space and ID78K0S-NS.
Memory Attribute
• Emulation ROM
: Selects an in-circuit emulator alternate ROM.
• Emulation RAM
: Selects an in-circuit emulator alternate RAM.
Note 1
Note 1
• Target
Note 1
:
• I/O Protect
• Stack
Note 2
Notes 1.
2.
:
Selects a target memory.
Note 1
:
Selects an I/O protect area.
Select a memory in the stack area.
Cannot be selected for the ID78K0S-NS.
Cannot be selected for the ID78K4-NS.
The I/O Protect area can only be set inside the area set in the Target and the external SFR area. The
area set as I/O Protect cannot be read unless it has been registered as an I/O port in the SFR window, or
registered in the Watch window. If it is necessary to read this area, execute a forcible read in these
windows.
90
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(b) Mapping address specification
Mapping Address:
Specify the address to be mapped.
Input the mapping-start address and the mapping-end address from the keyboard.
(c) Setting of memory mapping
• To add memory mapping
After specifying the Memory Attribute and Mapping Address, click the
button.
Memory mapping corresponding to the Memory Attribute and to the Memory Mapping address range
is added.
In ID78K0-NS, the mapping units for mapping attributes of other than Stack and I/O Protect are
adjusted when the
button is clicked. If the mapping units do not match, the minimum
range subject to mapping that can be set, which includes the specified address, is used.
Stack area is set only in the internal RAM area (cannot be set in the internal expansion RAM area).
• To delete memory mapping
Select the mapping to be deleted from the displayed area, then click the
button. The
currently selected mapping will be deleted.
Remark
The mapping unit in the Stack and I/O Protect areas is bytes.
Function buttons
Validates the current environments. Sets environments and closes the Configuration dialog
box.
If an error occurs when the
button is clicked, the debugger stops because it is
impossible to continue.
Cancels change and closes this dialog box.
This returns the environmental settings to the state they were in before the Configuration
dialog box was opened.
Opens the Project File Load dialog box.
If a project file is open or if an error occurs during reading, the debugger stops because it is
impossible to continue.
Opens the help window that explains the Configuration dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
91
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Bank Set Dialog Box (ID78K0 (-NS) only)
General
Sets the memory bank.
Note, however, that the memory bank does not need to be set when reading the project file. The contents of the
project file read are reflected in the Bank Set dialog box.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following method.
• In the Extended Option dialog box
Turn on “Memory Bank” in the Memory Bank area, then click the BANK Set button.
Window
Figure 6-16. Bank Set Dialog Box
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
92
(1)
Bank access port setting area
(4)
External sense clip select area
(2)
Bank address setting area
(5)
SFR setting area
(3)
Bank address display unit setting area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The Bank Set dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Bank access port setting area
• Bank address setting area
• Bank address display unit setting area
• External sense clip select area
• SFR select area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Bank access port setting area
This area sets the port used to access the memory bank.
(2) Bank address setting area
This area sets the range within which the memory bank is switched.
(3) Bank address display unit setting area
This area sets display unit for the memory bank address.
(4) External sense clip select area
This area selects whether use the external sense clip for the memory bank or not.
Setting
Description
Debugger use
The external sense clip is used by the debugger for event setting and
address creation during trace display for the memory bank area.
User use
The user can freely set in this area. Note, however, that event setting and
trace display may be illegal for the memory bank.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
93
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
When checking “Debugger use” to use the external sense clip, ports correspond to external sense clips as follows.
Bank Port Bit
External Sense Clip No.
Bit 7
No. 8
Bit 6
No. 7
Bit 5
No. 6
Bit 4
No. 5
Bit 3
No. 4
Bit 2
No. 3
Bit 1
No. 2
Bit 0
No. 1
(5) SFR setting area
This area sets the access ports, memory expansion mode, and external bus type selection registers for
memory bank access.
The SFRs that need to be specified are shown below.
Setting
Description
Remarks
Pxx
Specify the port used to access the
memory bank.
Specify in the access port setting area.
PMxx
Specify when the port for memory bank
access is set as an output port.
This is set automatically by the
debugger.
MM
Set the external expansion area and
number of waits.
–
EBTSO
Set the external bus type.
–
Function buttons
Sets the specified memory bank and closes the Bank Set dialog box.
Closes the Bank Set dialog box.
Restores the input data.
Opens the help window.
94
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Mask Option Dialog Box (ID78K0 (-NS), ID78K0S-NS)
General
Sets the mask option.
Note, however, that the mask option does not need to be set when reading the project file. The contents of the
project file read are reflected in the Mask Option dialog box.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Option] → [Mask option] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + O , and M keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-17. Mask Option Dialog Box
(1) Pin group setting
area
(1) Mask option setting
area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
95
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The Mask Option dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Pin group setting area
• Mask option setting area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Pin group setting area
This area sets the pin group.
(2) Mask option setting area
This area sets the mask option of the device and specifies the pin mode. When this dialog box is opened, the
setting option/specified pin mode is displayed at the top.
Function buttons
Sets the specified mask option/pin mode and closes the Mask Option dialog box.
Closes the Mask Option dialog box.
Set the specified mask option/pin mode.
Restores the input data.
Opens the help window.
96
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Extended Option Dialog Box
General
Displays and sets the various extended options of the debugger.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Option] → [Extended Option…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + O , and E keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-18. Extended Option Dialog Box (1/2)
ID78K0S-NS, ID78K0-NS
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(1)
Trace time tag counter division ratio select area
(2)
Time tag total specification area
Note 1
Note 1
(3)
Real-time internal RAM sampling time setting area
(4)
Real-time internal RAM sampling range setting area
Notes 1.
Note 2
(5)
Flash self mode setting area
(6)
Default break select area
Notes 1, 2
(7)
Beep sound specification area
(8)
Memory bank setting area
Note 2
This function is valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NSA/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used.
2.
Valid only for the ID78K0-NS.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
97
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 6-18. Extended Option Dialog Box (2/2)
ID78K0
(7)
(8)
ID78K4-NS
(9)
(3)
(7)
(5)
(6)
ID78K4
(9)
(10)
(11)
(3)
(12)
(7)
(6)
98
(3)
Real-time internal RAM sampling time setting area
(9)
(5)
Flash self mode setting area
(10) Pseudo real-time RAM monitor setting area
(6)
Default break select area
(11) Real-time RAM sampling range setting area
(7)
Beep sound specification area
(12) Verify specification area
(8)
Memory bank setting area
Software break setting area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The Extended Option dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Trace time tag counter division ratio select area
• Time tag total specification area
Note 1
Note 1
• Real-time internal RAM sampling time setting area
Notes 2, 3
• Real-time internal RAM sampling range setting area (ID78K0 (-NS) only)
• Flash self mode setting area
• Default break select area
Note 3
(ID78K0 (-NS) only)
Note 4
• Beep sound specification area
• Memory bank setting area (ID78K0 (-NS) only)
• Real-time RAM sampling range setting area
• Software break setting area (ID78K4 (-NS) only)
• Pseudo real-time RAM monitor setting area (ID78K4 only)
• Verify specification area (ID78K4 only)
Notes 1.
Valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0SNS-A is used.
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
3.
Valid only for devices supporting flash self mode.
4.
Valid only for product with new packages (IE-78K0-NS with a control code D or later or the IE78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A), IE-784000-R, or the IE-78K4-NS.
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Trace time tag counter division ratio select area
Note
This area sets the division ratio of the counter to be used as time tag display in Trace View window.
Select the division ratio from the drop-down list. The following division ratios can be selected.
Numeric value on drop down list: 1 (default value) to 65,536
When a division ratio has been set, the number of clocks necessary for counting the counter displayed by
time tag is changed.
Note This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
99
CHAPTER 6
(2) Time tag total specification area
WINDOW REFERENCE
Note
If this check box is checked, the trace data time tags will be totaled.
The default is an unchecked box, and therefore no totaling of time tags.
Note This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used.
(3) Real-time internal RAM sampling time setting area
Note
This area specifies the sampling time (ms) of the real-time internal RAM sampling.
During emulation, the range specified in the real-time internal RAM sampling range setting area can be
sampled in real time.
Variables, data, etc. allocated to this range can be viewed in real time in the Watch window and the Memory
window.
Sampling time can be specified from 0 to 65,500 in 100 ms units.
Real-time display is not performed if the sampling time is set at 0 or is left blank.
Note This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used.
(4) Real-time internal RAM sampling range setting area (ID78K0-NS only)
This area specifies the range of the real-time internal RAM sampling.
Variables, data, etc. allocated to this range can be viewed in real time in the Watch window and the Memory
window.
The addresses can be specified in arbitrary 2 KB units.
(5) Flash self mode setting area (ID78K0-NS only)
This area sets the flash self mode.
The default setting for this area is "Off" (i.e. not flash self mode).
100
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(6) Default break select area
Whether to make the breakpoint setting a software break or a hardware break can be selected by clicking the
mouse in the Source window or Assemble window.
• Soft Break:
Sets a software break.
The breakpoint mark is displayed in blue.
• Hard Break: Sets a hardware break.
The breakpoint mark is displayed in red.
(7) Beep sound specification area
This area specifies whether there will be a beep sound when there is a break.
If the check box is checked, a beep sound is emitted when there is a break (the default is with the beep
sound activated).
(8) Memory bank setting area (ID78K0-NS only)
This area sets the memory bank.
The default setting for this area is "Off" (i.e. memory bank function is not used).
If the BANK Set button is clicked, the Bank Set dialog box is displayed.
(9) Software break setting area (ID78K4-NS only)
This area is used to select whether a software break is used or not. A software break is not used as the
default assumption.
(10) Pseudo real-time RAM monitor setting area
Do not check Realtime Readout for pseudo real-time monitoring of RAM.
In this case a start address and an end address can be input.
Check Realtime Readout (default) for real-time monitoring of RAM.
In this case, only a start address can be input.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
101
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(11) Real-time RAM sampling range setting area
This area specifies the address range in which real-time RAM sampling is executed. Variables, data, etc.
allocated to this range can be viewed in real-time in the Variable window and the Memory window.
• Whole:
All memory spaces are sampled. Because the range in which memories are called is wide,
user program execution is stopped for a long time if many windows are opened.
Note also that the mnemonics can be displayed in the Trace window even while the tracer
is stopped.
• IRAM + IOR:
Only the internal RAM area and IOR area are sampled
(12) Verify specification area (ID78K4 only)
This area specifies whether a verify check is executed when data is written to the memory.
If the check box is checked, a verify check is executed when downloading, memory filling, or memory copying
is executed. In addition, a verify check is also executed when variables or data are changed in the Variable
window or the Memory window and written to the memory (a verify check is executed as the default
assumption).
Function buttons
Makes the currently set environment active.
Sets the environment and closes the Extended Option dialog box.
Cancels the change contents and closes the Extended Option dialog box.
Returns to the environmental setting state that existed before the Extended Option dialog box
was opened.
Opens the help window that explains the Extended Option dialog box.
102
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Debugger Option Dialog Box
General
Displays and sets each type of extended option in the debugger.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Option] → [Debugger Option…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + O , and D keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-19. Debugger Option Dialog Box
(1)
(9)
(2)
(3)
(10)
(4)
(5)
(11)
(6)
(12)
(7)
(13)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Source path specification area
Default source specification area
Default load module specification area
Open file history setting area
Display font setting area
Project file setting area
Toolbar display button setting area
(8) Kanji code setting area
(9) Tab size setting area
(10) Startup symbol setting area
(11)Offset display setting area
(12)Register name display select area
(13)Watch symbol setting area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
103
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The Debugger Option dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Source path specification area
• Default source specification area
• Default load module specification area
• Open file history setting area
• Tab size setting area
• Project file setting area
• Toolbar display button setting area
• Kanji code setting area
• Display font setting area
• Startup symbol setting area
• Offset display setting area
• Register name display select area
• Watch symbol setting area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Source path specification area
This area specifies the directory in which the source file or text files will be searched for.
The path is specified by inputting it from the keyboard or by using the
When the
button.
button is clicked, the Browse dialog box is displayed and the source path can be
added.
A relative path can also be specified. The directory that is the reference for the relative path is displayed to
the right of “Base:”. The reference directory is decided using the following procedure.
• The directory from which the project files were loaded.
• The directory from which the latest load module or hex file was loaded.
• Windows current directory.
Delimiters in path information are specified by “ ” (blank), “;” (semi-colon), or “,” (comma).
Japanese characters can be specified in the source path (Japanese version only).
Example If the source is located in the following directory,
b:\src
c:\asm
The source path specification becomes as follows.
b:\src;c:\asm
104
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Default source specification area
When [File] → [Open...] is selected and the Browse dialog box is opened, the file extension of the displayed
source file is set in this area.
File extension delimiters are specified by “ ” (blank), “;” (semi-colon), or “,” (comma).
(3) Default load module specification area
This area sets the file extension of the load module displayed when the Download dialog box is opened.
File extension delimiters are specified by “ ” (blank), “;” (semi-colon), or “,” (comma).
(4) Open file history setting area
This area sets the number of items in the history displayed at the bottom of the [File] menu.
The number of items that can be set range from 0 to 10.
When 0 is set, the history is not displayed on the menu.
The default is 4.
(5) Display font setting area
This area specifies the display font in the Source window. If the button is clicked, the Font dialog box opens
and the display font can be selected.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
105
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(6) Project file setting area
This area sets the project file auto save and auto load.
(a) Project file auto save
Selection can be made from among the following items.
Auto Save:
On:
Performs project file auto save when closing.
Off:
Does not perform project file auto save when closing.
Query: Displays the Exit Debugger dialog box when closing (default).
(b) Project file auto load
Selection can be made from among the following items.
Auto Load:
On:
Performs project file auto load when starting.
Off:
Does not perform project file auto load when starting (default).
(c) Auto load project file settings
Specifies the project file to be loaded during auto load. This can be specified when “Auto Load” has been
turned “On.” When it is turned “Off,” the specification column becomes inactive (dimmed).
Load Project File: Input the project file name from the keyboard or set it by clicking the
button.
button is clicked, the Browse dialog box is displayed.
If the
(7) Toolbar display button setting area
This area sets the toolbar display buttons.
The display buttons can be selected from among the following items.
106
Pictures only:
Displays buttons which show only graphics (default).
Pictures and Text:
Displays buttons which show both graphics and text.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(8) Kanji code setting area
This area specifies the kanji code of the files displayed in the Source window or Trace View window.
Kanji code can be selected from the following.
Sjis:
SJIS is used for the kanji code (default).
Euc:
EUC is used for the kanji code.
The kanji code is valid only for Japanese Windows.
(9) Tab size setting area
This area sets the tab size for each file extension when displaying files with that file extension.
(a) File extension setting
Set the file extension.
Extension: Setting of the file extension can be done by inputting it from the keyboard or by selecting
from the drop-down list.
(b) Tab size selection
The following tab sizes can be selected.
Tab Size:
2: Displays the tab code with 2 spaces.
4: Displays the tab code with 4 spaces.
8: Displays the tab code with 8 spaces.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
107
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(c) Setting tab size for each file extension
Tab List: Displays a list of the file extensions and tab sizes.
• If a tab size setting is added, and if a tab size is changed, set it by “Extension” and “Tab Size”, then
button.
click the
• To delete a tab size setting,
Select the file extension setting in the “Tab List,” then click the
button.
The currently selected file extension setting is deleted.
(10) Startup symbol setting area
This area specifies the beginning symbol (Begin label), the end symbol (End label), and display start symbol
(main() label) of the startup routine.
If it is left blank, the Debugger Option dialog box cannot be closed.
The default is as follows.
Begin Label:
_@cstart
End Label:
_@cend
main() label:
_main
(11) Offset display setting area
This area sets whether there will be an offset display (symbol + offset) during disassemble display.
If there is no offset display, a symbol is displayed only when there is a symbol that matches the numerical
value, and when there is not a matching symbol, the numerical value is displayed as is in hex notation.
The areas where the offset display can be specified are of the following two types.
Label:
Sets whether or not there will be an offset display in the label column.
Mnemonic:
Sets whether or not there will be offset display in the mnemonic column.
The default is no offset display.
The default is offset display.
108
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(12) Register name display selection area
This area selects the display method of the register name in the mnemonic during disassemble display.
The display method can be selected from the following two methods.
Function Name:
Displays the register name as a function name or alias (default).
Absolute Name:
Displays the register name as an absolute name.
(13) Watch symbol setting area
This area specifies the watch symbol.
(a) Default size
Set the display size of data specified as “Adaptive” in the Watch window, etc. The size displayed can be
selected from among the following items.
Size:
Byte:
Displays data in 8 bits (default).
Word:
Displays data in 16 bits.
Double Word:
Displays data in 32 bits.
(b) Default radix
Set the display radix of data specified as “Proper” in the Watch window, etc.
The display radix can be selected from among the following items.
Radix:
Bin:
Displayed in binary.
Oct:
Displayed in octal.
Dec:
Displayed in decimal.
Hex:
Displayed in hexadecimal (default).
String:
Displayed as a character string.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
109
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(c) Variable type display on/off
Set the variable type display on/off.
Show Variable Type:
On:
Displays variable types.
Off:
Does not display variable types (default).
(d) Variable display format
C:
Displays in C language format.
ASM:
Displays in assembly format.
Function buttons
After activating each type of option in the set debugger, the dialog box is closed.
Each of the options set in the debugger on this occasion are made inactive and
the dialog box is closed.
Returns to the environment setting state existing before the Debugger Option
dialog box was opened.
Opens the help window for the Debugger Option dialog box.
110
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Font Dialog Box
General
Selects the display font for the Source window and sets the font size.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following method.
• Click the
button in the Debugger Option dialog box.
Window
Figure 6-20. Font Dialog Box
(1) Font name
specification
area
(2) Font size
specification
area
(3) Sample display
area
Function
The Font dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Font name specification area
• Font size specification area
• Sample display area
The function of each area is explained below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
111
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Font name specification area
This area selects the specified font from among the currently usable fonts.
Fixed-width fonts (fonts with a constant stroke width and fixed-pitch fonts) only are listed.
When the font name is selected from the list, the font name is displayed in the edit box and the font sizes with
which that font can be used are displayed in the font size specification area.
It is also possible to type the font name directly in the edit box using the keyboard.
(2) Font size specification area
The usable sizes of the font specified in the font name specification area are listed in point units in this area.
When selecting the font size from the list, the size is displayed in the edit box.
It is also possible to type the font size directly in the edit box using the keyboard.
(3) Sample display area
This area displays sample character string showing the specified font and font size.
112
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Changes the font in the Source window to the specified font face and font size and
closes the dialog box.
Closes the dialog box without changing the font.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
113
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Project File Load Dialog Box
General
Restores previous debugging environments.
The size of the window and the position of the environments in the window are also restored following the project
file load.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [File] → [Project…] → [Open Project…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + F , J , and O keys in that order.
• Click the
button on the toolbar.
Window
Figure 6-21. Project File Load Dialog Box
(1) File location select area
(2) File name select area
114
(3) File type select area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
Loads project files.
This dialog box consists of the following areas.
• File location select area
• File name select area
• File type select area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) File location select area
This area selects the drive or directory.
(2) File name select area
This area specifies the file name.
The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the list in the top column of the area.
(3) File type select area
This area displays the types of files displayed in the list. Project (*.prj) files are displayed.
Loaded contents
The items from each window shown in the following table are loaded in the project file. However, if the files are
loaded after the debugger is started, when a project file with a different target device is loaded, the debugger itself is
reset and the project file is loaded (when the target device differs from the target device specified when the debugger
was started, the target device becomes the target device specified in the project file).
(1/2)
Window
Set Data
Configuration dialog box
All items (target device, clock source selection, pin mask setting, mapping information)
Main window
Display position, toolbar/status bar/button display information, execution mode information,
trace On/Off information, coverage On/Off information
Download dialog box
File information to be downloaded
Extended Option dialog box
Setting information
Debugger Option dialog box
Setting information
Source window
Display information of window, font information
Assemble window
Display information of window, display start address
Memory window
Display information of window, display start address
Stack window
Display information of window
SFR window
Display information of window
Local Variable window
Display information of window
Trace View window
Display information of window
Event dialog box
Display information of window, event information
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
115
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2/2)
Window
Set Data
Event Link dialog box
Display information of window, link event information
Break dialog box
Display information of window, break event information
Trace dialog box
Display information of window, trace event information
Snap Shot dialog box
Timer dialog box
Note 1
Note 1
Display information of window, snap event information
Display information of window, timer event information
Event Manager
Display information of window, event information
Register window
Display information of window
Watch window
Display information of window, watch entry information
Note 1
Coverage window
DMM dialog box
Note 2
Console window
Note 3
Stub window
Notes 1.
Display information of window
Setting information
Display information of window
Display information of window, stub event information
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
Caution The substance of the ID78K0-NS or ID78K0S-NS project is stored in the XXXX.pri file.
When specifying the XXXX.prj file, be sure to place the XXXX.pri in the same directory.
The program file of the old version (Ver.1.xx or earlier) cannot be read. Re-create the project
file.
Function buttons
Loads the selected file as the project file.
Closes the dialog box.
Closes this dialog box without loading the project file.
Opens the help window.
116
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Project File Save Dialog Box
General
A project file is a file that stores debugging environments.
When saving debugging environments in a project file, the size of the window and the position of the environments
in the window are also saved.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [File] → [Project] → [Save As…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + F , J , and A keys in that order.
If a project file was loaded or saved previously, and to save a file of the same name, do as follows:
• In the main window
Select [File] → [Project] → [Save] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + F , J , and S keys in that order.
In this way, a file of the same name as the previously loaded or saved project file can be saved without the Project
File Save dialog box being opened.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
117
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-22. Project File Save Dialog Box
(1) Save location select area
(2) File name select area
(3) File type select area
Function
Saves a new project file or a project file whose name has been changed.
This dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Save location select area
• File name select area
• File type select area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Save location select area
This area selects the drive or directory.
(2) File name select area
This area specifies the file name.
The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the list in the top column of the area.
(3) File type select area
This area displays the types of files displayed in the list.
Project (*.prj) files are displayed.
118
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Saved contents
The items from each window shown in the following table are saved in the project file.
Window
Set Data
Configuration dialog box
All items (target device, clock source selection, pin mask setting, mapping information)
Main window
Display position, toolbar/status bar/button display information, execution mode information,
trace On/Off information, coverage On/Off information
Download dialog box
File information to be downloaded
Extended Option dialog box
Setting information
Debugger Option dialog box
Setting information
Source window
Display information of window, font information
Assemble window
Display information of window, display start address
Memory window
Display information of window, display start address
Stack window
Display information of window
SFR window
Display information of window
Local Variable window
Display information of window
Trace View window
Display information of window
Event dialog box
Display information of window, event information
Event Link dialog box
Display information of window, link event information
Break dialog box
Display information of window, break event information
Trace dialog box
Display information of window, trace event information
Snap Shot dialog box
Timer dialog box
Note 1
Note 1
Display information of window, snap event information
Display information of window, timer event information
Event Manager
Display information of window, event information
Register window
Display information of window
Watch window
Display information of window, watch entry information
Note 1
Coverage window
DMM dialog box
Note 2
Console window
Note 3
Stub window
Notes 1.
Display information of window
Setting information
Display information of window
Display information of window, stub event information
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
Caution Although XXXX.prj is specified as the project, the substance of the ID78K0-NS or ID78K0S-NS
project is stored in the automatically created XXXX.prj file. Use the same XXXX.prj as the
Project Manager. Note that project files created using V.1.xx or earlier cannot be used.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
119
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Saves the project information in the selected file.
After saving, closes the dialog box.
Closes this dialog box without saving the project file.
Opens the help window.
120
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
View File Load Dialog Box
General
Reads display files, and also reads source files, other text files and event setting files, and opens a window.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [File] → [Open] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + F , and O keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + O .
• Click the
button on the toolbar.
Window
Figure 6-23. View File Load Dialog Box
(1) File location select area
(2) File name select area
(3) File type select area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
121
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
Reads display files, and also reads source files, other text files and event setting files, and opens a window.
Depending on the file loaded, the window opened and the status differ.
• Loading of a source file (files in which symbol information has been written)
If a Source window exists in the active state, it is opened in the static state. If there is no Source window in the
active state, a Source window in the active state is opened.
• Display file or some other text file
It is opened as a text format file in a Source window in the static state.
• Loading of an event setting file
The Event Manager is opened and the event setting contents are returned to the previous environment.
This dialog box consists of the following areas.
• File location select area
• File name select area
• File type select area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) File location select area
This area selects the drive or directory.
(2) File name select area
This area specifies the file name. The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the
list in the top column of the area.
(3) File type select area
This area displays the types of files displayed in the list.
Note that the type of the file that used in the prior operation is displayed by default, so specify a suitable file
extension in this area.
The file kinds are as shown below.
122
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
File Type (File Extension)
Meaning
Note 1
Source (*.c; *.s; *.asm)
Source file
Text (*.txt)
Text file
Source Text (*.svw)
Source window display file
Assemble (*.dis)
Assemble window display file
Memory (*.mem)
Memory window display file
Watch (*.wch)
Watch window display file
Register (*.rgw)
Register window display file
SFR (*.sfr)
SFR window display file
Local Variable (*.loc)
Local Variable window display file
Stack Trace (*.sth)
Stack window display file
Trace (*.tvw)
Trace View window display file
Note 2
Coverage (*.cov)
Coverage window display file
Event (*.evn)
Event setting file
All (*.*)
All files
Notes 1.
2.
Remark
The source file extension (c, s, asm) can be changed in the Debugger Option dialog box.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
If the conventional Variable window display file is used, it can be used as a Watch window display file
by changing the file extension from var to wch.
Function buttons
Loads the selected file.
Closes this dialog box without loading the display file.
Opens the help window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
123
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
View File Save Dialog Box
General
Saves the contents of the current window when the dialog box was opened to a display file or event setting file.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following method.
• In the main window, make the window to be saved the current window and perform either of the following
operations.
• Select [File] → [Save As…] from the menu bar.
• Press the GRPH + F , and A keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-24. View File Save Dialog Box (1/3)
No range (when saved window is Local Variable window,
Stack window, SFR window, Register window, Watch window, or Event Manager)
(1) Save location select area
(2) File name select area
124
(3) File type select area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 6-24. View File Save Dialog Box (2/3)
Address range (when saved window is Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage window)
(4) Save range setting area
Frame range (when saved window is Trace View window)
(4) Save range setting area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
125
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 6-24. View File Save Dialog Box (3/3)
Line range (when saved window is Source window)
(4) Save range setting area
Function
Saves the contents of the current window in a display file.
This dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Save location select area
• File name select area
• File type select area
• Save range setting area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Save location select area
This area selects the drive or directory.
(2) File name select area
This area specifies the file name.
The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the list in the top column of the area.
(3) File type select area
This area displays the types of files displayed in the list.
126
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The file types are as shown below.
File Type (File Extension)
Current Window Name
Source Text (*.svm)
Source window
Assemble (*.dis)
Assemble window
Memory (*.mem)
Memory window
Watch (*.wch)
Watch window
Register (*.rgw)
Register window
SFR (*.sfr)
SFR window
Local Variable (*.loc)
Local Variable window
Stack Trace (*.stk)
Stack window
Trace (*.tvw)
Trace View window
Note
Coverage (*.cov)
Coverage window
Event (*.evn)
Event Manager
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
(4) Save range setting area
This area is displayed only when the current window to be saved is the Assemble window, Memory window,
Coverage window, Source window, or Trace View window.
All:
Specifies that all the area from the first line to the last line be saved.
Screen shot:
This specifies that the entire visible area from the top line to the bottom line of the screen
be saved. However, in cases where there is a mixed display with the Source window, the
area saved is the from the source line included in the visible area of the screen.
Specify Line (in the case of the Source window),
Specify Frame (in the case of the Trace View window),
Specify Address (in the case of other windows):
Specify the starting line and end line of the area to be saved. When the starting line and
end line are omitted, it is regarded as if the first line/last line were specified. Details are as
shown below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
127
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(a) If current window is Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage window
Specify an address range to be saved. Addresses can also be specified by symbols or expressions. (The
specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box.) The default radix when
numbers are input is hexadecimal.
If an area with 256 bytes or more is specified, a dialog box indicating the saving status is displayed. To
button in this dialog box.
stop saving midway, click the
(b) If current window is Trace View window
Specify the range of trace frames to be saved. (The specification method is the same as in the case of
the Trace Move dialog box.) The default radix when numbers are input is decimal.
If a range of more than 100 frames is specified, a dialog box indicating the saving status is displayed. To
stop saving midway, click the
128
button in this dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(c) If current window is Source window
Specify the range by line numbers. The default radix when numbers are input is decimal.
When the Source window is in the mixed display mode, the mixed display portion in the specified lines is
also saved.
If a range of more than 100 lines is specified, a dialog box indicating the saving status is displayed. To
stop saving midway, click the
button in this dialog box.
Function buttons
Saves the contents of the current window to the selected file.
After that, closes the View File Save dialog box.
Closes the View File Save dialog box without saving.
Opens the help window.
Caution
The Stack Trace window cannot save an area other than one currently displayed in the window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
129
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Download Dialog Box
General
Selects the name and format of a file to be downloaded, and downloads the contents of the target memory or the
results of coverage to the in-circuit emulator or target.
The files and file formats that can be downloaded are as follows.
• NEC load module format (XCOFF (.lnk, .lmf))
• Intel HEX format file (normal or extended)
• Motorola HEX format file S type (S0, S2, S3, S7, and S8)
• Extended Tektronix HEX format file
• Binary data format file
• Results of coverage
If a file other than an object file in the load module format is loaded, debugging cannot be executed at the source
level.
Network files must be used after being allocated to network drives.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [File] → [Download…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + F , and D keys in that order.
• Click the
130
button on the toolbar.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-25. Download Dialog Box
(1) File location select area
(2) File name
select area
(3) File type
select area
(5) Load condition specification area
(6) Reset condition specification area
(4) Offset setting area
Function
The Download dialog box consists of the following areas.
• File location select area
• File name select area
• File type select area
• Offset setting area
• Load condition specification area
• Reset condition specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) File location select area
This area selects the drive or directory.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
131
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) File name select area
This area specifies the file name. The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the
list in the top column of the area. Multiple files can be specified in this area.
When specifying multiple file names, place " (quotation marks) on both sides of each file name. It is also
possible to specify multiple file names from the top column of the area while pressing the SHIFT key or the
CTRL key.
(3) File type select area
This area displays the types of files displayed in the list.
The file types are as shown below.
File Type (File Extension)
Format
Load Module (*.lnk, *.lmf)
Load module format
Hex Format (*.hex)
Hex format (the format is auto-judged)
Binary Data (*.bin)
Binary data format
Coverage (*.cvb)
Coverage results
UBROF (*.d26)
Load module format output by IAR's compiler
Remark
The Hex format is judged automatically.
Note that these are the default file extensions; file extensions other than these can also be used.
(4) Offset setting area
This area specifies the offset address when loading the hex format, the binary data format, and the coverage
results. Address specification can also be made by an expression (except symbols). The specification method
is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when inputting numerical values
is hexadecimal. Offset values are disregarded for load module format files.
(5) Load condition specification area
This area sets the load conditions.
Symbol:
Specifies whether the symbol information is read (checked, default) or not. Note that this
Object:
Specifies whether the object information is read (checked, default) or not.
condition is disregarded for files other than those in the load module format.
132
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(6) Reset condition specification area
This area sets the reset conditions.
Even if a load module is downloaded again, the event set before downloading is not deleted. The event is reevaluated and is set as a valid event if the event address is valid; otherwise, it is set as an invalid event.
Delete the unnecessary event by using the Event Manager.
Symbol:
Reset the symbol information (always checked).
CPU:
Specifies whether to reset the emulation CPU or not (checked, default).
Function buttons
Loads the selected file and closes dialog box.
Closes this dialog box without loading the file.
Opens the help window that explains the Download dialog box.
Returns the input data to its original form.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
133
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Upload Dialog Box
General
Selects the name and format of the file to be saved, and saves the contents of the target memory or results of
coverage in this file.
The following files and file formats can be saved.
• Intel HEX format file (extended only)
• Motorola HEX format file S type (S0, S2, and S8 only)
• Extended Tektronix HEX format file
• Binary data format file
• Results of coverage
Note
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Opening method
The dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [File] → [Upload…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + F , and U keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-26. Upload Dialog Box
(1) File location select area
(2) File name
select area
(3) File type select
area
(4) Save range setting area
134
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The Upload dialog box consists of the following areas.
• File location select area
• File name select area
• File type select area
• Save range setting area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) File location select area
This area selects the drive or directory.
(2) File name select area
This area specifies the file name. The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the
list in the top column of the area.
(3) File type select area
The file types are as shown below.
File Type (File Extension)
Format
Intel Hex (*.hex)
Intel extended hex format
Motorola Hex (*.hex)
Motorola hex format
Tektro Hex (*.hex)
Extended Tektronics hex format
Binary Data (*.bin)
Binary data format
Note
Coverage (*.cvb)
Coverage results
All (*.*)
All files
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
These are the default file extensions; file extensions other than these can also be used.
The data format is decided by the file extension in which it is saved. However, if “All (*.*)” is selected, the file
is saved in the default Intel extended hex format.
(4) Save range setting area
This area specifies the address range which is to be saved. It is possible to specify the address by symbols or
by an expression. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box. The
default radix when numbers are input is hexadecimal.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
135
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Saves the specified address range in the selected file and closes the dialog box.
Closes this dialog box without saving the file.
Opens the help window that explains the Upload dialog box.
Returns the input data to its original form.
136
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Browse Dialog Box
General
Selects the file set in the Debugger Option dialog box or Source Search dialog box.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• Click the
button in the Debugger Option dialog box.
• Click the
button in the Source Search dialog box.
• Click the
button in the Source Move dialog box.
Window
Figure 6-27. Browse Dialog Box
(1) File location select area
(2) File name
select area
(3) File type select
area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
137
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The Browse dialog box consists of the following areas.
• File location select area
• File name select area
• File type select area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) File location select area
This area selects the drive or directory.
(2) File name select area
This area specifies the file name. The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the
list in the top column of the area.
(3) File type select area
This area displays the types of files in the list.
The file types are as shown below.
File Type (File Extension)
Format
Source (*.c;, *.s; *.asm)
Source file (The file extension is specified in the Debugger Option dialog box)
Text (*.txt)
Text file
All (*.*)
All files
Remark
The source (c, s, asm) file extension can be changed in the Debugger Option dialog box.
Function buttons
Sets the selected file and closes the dialog box.
Closes this dialog box without setting the file.
Opens the Help window that explains the Browse dialog box.
138
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Source Move Dialog Box
General
Specifies the file displayed in the Source window and specifies the display start position.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• When the Source window is active
Select [View] → [Move…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and V keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + J .
Window
Figure 6-28. Source Move Dialog Box
(1) Input mode select area
(2) File/address specification area
Function
This dialog box is displayed when [View] → [Move...] is selected while the Source window is open and can be used
to change the file’s display start position (a new window does not open).
The Source Move dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Input mode select area
• File/address specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
139
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Input mode select area
This area selects the input mode in cases where the movement destination is specified.
{ Address/Symbol:
Specifies the movement destination by an address (or a symbol).
{ Line/File:
Specifies the movement destination by a line No. (or file name).
(2) File/address specification area
This area specifies the display file name or display address. With the default, the string selected in the
accessed window, or when there is no selected string, the first character string in the input history, is
displayed, but as necessary, it can be changed by inputting from the keyboard.
The following two specification methods are used.
• Display address specification
• Display file name specification
By clicking the
button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to
16 items of input history can be retained.
(a) Display address specification
Specify the address where the display starts. It is possible to specify the address by symbols or by an
expression.
The specification method is the same as in the Address Move dialog box. When “Address/Symbol” is
selected, the default radix when inputting numerical values becomes hexadecimal.
The source text is displayed so that the source line corresponding to the specified address value can be
seen.
(b) Display file name specification
Specify the name of the file to be displayed in the Source window.
For the file name, it is possible to specify the file name only and to specify the absolute path or the
relative path.
If the file name only, or the relative path, is specified, search is made for the file in each of the following
directories in the order shown. The first file to be found as a result of the search is displayed.
• The directory which is the source path specified in the Debugger Option dialog box.
The line number can also be specified other than the file name. The file’s line number is specified as
follows.
140
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
• <<Path Name>File Name #> Line No.
The file name and line number are specified delimited by a “#”. The line number is specified by a decimal
number. The file name can be omitted. When “Line/File” is selected, the default radix when inputting
numerical values is decimal.
The specified line number is made the header line, and the specified file is displayed. If the file name is
omitted, the file is displayed from the specified line of the currently displayed file.
When the line number is omitted, the file is displayed from the header line.
Function buttons
Opens the Browse dialog box.
Displays the source text from the specified position.
Closes this dialog box.
Returns the input data to its original form.
Opens the help window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
141
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Address Move Dialog Box
General
Specifies a display start address in the Memory window, Assemble window, or Coverage window.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
(1) When Assemble window is displayed
• In the main window
Select [View] → [Move…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and V keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + J .
(2) When Memory window is displayed
• In the main window
Select [View] → [Move…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and V keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + J .
(3) When Coverage window is displayed
Note
• In the main window
Select [View] → [Move…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and V keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + J .
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
(4) When SFR window is displayed
• In the main window
Select [View] → [Move…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and V keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + J .
142
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-29. Address Move Dialog Box
Address Move dialog box of Assemble window
Address Move dialog box of Memory window
Note
Address Move dialog box of Coverage window
Address Move dialog box of SFR window
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
143
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The Address Move dialog box consists of the following area.
• Address specification area
The function of this area is explained below.
(1) Address specification area
This area specifies an address. The default address is the string selected in the called window, or the value of
the current PC. This value can be changed by keyboard input as necessary. An address can also be
specified by a symbol or an expression.
The specification method is the same as in the case of the Symbol To Address dialog box, but the default
radix when inputting numerical values is hexadecimal.
By clicking the
button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to
16 items of input history can be retained.
Function buttons
Displays the Memory window, Assemble window, or Coverage window from the specified address.
Closes this dialog box.
Returns the input data to its original form.
Opens the help window.
144
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace Move Dialog Box
Outline
Specifies the display start position in the Trace View window.
Opening Method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• When the Trace View window is active,
Select [View] → [Move...] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and V keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + J .
Window
Figure 6-30. Trace Move Dialog Box
(1) Frame select area
(2) Frame No. specification area
Function
This dialog box is displayed by selecting [View] → [Move...] when the Trace View window is open, and can be used
to change the trace results display starting position.
The Trace Move dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Frame select area
• Frame No. specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
145
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Frame select area
This area selects the frame that is the move destination.
Selected Item
Description
1st frame of last block
Move to the first frame of the latest block frame in the trace data.
Trigger frame of last block
Move to the latest trigger frame of the latest block frame in the trace data.
Last frame of last block
Move to the last frame in the trace data.
Frame No.
Move to the frame with the specified No.
When 0 is specified, move to the first frame in the trace data.
When this item is checked, shift the focus to the area specified by the frame
No.
(2) Frame No. specification area
If “Frame No.” is selected in the frame selection area, this area specifies the frame No. In the default, the
string selected in the accessed window, or “Last” is displayed, but as necessary, it can be changed by
inputting from the keyboard.
The default radix when inputting numerical values is decimal.
When a “+” mark is input in front of a numerical value, the area moves forward the specified number of
frames (toward the end of the display) from the frame at the cursor position. Conversely, when a “–” mark is
input in front of the numerical value, the area moves backward the specified number of frames (toward the
beginning of the display).
The frame No. specification can also be specified in the following format. It is also possible to specify it in
abbreviated form. The input characters are not case sensitive.
The contents are shown below.
Specification
Abbreviated Form
Description
First
S
Move to the first frame of the current trace block.
Trigger
T
Move to the trigger frame of the current trace block.
Last
L
Move to the last frame of the current trace block.
Top
O
Move to the first frame of the trace data.
Bottom
B
Move to the last frame of the trace data.
By clicking the
button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to
16 items of input history can be retained.
146
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Performs trace display from the specified position.
Closes the Trace Move dialog box.
Returns the input data to its original form.
Opens the help window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
147
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Symbol To Address Dialog Box
General
Displays the address of a specified variable or function, and the value of a symbol.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
Select [View] → [Symbol…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and Y keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-31. Symbol To Address Dialog Box
(1) Symbol specification area
(2) Conversion results
display area
(3) Display radix specification area
Function
The Symbol To Address dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Symbol specification area
• Conversion results display area
• Display radix specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Symbol specification area
148
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
This area specifies the variable, function name, symbol name, or line number to be converted. Other than
this, an I/O port name, SFR name, register name, PSW flag name, or an expression can be specified.
The I/O port name and SFR name are displayed by address values, the register name is displayed by the
register contents and the PSW flag name is displayed by the flag value. Also, bit symbols are converted to
“Address.bit”. Furthermore, an expression which includes a bit symbol cannot be written.
Specification methods are shown below.
Conversion Object
Specification Method
Variable
var
file#var (If a static function with a file name attached is specified.)
func#var (If a static function with a function name attached is specified.)
file#func#var (If a static function with a file name and function name attached is specified.)
Function
func
file#func (If a static function with a file name attached is specified.)
Label
label
file#label (If a local label with a file name attached is specified.)
EQU symbol
equsym
file#equsym (If a local EQU symbol with a file name attached is specified.)
Bit symbol
bitsym
file#bitsym (If a local bit symbol with a file name attached is specified.)
Line number of source file
file#no
I/O Port
portname
SFR
sfrname
Register
regname
PSW Flag
pswname
Remark
var: Variable name, func: Function, file: File name, label: Label name, equsym: EQU symbol name,
bitsym: Bit symbol name, portname: I/O port name, sfrname: SFR name, regname: Register name,
pswname: PSW flag name, no: Source file line number.
A “#” (sharp) is used as the delimiter between the file name and the variable, function name, and line
No.
If the specified symbol could not be found inside the scope, all symbols are searched for (static
variable, static function, local label, local EQU symbol, and local bit symbol).
As the default, the symbol name has priority. Furthermore, when desiring to change the priority order
temporarily, adding a “$” (Dollar) sign in front of the symbol causes the register name to have priority.
If reading multiple load modules, when specifying the load module names, use the delimitor “$”
between the load module name and the file name, variables, function name, and symbol name.
In the default, the string selected in the accessed window is displayed, but as necessary, it is possible
to change it by inputting from the keyboard. The radix of the default when inputting numerical values is
decimal. When changing the contents of the symbol specification area, clicking the
button
displays the conversion results in the conversion results display area.
By clicking the
button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused.
Up to 16 items of input history can be retained.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
149
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Conversion results display area
The variables specified in the symbol specification area, the function address, symbol values, line number
addresses and expression values, etc. are displayed in this area.
(3) Display radix specification area
This area specifies the display radix of the conversion results display area.
Displayed in hexadecimal (default).
Displayed in decimal.
Displayed in octal.
Displayed in binary.
Function buttons
When the contents of the symbol specification area have been changed, the symbols are
converted. When the contents of the symbol specification area are unchanged after conversion,
the dialog box closes.
Closes the Symbol To Address dialog box.
Returns the input data to the original values. If the
the data returns to the state it was in just after the
Opens the help window.
150
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
button has already been clicked,
button was clicked.
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Source Window
General
This window displays the source file or text file.
Also, display of disassembly of a program mixed with a source file, and execution of online assembly on a mixed
display is possible.
There are two modes in the Source window, normal display mode and mixed display mode.
Opening method
This window can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Browse] → [SourceText] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + B , and S keys in that order.
• Click the
button on the toolbar.
• In the View File Load dialog box, select source file or text file, then click the
button.
Window
Figure 6-32. Source Window (1/2)
Normal Display Mode
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
151
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 6-32. Source Window (2/2)
Mixed Display Mode
There are two modes in the Source window, normal display mode and mixed display mode. An explanation of each
of these modes is given below.
Refer to (4) Source text display area for further details.
(a) Normal display mode
In the normal display mode, general text files as well as source files can be displayed.
(b) Mixed display mode
In the mixed display mode, disassembly of programs combined with source files is displayed.
Online assembly cannot be performed in the Source window. Perform online assembly in the Assemble
window.
The display contents in the mixed display mode can be saved as a display file.
Also, in a Source window that displays the source file from which the symbol information is read, there are two
states, the active state and the static state.
Source windows in the active state can only be opened one at a time, whereas multiple windows can be opened at
the same time in the static state. Switching between states is done via the [Window] menu.
When switching the state of a window from static to active, the window which was active is switched to static. After
being switched to static, the window is displayed with a new number such as Source[2].
Source files in which symbol information has not been read are read as text format files and their contents are not
changed.
These two states are described below.
152
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(a) Active state
A Source window in the active state is synchronized with the current PC value and the Source window’s
display is updated continuously so that it is always displaying the current PC line.
Also, if a Source window in the active state is synchronized not only with the jump function’s jump destination
but also with the Trace View window, the display in the Source window is updated in synch with the Trace
View window.
The first Source window opened is in the active state.
(b) Static State
A Source window in the static state is not synchronized with the current PC value and does not change the
display position, but its contents are updated.
Also, a Source window in the static state does not become a jump destination and is not synchronized with
the Trace View window.
If an active Source window is already open, a new Source window is opened in the static state.
Function
This window displays source files or text files. It also displays disassembled display of programs mixed with source
files and can also perform online assembly in a mixed display. The tab size and display font can be specified in the
Debugger Option dialog box.
The Source window consists of the following areas.
• Point mark area
• Current PC mark area
• Line number/address display area
• Source text display area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Point mark area
This area sets or deletes breakpoints, and displays the set status of each event condition and whether the
program code exists or not.
(a) Breakpoint setting/deletion function
By clicking this area with the mouse, a breakpoint can be set or deleted.
The necessary mouse operations are as follows depending on the line where mouse is clicked.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
153
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Line
Setting of “On Mouse Click” in
Extended Option Dialog Box
Where blank or marks other than the “B”
mark are displayed (E, L, T mark etc.)
Soft Break
Sets software breakpoint
Hard Break
Sets hardware breakpoint
Soft Break
Deletes software breakpoint
Hard Break
Sets hardware breakpoint
Soft Break
Sets software breakpoint
Hard Break
Deletes hardware breakpoint
Where “B” mark (blue) is displayed
(software breakpoint)
Where “B” mark (red, black) is displayed
(hardware breakpoint)
Operation
Setting and deletion of breakpoints can be performed for lines which have an “*” displayed in the point
mark area.
As for lines without an “*” displayed, setting or deletion can be done on either the line above or below the
line where an “*” is displayed.
If a breakpoint is set, the “B” mark is displayed in the point mark area. However, if a mark other than the
“B” mark is displayed, the “A” mark is displayed.
The “A” mark shows that multiple events are set.
When a hardware breakpoint and a software breakpoint overlap, the “A” mark is displayed.
If a breakpoint is deleted, the “B” mark in the point mark area is deleted and the area is left blank or a
mark other than the “B” mark is displayed.
The “B” mark is displayed in the following colors in accordance with the type of breakpoint and its state.
Display Color
Explanation
Blue
Shows that a software breakpoint is set.
Red
Shows that the set hardware breakpoint is valid.
Black
Shows that the set hardware breakpoint is invalid. The hardware breakpoint can be
made valid in the Event Manager or the Break dialog box.
If a breakpoint is set in the point mark area, it becomes valid as soon as it is set.
(b) Event condition display function
The set status of each event is displayed. If an execution event or access fetch event is set to the
corresponding source line, a mark corresponding to the type of event is displayed.
Mark
E
Meaning
Shows that an event condition is set
L
Shows that the final stage of an event link is set
B
Shows that a break event is set
T
Shows that a trace event is set
Ti
Shows that a timer event is set
S
Shows that a snapshot event is set
A
Shows that two or more events are set
M
Note
Shows that a DMM event is set
Note Supported only in the ID78K0S-NS
154
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
If a range address is specified as an event’s address condition, the lower address of the range becomes
the object. Also, the address condition’s mask specification is not reflected.
(c) Program code display function
Lines where an “*” is displayed in the point mark area show that program code corresponding to the line
number exists.
Symbol
Explanation
With “*”
Shows that program code corresponding to the source file line No. exists. This is
displayed only in cases where the load module is downloaded and symbol information
has been read.
Without “*”
Shows that program code corresponding to the source file line No. does not exist. Also,
if a file other than a source file, such as a text file, is displayed, no lines have “*”
displayed.
(2) Current PC mark display area
This area displays the mark “>” indicating the value of the current PC (PC register value). By clicking this
mark with the mouse, the PC register value is displayed in the pop-up window.
The program is executed up to the specified line by double-clicking on the current PC mark area.
(3) Line number/address display area
Normal display mode
Mixed display mode
This area displays the line number of the source file or text file.
On lines where program code corresponding to the source file line number exists, the line number is
displayed in red characters and on lines where no program code exists, the line number characters are
displayed in black.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
155
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Also, the disassemble display’s address is displayed in the mixed display mode. Address characters are
dimmed.
The position of the line number/address display area can be selected as desired by clicking the mouse. A
selected line number or address is highlighted.
The following functions are included in line number or address selection.
(a) Drag-and-drop function
The selected highlighted line number or address can be dragged to another window or area.
If the line number or address position selected in the line number/address display area is dragged using
the left button of the mouse, the mouse cursor’s shape changes from an arrow to a
.
If the cursor is moved into a window or area where it is possible to drop it, the shape of the mouse cursor
changes form
to
.
The operation is executed for the address determined from the dropped address or line number in the
window where it was dropped.
The operation after drag-and-drop differs depending on the window or area where the items were
dropped.
Window or Area Which Is the Drop Object
• Event Manager
Event manager area in each of the setting
dialog boxes below
• Event dialog box
• Event Link dialog box
• Break dialog box
• Trace dialog box
• Snap Shot dialog boxNote 1
• Timer dialog boxNote 1
With the dropped line number or address as the address condition,
the execution event conditions are generated automatically.
The event condition names are generated automatically, as
Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The external sense data conditions are not
specified.
Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value
for the symbol which is the closest.
• Link condition setting area in the Event Link
dialog box
• Break condition setting area in the Break
dialog box
• Section trace start condition area, section
trace end condition area, and qualify trace
condition area in the Trace dialog box
• Snapshot condition setting area in the
Snap Shot dialog boxNote 1
• Stub condition setting area in the Stub
dialog boxNote 2
• Timer condition setting area in the Timer
dialog box Note 1
With the dropped line number or address as the address condition,
the execution event conditions are generated automatically.
Furthermore, automatically generated event conditions are set in the
condition setting area where they were dropped.
The event condition names are generated automatically, as
Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The external sense data conditions are not
specified.
Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value
for the symbol which is the closest.
• Address condition setting area and data
condition setting area in the Event dialog
box
• Memory snap data setting area in the Snap
Shot dialog boxNote 1
• Jump destination address setting area in
the Stub dialog boxNote 2
The line numbers or the address texts are set in the area where they
were dropped.
Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value
for the symbol which is the closest.
Notes 1.
2.
156
Operation After Drop
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(b) Window link function
Uses a line number or address to show the linked relationship between the Trace View window and the
Source window. The line number or address which is the link object with the Trace View window is
highlighted. For details, refer to the window link function under Trace View window.
(4) Source text display area
This area performs display and disassembly display of source files and text files and online assembly.
The display contents of the source text display area can be scrolled using the vertical and horizontal scroll
bars.
By selecting [View] → [Mix] on the menu bar, the normal display mode and the mixed display mode can be
switched.
Example 1. Normal display mode
The normal display mode is the mode in which the contents of source files or text files are
viewed.
2. Mixed display mode
The mixed display mode is the mode where disassembly display in combination with source
file display is performed.
• If a line of the displayed source file corresponds to program code, the disassemble line is
displayed following that source line. In the disassemble line, the address label, code data,
and disassembled mnemonic are displayed.
• The mnemonic’s display starting position is adjusted according to the tab size setting value.
• The mixed display mode is valid only in cases where a load module is downloaded and
symbol information is read into it, and a source file corresponding to the downloaded load
module is displayed.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
157
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
• Even if [View] → [Mix] on the menu bar is checked and mixed display mode is selected, in
cases where a source file other than one corresponding to a load module is displayed, the
display mode is the normal display mode.
• The disassemble display in the mnemonic column displayed in the mixed display mode can
be changed. In the case of a change, move the cursor to the mnemonic column of the
disassemble display line and change it. The overwrite mode and the insert mode can be
switched during editing using the INS key.
If the cursor is moved to a different line after making changes in the mnemonic column, the
change contents are checked. If the change contents are incorrect, the code data in the line
where the change was made becomes an “*”.
Even if moved to a different line, the change contents are not written to memory. A different
line can be changed with the change contents not written to memory.
The changed contents of the mnemonic column are written to memory using the Enter key.
The change contents are also checked if the Enter key is pressed. If the change contents are
incorrect, the code data in the incorrect line become an “*”. If there is even one incorrect line,
the change contents are not written to memory. In such a case, correct the change contents.
To discard the change contents, press the ESC key. If there are no errors in the change
contents, press the Enter key. After the change contents are written to memory, the cursor
moves to the next line’s mnemonic column. The next line can then be changed.
The current PC line and the breakpoint setting line are displayed with different display colors and in bold
characters.
Meaning of Line
Current PC line
Breakpoint setting line
Display Color
Explanation
Yellow
This is the source line or the disassemble display line corresponding to
the current PC value.
It is the line where a “>“ is displayed in the current PC mark area.
When there is a mixed display, the display color of the disassemble
display line only is changed. The source line is displayed with the
normal display color.
Red
This is a source line or a disassemble display line where a valid
breakpoint is set.
It is the line where a red or blue “B” is displayed in the point mark area.
When there is a mixed display, the display color of the disassemble
display line only is changed. The source line is displayed with the
normal display color.
The source text display area has a number of functions, including program execution with the line where the
cursor is positioned as the object and setting of the breakpoint.
• Start function
• Come function
• Breakpoint setting function
• Program counter setting function
• Jump function
158
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
With these functions, if there is a cursor located on the source text line, the top address of the program code
corresponding to the source line becomes the object and if the cursor is located on the disassemble display
line, that address becomes the object. Also, if no program code exists on the source line, the top address of
either the line above or the line below that line, where program code exists, becomes the object.
Furthermore, these functions cannot be executed in the following cases. The corresponding menu becomes
unavailable (dimmed).
• In the case where a file other than a source file is being displayed.
• In the case where a user program is being executed.
Each function is explained below.
(a) Start function
Executes the user program from the line where the cursor is placed.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
<1> Move the cursor to the line where execution is to start.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [Run] → [Start From Here] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + R , and A keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys SHIFT + f·6 .
(b) Come function
Executes the user program up to the line where a cursor is placed.
While the user program is being executed by this function, however, the currently set break event is not
generated.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
<1> Move the cursor to the line at which a break is to occur.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [Run] → [Come Here] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + R , and M keys in that order.
Press the shortcut key f·6 .
(c) Breakpoint setting function
Sets a breakpoint to the line where a cursor is placed. An execution event is used as the breakpoint to be
set.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
<1> Move the cursor to the line on which a breakpoint is to be set.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [Run] → [Break Point] or [Software Break Point] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + R , and B keys or GRPH + R , and F keys in that order.
Press shortcut key f·9 or f·11 .
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
159
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(d) Program counter setting function
Sets the address of the line where a cursor is placed to the program counter (PC).
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
<1> Move the cursor to the line where the program counter (PC) is to be set.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [Run] → [Change PC] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + R , and H keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + f·9 .
(e) Jump function
Jumps to the Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage window
Note
by using the address of the
line where a cursor is placed as a jump pointer. The jump destination window displays the jump pointer at
the beginning.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
<1> Move the cursor to the line that is the jump origin.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
• If the jump destination is the Assemble window
Select [Jump] → [Assemble] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + D .
• If the jump destination is the Memory window
Select [Jump] → [Memory…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + M .
• If the jump destination is the Coverage window
Note
Select [Jump] → [Coverage] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + I .
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
The text displayed in the source text display area can be selected by the following methods.
• From the desired position in the displayed text, drag the text to the desired position within the range of
one line. Select the text from the drag start position to the end position.
• Double-click on the character string. The words in the double-clicked position are selected.
In the source text display area, there are a number of functions which can be performed with the selected
text as the object, such as watch and quick watch.
160
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(f) Watch function
Adds the selected variables, etc. to the Watch window and displays their contents. This function can be
run by performing the following operations in order.
<1> Select the text.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [View] → [View Watch] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and I keys in that order.
button in the Source window.
Click the
If the assembler symbol was selected, add it to the Watch window in accordance with the settings in the
Debugger Option dialog box.
Apart from the above method, this function can also be run by performing the following operation.
<1> Select the text.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [View] → [Add Watch…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and W keys in that order.
By performing the above operation, the Add Watch dialog box is opened and the selected text is added
to the Watch window. Furthermore, if the Watch window has not yet been opened, it will be opened.
(g) Quick watch function
This displays the contents of the selected variables, etc. temporarily in the Quick Watch dialog box.
This function is run by performing the following operations in order.
<1> Select the text.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [View] → [Quick Watch…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and Q keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + W .
Click the
button in the Source window.
The Quick Watch dialog box will open and the contents will be displayed.
(h) Drag-and-drop function
Through a drag-and-drop operation, the selected text can be dragged to another window or area and
dropped. The operation order is shown below.
<1> Drag the selected text using the left button of the mouse. The mouse cursor’s shape will change
from an arrow to a
.
<2> If the mouse cursor is moved into a window or area where it is possible to drop it, the shape of the
cursor changes form
to
.
Operation after drag-and-drop differs depending on the window or area where the items were dropped.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
161
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window or Area Which Is the Drop Object
• Event Manager
Event manager area in each of the setting
dialog boxes below
• Event dialog box
• Event Link dialog box
• Break dialog box
• Trace dialog box
• Snap Shot dialog boxNote 1
• Stub dialog boxNote 2
• Timer dialog boxNote 1
• Link condition setting area in the Event
Link dialog box
• Break condition setting area in the Break
dialog box
• Section trace start condition area,
section trace end condition area, and
qualify trace condition area in the Trace
dialog box
• Snapshot condition setting area in the
Snap Shot dialog boxNote 1
• Stub condition setting area in the Stub
dialog boxNote 2
Operation After Drop
If it is possible to convert the dropped text to an address value as a symbol,
with the converted address value as the address condition, the Access
status (all-access status) or the Execute status event conditions are
generated automatically.
The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001,
Evt00002, ... The data conditions and external sense data conditions are not
specified.
The dropped text is set in the address conditions. The relationship between
the generated event conditions and the symbols is as follows.
Symbol
Status
Variable
Function
Symbols in the data section
Symbols in the code section
Other
R/W
Execution
R/W
Execution
R/W
If it is possible to convert the dropped text to an address value as a symbol,
with the converted address value as the address condition, the Access
status (all-access status) or the Execute status event conditions are
generated automatically. Furthermore, the automatically generated event
conditions are set in each dropped conditions setting area.
The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001,
Evt00002, ... The data conditions and external sense data conditions are not
specified.
The dropped text is set in the address conditions. The relationship between
the generated event conditions and the symbols is as follows.
• Timer condition setting area in the Timer
dialog boxNote 1
Symbol
Status
Variable
Function
Symbols in the data section
Symbols in the code section
Other
R/W
Execution
R/W
Execution
R/W
• Address condition setting area and data
condition setting area in the Event dialog
box
• Memory snap data setting area in the
Snap Shot dialog box Note 1
• Jump destination address setting area in
the Stub dialog boxNote 2
Text is set in the dropped area.
Watch window
If the dropped text can be recognized as a symbol, the symbol contents are
displayed.
Notes 1.
2.
162
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Opens the Source Search dialog box and searches for source text character strings.
If text is selected in the source text display area, the selected text is set as the search object and the
Source Search dialog box is opened. If text has not been selected, the Source Search dialog box is
opened with the search object in the blank state.
The search method is specified in the Source Search dialog box. The search results are displayed
as selected in the Source window.
Performs the same operation as [View] → [Search] on the menu bar.
Searches for the text that matches the search conditions set in the Source Search dialog box in the
backward direction from the cursor position (toward the top of the display). It changes to a
button during a search.
Searches for the text that matches the search conditions set in the Source Search dialog box in the
forward direction from the cursor position (toward the bottom of the display). It changes to a
button during a search.
Interrupts a search.
During a search, the
button or the
button changes to a
button.
Adds variables and other items selected in the source text display area to the Watch window.
If the Watch window is currently not open, this button opens it.
If text is not selected in the source text display area, the Watch window is only opened.
This button operates the same as [View] → [View Watch].
Displays the selected variables and other contents of the source text display area temporarily in the
Quick Watch dialog box.
Opens the Quick Watch dialog box.
If text is not selected in the source text display area, the Quick Watch dialog box is only opened.
This button operates the same as [View] → [Quick Watch].
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Closes this window.
Caution
If program code is described in an include file and if multiple files are included, the 1 to 1 relationship between line
numbers and addresses disappears. In such include files, the function which uses the relationship between the line
number and the address does not function normally.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
163
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Source Search Dialog Box
General
Searches file contents.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• When the Source window is active
Select [View] → [Search…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and S keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + G .
button.
Click the
Window
Figure 6-33. Source Search Dialog Box
(1) Search data
specification area
(2) Search condition
specification area
(4) Search file specification area
(3) Search direction specification area
Function
The Source Search dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Search data specification area
• Search condition specification area
• Search direction specification area
• Search file specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
164
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Search data specification area
This area specifies the data to be searched.
Although the character string selected in the window that has called this dialog box is displayed as the default
assumption, the character string can be changed by keyboard input as necessary.
By clicking the
button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to
16 items of input history can be retained.
The maximum length of the character string to be search that can be input is up to 150 one-byte characters.
(2) Search condition specification area
This area specifies via a check box whether the data specified for searching is case sensitive or not. As the
default, the data is case sensitive.
Not case sensitive
Case sensitive (default)
(3) Search direction specification area
This area specifies the search direction. Two directions, upward and downward, can be selected.
• Up:
Upward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the beginning
(upward on display).
• Down:
Downward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the end
(downward on display).
(4) Search file specification area
This area specifies the search file. If the specification is omitted, a search is made within the accessed
window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
165
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Searches the specified data under given conditions.
If a matching character string is found as a result of the search, it is highlighted.
To continue searching data, click this button again.
Sets the specified conditions as search conditions and closes the dialog box.
Stops searching the data.
The
button changes to the
button while data is being searched.
Closes the Source Search dialog box.
button while data is being searched.
This button changes to the
Opens the help window that explains the Source Search dialog box.
Opens the Browse dialog box.
166
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Assemble Window
General
This window displays a disassemble text and can also execute online assemble.
Opening method
This window can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Browse] → [Assemble…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + B , and A keys in that order.
• Click the
button on the toolbar.
Window
Figure 6-34. Assemble Window
Function
Performs disassemble display and online assembly.
Online assembly is performed by moving the cursor to the mnemonic.
The online assembly results are also reflected in the Memory window.
The Assemble window has two states, the active state and the static state.
Only one Assemble window in the active state can be opened at a time, but multiple Assemble windows which are
in the static state can be opened at the same time.
These two states are described below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
167
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Active state
The first Assemble window that is opened is in the active state.
The Assemble window’s display is updated when it is in the active state so that the current PC line is
displayed at all times in sync with the current PC value.
Also, when in the active state, the Assemble window becomes the jump destination for the jump function and,
if it is synchronized with the Trace View window, the Assemble window’s display is updated in sync with the
Trace View window.
(2) Static state
An Assemble window in the static state is not synchronized with the current PC value and it displays a
constant address.
Also, an Assemble window in the static state cannot be made a jump destination, nor can it be synchronized
with the Trace View window.
If an Assemble window has already been opened in the active state, then all subsequent windows are
opened in the static state.
The Assemble window consists of the following areas.
• Point mark display area
• Current PC mark display area
• Address display area
• Disassemble display area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Point mark display area
This area sets or deletes breakpoints, and displays the setting status of each event.
(a) Breakpoint setting/deletion function
By clicking this area with the mouse, breakpoints can be set or deleted. The operation when clicking the
mouse is as follows depending on the line where the mouse is clicked and the setting of On Mouse Click
in the Extended Option dialog box.
Line
Setting of “On Mouse Click” in
Extended Option Dialog Box
Where blank or marks other than the “B”
mark are displayed (E, L, T mark etc.)
Soft Break
Where “B” mark (blue) is displayed
(software breakpoint)
Where “B” mark (red, black) is displayed
(hardware breakpoint)
168
Operation
Sets software breakpoint
Hard Break
Sets hardware breakpoint
Soft Break
Deletes software breakpoint
Hard Break
Sets hardware breakpoint
Soft Break
Sets software breakpoint
Hard Break
Deletes hardware breakpoint
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
If a breakpoint is set, the “B” mark is displayed in the point mark area. However, if a mark other than the
“B” mark is displayed, the “A” mark is displayed.
The “A” mark shows that multiple events are set.
When a hardware breakpoint and a software breakpoint overlap, the “A” mark is displayed.
If a breakpoint is deleted, the “B” mark in the point mark area is deleted and the area is left blank or a
mark other than the “B” mark is displayed.
The “B” mark is displayed in the following colors in accordance with the type of breakpoint and its state.
Display Color
Explanation
Blue
Shows that a software breakpoint is set.
Red
Shows that the set hardware breakpoint is valid.
Black
Shows that the set hardware breakpoint is invalid. The hardware breakpoint can be
made valid in the Event Manager or the Break dialog box.
If a breakpoint is set in the point mark area, it becomes valid at the time it is set.
(b) Event condition display function
The set status of each event is displayed. If the execution event, or the fetch condition of an access
event is set, a mark indicating the type of each event condition is displayed in the corresponding
assemble line.
Mark
Meaning
E
Shows that an event condition is set
L
Shows that the final stage of an event link is set
B
Shows that a break event is set
T
Shows that a trace event is set
TiNote 1
Shows that a timer event is set
S
Note 1
Shows that a snapshot event is set
Note 2
Shows that a stub event is set
A
Shows that two or more events are set
Note 3
Shows that a DMM event is set
U
M
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Supported only in the ID78K4
3.
Supported only in the ID78K0S-NS
If a range address is specified as an event’s address condition, the lower address of the range becomes
the object. Also, the address condition’s mask specification is not reflected.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
169
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Current PC mark display area
This area displays mark “>” indicating the value of the current PC (PC register value). The program is
executed up to the specified line by double-clicking the current PC mark area.
(3) Address display area
This area displays the disassemble start address. When this field is clicked, an address is highlighted and
selected.
In addition, this area has the following functions.
(a) Drag-and-drop function
A selected address which is highlighted can be dragged to another window or area.
If the mouse cursor is positioned on the position of the selected address in the address display area and
the left button is pressed and held down, then when the mouse is dragged, the arrow cursor form
changes to a
.
If the mouse cursor is moved into a window or area where it is possible to drop it, the shape of the cursor
changes form
to
.
The operation is performed with respect to the dropped address in the window where it was dropped.
Operations after an address is dropped depend on the respective window or area where it was dropped.
170
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window or Area Which Is the Drop Object
Operation After Drop
• Event manager
Event manager area in each of the setting
dialog boxes below
• Event dialog box
• Event Link dialog box
• Break dialog box
• Trace dialog box
• Snap Shot dialog boxNote 1
• Stub dialog boxNote 2
• Timer dialog boxNote 1
With the dropped address as the address condition, the execution
event conditions are generated automatically.
The event condition names are generated automatically, as
Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The external sense data conditions are not
specified.
Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value
for the symbol which is the closest.
• Link condition setting area in the Event Link
dialog box
• Break condition setting area in the Break
dialog box
• Section trace start condition area, section
trace end condition area, and qualify trace
condition area in the Trace dialog box
• Snapshot condition setting area in the
Snap Shot dialog boxNote 1
The execution event conditions are generated automatically with the
dropped address as the address condition.
Furthermore, automatically generated event conditions are set in the
conditions setting area where they were dropped.
The event condition names are generated automatically, as
Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The external sense data conditions are not
specified.
Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value
for the symbol which is the closest.
• Stub condition setting area in the Stub
dialog boxNote 2
• Timer condition setting area in the Timer
dialog boxNote 1
• Address condition setting area and data
condition setting area in the Event dialog
box
• Memory snap data setting area in the Snap
Shot dialog boxNote 1
The address text is set in the area where it was dropped.
Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value
for the symbol which is the closest.
• Jump destination address setting area in
the Stub dialog boxNote 2
Notes 1.
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Supported only in the ID78K4
(b) Window link function
Uses an address to show the linked relationship between the Trace View window and the disassemble
display.
The address which is the link object with the Trace View window is highlighted. For details, refer to the
window link function of the Trace View window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
171
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(4) Disassemble display area
The address label, code data, and disassembled mnemonic are displayed in the disassemble display area.
The disassemble display in the mnemonic column can be changed.
To change it, move the cursor to the mnemonic column. During editing, the INS key can be used to switch
between the overwrite mode and the insert mode.
After making the desired changes in the mnemonic column, if the cursor is moved to a different line, the
contents of the change are checked. If the change contents are incorrect, the code data in the changed line
becomes an “*”.
Even if it is moved to a different line, the change contents are not written to memory. Another line can be
changed without the changes being written to memory.
The changed contents in the mnemonic column are written to memory by pressing the Enter key. The
change contents are also checked when the Enter key is pressed. If the change contents are incorrect, the
code data in the incorrect line become an “*”. If even one line is incorrect, the change contents are not written
to memory. In such a case, correct the change contents. To discard the change contents, press the
ESC key. If the change contents are not incorrect, if the Enter key is pressed, after the change contents
are written to memory, the cursor moves to the next line’s mnemonic column. In this way changes can
continue to be made in the next line.
If, as a result of the change, the number of bytes in the instructions after the change is fewer than the number
of bytes in the instruction before the change, the remaining bytes are replaced by the “NOP” instruction.
Also, if, as a result of the change, the number of bytes in the instructions after the change is greater than the
number of bytes in the instruction before the change, the next instruction is overwritten. In this case also, the
remaining bytes are replaced by the “NOP” instruction. Even in cases where the change runs into the source
line, it is overwritten in the same way.
Cautions 1. If the disassemble display area is scrolled upward (toward the direction in which the
address is decremented), an illegal mnemonic may be displayed (because the middle
address of a multiple-byte instruction is displayed).
2. In the disassemble display area, SFRs or label symbols with different names but having
the same address cannot be distinguished and displayed.
As for the current PC line and the breakpoint setting line, the display color is changed and they are displayed
in bold.
172
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
Meaning of Line
WINDOW REFERENCE
Display Color
Current PC line
Breakpoint setting line
Explanation
Yellow
This line corresponds to the current PC value.
This is the line where a “>“ is displayed in the current PC mark
area.
Red
This is the line where the valid breakpoint is set.
This is the line where a red or blue “B” is displayed in the point
mark area.
The disassemble display area includes a number of functions such as program execution with the line where
the cursor is located as the object, or setting of the breakpoint, etc.
• Start function
• Come function
• Breakpoint setting function
• Program counter setting function
• Jump function
Furthermore, in the following case, these functions cannot be executed. The corresponding menu is dimmed
and becomes impossible to select.
• If a user program is being executed.
Each function is explained below.
(a) Start function
Executes the user program from the line where the cursor is located.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
<1> Move the cursor to the line where execution is to start.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [Run] → [Start From Here] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + R , and A keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys SHIFT + f·6 .
(b) Come function
Executes the user program up to the line where a cursor is placed.
While the user program is being executed in this mode, however, the break event currently set is not
generated.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
<1> Move the cursor to the line where execution is to start.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [Run] → [Come Here] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + R , and M keys in that order.
Press the shortcut key f·6 .
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
173
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(c) Breakpoint setting function
Sets a breakpoint to the line where a cursor is placed.
An execution event is used as the breakpoint to be set.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
<1> Move the cursor to the line to which a breakpoint is to be set.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [Run] → [Break Point] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + R , and B keys in that order.
Press shortcut key f·9 .
(d) Program counter setting function
Sets the address of the line where the cursor is placed to the PC (program counter).
<1> Move the cursor to the line where the program counter is to be set (PC).
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [Run] → [Change PC] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + R , and H keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + f·9 .
(e) Jump function
Note
Jumps to the Source window, Memory window, or Coverage window
by using the address of the line
where the cursor is placed as a jump pointer.
The jump destination window displays the jump pointer at the beginning.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
<1> Move the cursor to the line which is the jump origin.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
• If the jump destination is the Source window
Select [Jump] → [SourceText] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + U .
• If the jump destination is the Memory window
Select [Jump] → [Memory] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + M .
• If the jump destination is the Coverage window
Note
Select [Jump] → [Coverage] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + I .
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
174
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The text displayed in the disassemble display area can be selected by the following method.
• From the position where the desired text starts in the display, drag the mouse to the position within the
range of 1 line. The text from the starting position to the end position is the text that is selected.
• Double-click the character string. The words in the double-clicked position are selected.
In the disassemble display area, a number of functions, such as watch and quick watch with the selected
text as the object, can be performed.
(f) Watch function
This adds the selected data to the Watch window and displays its contents.
Furthermore, if an assembler symbol is selected, it is added to the Watch window in accordance with the
settings in the Debugger Option dialog box.
This function is executed by carrying out the following operations in order.
<1> Select the text.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [View] → [View Watch] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and I keys in that order.
Select [View] → [Add Watch…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and W keys in that order.
button in the Assemble window.
Click the
If any of these operations is carried out, the Add Watch dialog box opens and adding is performed.
If the Watch window is not currently open, the Watch window is opened.
(g) Quick watch function
This temporarily displays the contents of the selected data in the Quick Watch dialog box.
This function is executed by carrying out the following procedure in order.
<1> Select the text.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [View] → [Quick Watch…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and Q keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + W .
Click the
button in the Assemble window.
The Quick Watch dialog box opens and its contents are displayed.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
175
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(h) Drag-and-drop function
Through a drag-and-drop operation, the selected text can be dragged to another window or area. The
operation order is shown below.
<1> Drag the selected text using the left button of the mouse. The mouse cursor’s shape will change
from an arrow to a
.
<2> If the mouse cursor is moved into a window or area where it is possible to drop it, the shape of the
cursor changes form
to
.
Operation after drag-and-drop differs depending on the window or area where the items were dropped.
Window or Area Which Is the Drop Object
• Event Manager
Event manager area in each of the setting
dialog boxes below
• Event dialog box
• Event Link dialog box
• Break dialog box
• Trace dialog box
• Snap Shot dialog boxNote 1
• Stub dialog boxNote 2
• Timer dialog boxNote 1
Operation After Drop
If it is possible to convert the dropped text to an address value as a symbol,
with the converted address value as the address condition, the Access
status (all-access status) or the Execute status event conditions are
generated automatically.
The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001,
Evt00002, ... The data conditions and external sense data conditions are not
specified.
The dropped text is set in the address conditions. The relationship between
the generated event conditions and the symbols is as follows.
Symbol
Status
Variable
Function
Symbols in the data section
Symbols in the code section
Other
R/W
Execution
R/W
Execution
R/W
• Link condition setting area in the Event
Link dialog box
• Break condition setting area in the Break
dialog box
• Section trace start condition area,
section trace end condition area, and
qualify trace condition area in the Trace
dialog box
• Snapshot condition setting area in the
Snap Shot dialog boxNote 1
• Stub condition setting area in the Stub
dialog boxNote 2
• Timer condition setting area in the Timer
dialog box
If it is possible to convert the dropped text to an address value as a symbol,
with the converted address value as the address condition, the Access
status (all-access status) or the Execute status event conditions are
generated automatically. Furthermore, the automatically generated event
conditions are set in each dropped conditions setting area.
The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001,
Evt00002, ... The data conditions and external sense data conditions are not
specified.
The dropped text is set in the address conditions. The relationship between
the generated event conditions and the symbols is as follows.
• Address condition setting area and data
condition setting area in the Event dialog
box
• Memory snap data setting area in the
Snap Shot dialog boxNote 1
• Jump destination address setting area in
the Stub dialog boxNote 2
Text is set in the dropped area.
Watch window
If the dropped text can be recognized as a symbol, the symbol contents are
displayed.
Notes 1.
2.
176
Symbol
Status
Variable
Function
Symbols in the data section
Symbols in the code section
Other
R/W
Execution
R/W
Execution
R/W
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Opens the Assemble Search dialog box and searches the character string of a mnemonic. If text
has been selected in the disassemble display area, sets the selected text as the search object and
opens the Assemble Search dialog box.
If text has not been selected, the Assemble Search dialog box will open with the search object in the
blank state.
Specify the search method in the Assemble Search dialog box. The search results are selectively
displayed in the Assemble window.
Operation is the same as when [View ] → [Search...] is selected on the menu bar.
Searches for the contents that match the search conditions set in the Assemble Search dialog box
in the backward direction from the cursor position (toward the top of the display).
button.
During the search, it changes to a
Searches for the contents that match the search conditions set in the Assemble Search dialog box
in the forward direction from the cursor position (toward the bottom of the display).
During the search, it changes to a
button.
Interrupts the search.
During a search, the
button or the
button changes to the
button.
Adds the symbol, etc. selected in the disassemble display area to the Watch window.
If the Watch window has not been opened, it opens the Watch window.
If text has not been selected in the disassemble display area, the Watch window is only opened.
The operation is the same as when [View] → [View Watch] is selected on the menu bar.
Temporarily displays the contents of symbols, etc. selected in the disassemble display area in the
Quick Watch dialog box.
It opens the Quick Watch dialog box.
If text has not been selected in the disassemble display area, the Quick Watch dialog box is only
opened.
The operation is the same as when [View] → [Quick Watch] is selected on the menu bar.
Updates the window contents with the latest data.
Closes the Assemble window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
177
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Assemble Search Dialog Box
General
Searches the contents of the Assemble window.
Opening Method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods when the Assemble window is the current window.
• In the main window
Select [View] → [Search...] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and S keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + G .
• In the Assemble window
Click the
button.
Window
Figure 6-35. Assemble Search Dialog Box
(1) Search data
specification area
(2) Search conditions
specification area
(4) Search range specification area
(3) Search direction specification area
Function
Initiates a search for the disassemble contents. Continuous null characters which include input character strings
and disassemble character strings are compared as a single null character.
The Assemble Search dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Search data specification area
• Search conditions specification area
• Search direction specification area
• Search range specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
178
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Search data specification area
This area specifies the data that is to be searched for.
In the default setting, the string selected in the accessed window is displayed, but as necessary, it can be
changed by inputting from the keyboard.
By clicking the
button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to
16 items of input history can be retained.
The maximum length of the character string to be search that can be input is up to 150 one-byte characters.
(2) Search conditions specification area
(a)
When searching, this check box specifies whether the data specified for searching is case sensitive or
not.
In the default setting, the data is case sensitive.
Not case sensitive.
Case sensitive (default)
(b)
When searching, this check box specifies whether to search the whole range or not. In the default
setting, only the remaining portion of the range is searched.
Only the remaining portion of the range is searched (default).
The whole range is searched.
(3) Search direction specification area
This specifies the search direction.
There are two types of search, upward, and downward.
Up:
Upward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the beginning
(upward on display).
Down:
Downward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the end
(downward on display).
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
179
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(4) Search range specification area
This area specifies the addresses being searched. A symbol or an expression can also be specified for an
address.
The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when
inputting numerical values is hexadecimal.
Function buttons
Searches for the specified search data in accordance with the conditions. As the search results, the
matching character string is highlighted. For a continuous search, press this button again.
Sets the specified conditions as the search conditions and closes the dialog box.
Interrupts the search for data.
During the data search, the
button changes to the
Closes the Assemble Search dialog box.
During a data search, it changes to the
button.
Opens the help window that explains the Assemble Search dialog box.
180
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
button.
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Window
General
This window displays and changes the memory contents.
Opening method
This window can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Browse] → [Memory] from the menu bar.
Select [Jump] → [Memory] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + B , and M keys in that order.
Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order.
Click the
button on the toolbar.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
181
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-36. Memory Window
Without ASCII display
With ASCII display
182
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
Displays and changes the memory contents.
A vertical scroll bar is always displayed so that the memory contents can be scrolled.
The
button or the
button can also be used to move the display one page up or one page down.
Also, even during emulation, the memory contents can be displayed in real time. The real-time display range is the
address range set in the Extended Option dialog box.
The Memory window has two states, the active state and the static state.
Only one Memory window in the active state can be opened at a time, but multiple Memory windows which are in
the static state can be opened at the same time.
Each Memory window state is explained below.
(1) Active state
A Memory window in the active state is the jump destination for the jump function and, if it is synchronized
with the Trace View window, the Memory window’s display is updated in synchronization with the Trace View
window. The first Memory window opened is in the active state.
(2) Static State
A Memory window in the static state is not the jump destination and is not synchronized with the Trace View
window. Except for those points, it operates in the same way as in the active state.
If an active Memory window is already open, then all subsequent Memory windows are opened in the static
state.
The Memory window consists of the following areas.
• Address display area
• Memory display area
• ASCII display area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Address display area
This area displays memory addresses.
Addresses are displayed in 4 digits (16 bits) in the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS, and 5 digits (20 bits) in the
ID78K4 (-NS).
The address width changes when memory bank is used.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
183
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Memory display area
This area displays and changes the memory contents. The contents to be changed are displayed in red
characters, then by pressing the Enter key, they are actually written to the target. The contents prior to the
change (when in the red character state) can be erased using the ESC key.
Up to 256 bytes of data can be changed at one time.
This area also has the following two functions in addition to displaying the memory contents making changes.
(a) Jump function
Note
Jumps to the Source window, Assemble window, or Coverage window
by using the address at the
cursor position as a jump pointer. The jump destination window displays the jump pointer at the
beginning.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
<1> Move the cursor to the line which is the jump origin.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
• If the jump destination is the Source window
Select [Jump] → [ SourceText] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + U .
• If the jump destination is the Assemble window
Select [Jump] → [Assemble] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + D .
• If the jump destination is the Coverage window
Note
Select [Jump] → [Coverage] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + I .
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
184
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(b) Window link function
Shows the relationship between the Trace View window and the Memory window via memory contents.
For further information, refer to the description of the window link function for the Trace View window.
(3) ASCII display area
This area displays the memory contents in ASCII. The memory contents can be converted into ASCII
characters for display. The conversion method is the same as the memory display area.
The display can be turned on and off by selecting [View] → [Ascii] on the menu bar (the display is on by the
default setting).
This area is also a jump pointer for the jump function, in the same way as in (2) Memory display area.
Function buttons
Opens the Memory Search dialog box and searches for a character string in the displayed memory
contents or memory contents. At this time, the selected data (memory value) is displayed in the
Memory Search dialog box as the search subject. If the dialog box is opened without data specified,
specify data by key input. The result of the search is highlighted in the Memory window.
Searches for the memory contents that match the search conditions set in the Memory Search
dialog box in the backward direction from the cursor position (toward the top of the display). It
changes to a
button during a search.
Searches for the memory contents that match the search conditions set in the Memory Search
dialog box in the forward direction from the cursor position (toward the bottom of the display). It
changes to a
button during a search.
Interrupts a search.
During a search, the
button or the
button changes to a
button.
Updates the window’s contents with the latest data.
Closes this window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
185
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Search Dialog Box
General
Searches the memory contents.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• Set the Memory window as the current window and in the main window;
Select [View] → [Search…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and S keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + G .
• In the Memory window
button.
Click the
Window
Figure 6-37. Memory Search Dialog Box
(1) Search data
specification area
(2) Search condition
specification area
(4) Search range
specification area
(3) Search direction specification area
186
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
This searches the contents of memory for the Memory window where the cursor is placed.
If the cursor is in the memory display area, the specified data is regarded as a binary data string and the memory
display area is searched.
If the cursor is in the ASCII display area, the specified data is regarded as an ASCII character string and the ASCII
display area is searched.
Unmapped areas, SFR areas, and I/O protected areas are not searched.
The search result is highlighted in the Memory window. The highlighted data can be placed on the clipboard, but
note that only the last line is placed when the data extends to several lines.
The Memory Search dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Search data specification area
• Search condition specification area
• Search direction specification area
• Search range specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Search data specification area
This area specifies the data to be searched.
Although the character string selected in the window that has called this dialog box is displayed as the default
assumption, the character string can be changed by keyboard input as necessary (input cannot be made
using a symbol or expression.)
When searching the memory display area, a maximum of 16 items of data can be specified at one time.
Specify each item of data using a space as a delimiter.
When searching the ASCII display area, a maximum of 256 characters of data can be specified. Spaces in
the data are treated as null characters.
By clicking the
button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to
16 items of input history can be retained.
The maximum length of the character string to be search that can be input is up to 150 one-byte characters.
(2) Search condition specification area
(a)
This area specifies the bit size each specified search data is to be regarded as via a check box. As the
default, the data is searched as 8-bit data.
Byte:
Search as 8-bit data (default)
Word:
Search as 16-bit data
Double Word:
Search as 32-bit data
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
187
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(b)
This is a check box which specifies whether to search the whole specified region or not when conducting
search. With the default, only the portion remaining in the range is searched.
Searches the remaining portion of the range (default).
Searches the whole range.
(3) Search direction specification area
This area specifies the direction of search.
Two directions, upward and downward, can be selected.
• Up:
Upward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the beginning
(upward on display).
• Down:
Downward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the end
(downward on display).
(4) Search range specification area
This area specifies the addresses being searched. A symbol or expression can also be specified for an
address.
The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when
inputting numerical values is hexadecimal.
Function buttons
Searches for the specified search data in accordance with the conditions. As the search results, the
matching character string is highlighted. For a continuous search, press this button again.
Sets the specified conditions as the search conditions and closes the dialog box.
Interrupts the search for data.
During the data search, the
button changes to the
Closes the Memory Search dialog box.
During a data search, it changes to the
button.
Opens the help window that explains the Memory Search dialog box.
188
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
button.
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Fill Dialog Box
General
Initializes the memory contents with a specified code.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Edit] → [Memory] → [Fill…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + E , M , and F keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-38. Memory Fill Dialog Box
(1) Address range specification area
(2) Data specification area
Function
The Memory Fill dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Address range specification area
• Data specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
189
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Address range specification area
This area specifies the address range of the memory contents to be initialized.
A symbol or expression can also be specified for an address. The default radix when inputting numerical
values is hexadecimal.
Specify the initialization top and end addresses, in that order.
(2) Data specification area
This area specifies the data to be initialized.
Binary data strings (byte data strings) with up to 16 items of data can be specified. Specify each item of data
using a space as a delimiter.
The default radix is hexadecimal and the radix can be specified for each item of data.
Function buttons
Initializes the memory contents.
Closes this dialog box.
This button changes to the
button during memory initialization.
Stops initializing the memory.
The
button changes to the
Returns the input data to its original form.
Opens the help window.
190
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
button during memory initialization.
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Copy Dialog Box
General
Copies the memory contents.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Edit] → [Memory] → [Copy…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + E , M , and C keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-39. Memory Copy Dialog Box
(1) Address range specification area
Function
The Memory Copy dialog box consists of the following area.
• Address range specification area
The function of this area is explained below.
(1) Address range specification area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
191
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
This area specifies the copy source and copy destination addresses.
A symbol or expression can also be specified for an address. The default radix when inputting numerical
values is hexadecimal.
From: Specifies the address range of the copy source. Specify the copy source top address and copy source
end address, in that order.
To:
Specifies the top address of the copy destination.
Function buttons
Copies the memory contents.
Closes this dialog box.
This button changes to the
button while copying the memory.
Stops copying the memory data.
The
button changes to the
Returns the input data to its original value.
Opens the help window.
192
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
button while copying the memory.
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Compare Dialog Box
General
Compares the memory contents.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Edit] → [Memory] → [Compare…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + E , M , and P keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-40. Memory Compare Dialog Box
(1) Compare range specification area
Function
The Memory Compare dialog box consists of the following area.
• Compare range specification area
The function of this area is explained below.
(1) Compare range specification area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
193
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
This area specifies the compare source and compare destination addresses.
A symbol or expression can also be specified for an address. The default radix when inputting numerical
values is hexadecimal.
Specify the address range of the compare source and the compare destination so that a guard area is not
included. If a guard area is included, an error will occur and the error message f201 (F) will be displayed.
Mem1:
Specify the address range of the compare source. Specify the compare source top address and
compare source end address, in that order.
Mem2:
Specify the top address of the compare destination.
Function buttons
Compares the memory contents.
If no difference is found as a result of comparison, a confirmation dialog box is displayed. If a
difference is found, a Memory Compare Result dialog box is opened. The confirmation dialog box
that is displayed if no difference is found as a result of comparison is shown below.
By clicking the
button in this confirmation dialog box, the Memory Compare dialog box is
closed.
Closes this dialog box.
This button changes to the
button during comparison.
Stops comparing the memory contents.
The
button changes to the
button while comparing the memory contents.
Returns the input data to its original value.
Opens the help window.
194
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Compare Result Dialog Box
General
Displays the result of comparing memory contents.
This dialog box is opened if a discrepancy is found as a result of comparing the memory contents in the Memory
Compare Dialog box. If no discrepancy is found, a confirmation dialog box is opened instead of this dialog box.
Window
Figure 6-41. Memory Compare Result Dialog Box
Function
The Memory Compare Result dialog box consists of the following area.
• Compare result display area
The function of this area is explained below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
195
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Compare result display area
This area displays the result of comparing memory contents. Only those parts where there were comparison
errors are displayed.
Mem1 Addr:
Memory:
Displays the compare source address at which an error has been found.
Displays the data that has caused the error. The compare source data is displayed on the
left, and the compare destination data is displayed on the right.
Mem2 Addr:
Displays the compare destination address at which an error has been found.
The address width changes when a memory bank is used.
Function buttons
Closes this dialog box.
Opens the help window.
196
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Pseudo DMM dialog box
General
Sets the address and data for which DMM is to be executed.
The memory contents are rewritten in real-time while the user program is being executed (However, the user
program under execution is temporarily stopped and then re-executed because this function is realized by software
emulation).
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Edit] → [Memory…] → [Modify] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + E , M , and M keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-42. Pseudo DMM Dialog Box
(1) Address setting area
(2) Data setting area
(3) Data size setting area
Function
The pseudo DMM dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Address setting area
• Data setting area
• Data size setting area
The function of each area is explained below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
197
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Address setting area
This area specifies the address to which data is to be written.
An address can be specified by a symbol or an expression, in the same manner as in the Address Move
dialog box. The default radix when inputting a numerical value is hexadecimal.
(2) Data setting area
This area specifies the data to be written to the memory address specified in the address setting area above.
Only one binary data string can be specified at a time. Specify the size of the data in the data size setting
area below. The default radix is hexadecimal.
(3) Data size setting area
This area specifies the size of the data to be written.
Select the size of the data from the following:
Byte:
Writes the data specified in the data setting area as 8-bit data.
Word:
Writes the data specified in the data setting area as 16-bit data.
Double Word: Writes the data specified in the data setting area as 32-bit data.
Function buttons
Writes the data.
Closes the DMM dialog box.
Returns the input data to its original form.
Opens the help window.
198
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Watch Window
General
This window displays and changes the specified data.
Opening method
This window can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Browse] → [Watch] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + B , and W keys in that order.
Click the
button on the toolbar.
• In the Source window
After selecting data, select [View] → [View Watch] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and I keys in that order.
button.
Click the
• In the Assemble window
After selecting data, select [View] → [View Watch] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and I keys in that order.
Click the
button.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
199
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-43. Watch Window
Function
Displays and changes data.
The data display is added to by selecting a variable name or symbol name in the Source window or the Assemble
window and clicking the
button, or by dragging the selected part directly to the Watch window with the
mouse.
Adding can also be done by specifying a variable name or symbol name in the Quick Watch dialog box or the Add
Watch dialog box and clicking
.
To delete a data display, click a variable name or symbol name, then after highlighting it, click the
button. Alternatively, make a selection using the arrow keys, then after highlighting the selection delete it by pressing
the DEL key.
Data value update results and rewrites are reflected in the Memory window.
Also, wide-area data allocated to any 2 KB of internal RAM area (such as global variables or public symbols) can
be displayed in real time even during emulation, just as in the Memory window.
The boundary line between the symbol name display area and data value display/setting area can be moved to the
left or right using the mouse.
To move the boundary, drag the mouse cursor at the point when it changes from “
” to “↔”.
Note This data is allocated to the internal high-speed RAM (IRAM) area in the ID78K4-NS, and to the internal
RAM (IRAM and PRAM) areas in the ID78K4.
The Watch window consists of the following areas.
• Symbol name display area
• Data value display/setting area
200
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Symbol name display area
This area displays the variable names and symbol names.
A “+” is displayed in front of arrays, pointer type variables, and structures/unions. These variables are
expanded and displayed as shown below by double-clicking them.
• For an array, all the elements of the variable are displayed in accordance with the type of array variable.
• For pointer type variables, the data indicated by the pointer is displayed.
• For structures/unions, all the members of the structure/union are displayed in accordance with the type of
member variable.
However, if a structure/union is defined within a structure/union, the members up to the tag name or
variable name in the internal structure/union are displayed.
For variables which have been expanded and displayed, the “+” display is changed to a “–” display. If they
are double-clicked in this state, the expansion display is deleted.
Note that variables with a “+” that are displayed inside a structure/union are expanded and displayed in the
same way by double-clicking them.
To expand and display, or to delete an expansion display, select the variable with the arrow keys, then press
the Enter key.
Data which has become invalid due to changes in the scope or optimization compilation is dimmed.
Whether to display or not display variable types can be set in the Debugger Option dialog box.
Caution
Arrays of up to four dimensions are supported. An array of five dimensions or more cannot
be displayed.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
201
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Data value display/setting area
This area is where data values are displayed and changed.
• When the variable is a structure/union, the address is displayed.
• When the variable is an enumeration type, the member name is displayed.
• When the variable is an integer, it is displayed as follows.
XXXH:
Displayed in hexadecimal.
XXXT:
Displayed in decimal.
XXXQ:
Displayed in octal.
XXXY:
Displayed in binary.
• When the variable is a floating point, it is displayed as follows.
[+|–] inf
[+|–] nan
[+|–] integer portion e [+|–] exponent
[+|–] integer portion. Decimal portion [e [+|–] exponent]
Values are updated when execution is stopped. To save values, select [File] → [Save As…] in the main
window, then save to the displayed file. Also, if the acquisition of data values has failed, this area will be
blank.
Data which has become invalid due to the changing of the scope or optimization compilation is displayed
together with a “?”.
The contents of changes are written to the target by pressing the Enter key. The contents prior to the
change can be erased using the ESC key.
If the display size of variables, or assembler bit symbols or registers, etc. in the C language is fixed, the
display size cannot be selected.
202
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Opens the Add Watch dialog box.
In the Add Watch dialog box, if the data is specified and the
button is
clicked, the specified data is added to the Watch window.
Deletes the specified data from the watch window.
The DEL key also performs this operation.
Moves the selected data one line up.
Moves the selected data one line down.
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Closes the Watch window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
203
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Quick Watch Dialog Box
General
Temporarily displays and changes specified data.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [View] → [Quick Watch…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and Q keys in that order.
• In the Source window
button in the Source window.
Click the
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + W .
• In the Assemble window
button in the Assemble window.
Click the
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + W .
Window
Figure 6-44. Quick Watch Dialog Box
(4) Display radix select area
(5) Display size select area
(1) Symbol
specification
area
(6) Display item number
specification area
(2) Symbol name display area
204
(3) Data value display/setting area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
Temporarily displays and changes specified data.
The boundary between the symbol name display area and the data value display/setting area can be moved to the
left or right using the mouse. To move the boundary, drag the mouse cursor at the point when it changes from “
” to
“↔”.
The Quick Watch dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Symbol specification area
• Symbol name display area
• Data value display/setting area
• Display radix select area
• Display size select area
• Display item number specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Symbol specification area
This area specifies the data to be displayed.
In the default setting, the string selected in the accessed window is displayed, but as necessary, it is also
possible to change it by inputting from the keyboard. However, if the selected string does not exist, this area
becomes blank.
By clicking the
button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to
16 items of input history can be retained.
When the contents of the symbol specification area have been changed, clicking the
button
causes the data specified in the symbol specification area to be displayed in the symbol name display area
and data value display/setting area.
(2) Symbol name display area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
205
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
This area displays the variable names or symbol names. The display contents are the same as in the Watch
window.
However, data which has becomes invalid due to changes in the scope or optimization compilation is not
displayed.
(3) Data value display/setting area
This area displays the data values.
The display contents and the way to change the contents are the same as in the Watch window.
(4) Display radix select area
This area selects the radix to be displayed.
(5) Display size select area
This area selects the size to be displayed.
(6) Display item number specification area
This area specifies the number of data items to be displayed.
Specify blank or a number from 1 to 256. The default is blank.
If blank, the data is displayed as a simple variable. If a number 1 or greater is specified, it is displayed as an
array variable. In this case, a “+” is displayed in front of the data. By double-clicking this data, all the elements
of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the data type. “+” of the expanded and displayed
data changes to “–”. Double-clicking in this state cancels the expanded display.
If the display number of variables, or assembler bit symbols or registers, etc. in the C language is fixed, the
display number cannot be specified.
206
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Displays the data specified in the symbol specification area in the symbol name display area
and the data value display/setting area.
Adds the data specified in the symbol specification area to the Watch window.
Closes this dialog box.
Change contents that have not actually been written to the target are erased.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
207
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Add Watch Dialog Box
General
Registers data to be displayed in the Watch window.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [View] → [Add Watch…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and W keys in that order.
• In the Watch window
Click the
button in the Watch window.
Window
Figure 6-45. Add Watch Dialog Box
(1) Symbol specification
area
(2) Display radix
select area
(3) Display size
select area
(4) Display item number specification area
Functions
The Add Watch dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Symbol specification area
• Display radix select area
• Display size select area
• Display item number specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
208
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Symbol specification area
This area specifies the data to be viewed in the Watch window.
In the default setting, the string selected in the accessed window is displayed, but as necessary, it is also
possible to change it by inputting from the keyboard. However, if the selected string does not exist, this area
becomes blank.
button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to
By clicking the
16 items of input history can be retained.
The expressions that can be used for inputting data are as shown below.
• C language variable name (Variable expression: Variable name)
Variable expression [decimal constant values]:
Variable expression.
Member name:
Array elements
Structure/union actual member
Variable expression → Member name:
Member of structure/union that indicates a pointer
*Variable expression:
Value of pointer variable
• Register name
• SFR name, SFR bit name
• Label, EQU and immediate address
• Register name.bit
• Label name.bit, EQU symbol name.bit, immediate address.bit
• Bit symbol
(2) Display radix select area
This area selects the display radix.
The display radix can be selected from among the following.
Proper:
In the case of a variable, the value specified for each variable is displayed.
In the case of a symbol, it is displayed in the radix set in the Debugger Option dialog box.
Hex:
Displayed in hexadecimal (XXXH).
Dec:
Displayed in decimal (XXXT).
Oct:
Displayed in octal (XXXQ).
Bin:
Displayed in binary (XXXY).
String:
Displayed as a character string.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
209
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Display size select area
This area selects the display size.
The display size can be selected from among the following.
Adaptive:
In the case of a variable, the value specified for each variable is displayed.
In the case of a symbol, the size set in the Debugger Option dialog box is displayed.
Byte:
Displayed in 8 bits.
Word:
Displayed in 16 bits.
Double word:
Displayed in 32 bits.
If the display size of variables, or assembler bit symbols or registers, etc. in the C language is fixed, the
specified size is displayed in the Watch window regardless of the specified display size.
(4) Display item number specification area
This area specifies the number of data items to be displayed.
Specify blank or a number from 1 to 256. The default is blank.
If blank, the data is displayed as a simple variable. If a number 1 or greater is specified, it is displayed as an
array variable. In this case, a “+” is displayed in front of the data. By double-clicking this data, all the elements
of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the data type. “+” of the expanded and displayed
data changes to “–”. Double-clicking in this state cancels the expanded display.
If the display number of variables, or assembler bit symbols or registers, etc. in the C language is fixed, the
display number cannot be specified.
Function buttons
Adds the specified data to the Watch window. Does not close the Add Watch dialog box.
Adds the specified data to the Watch window and closes the Add Watch dialog box.
Closes the Add Watch dialog box.
Returns the input data to its original form.
Opens the help window.
210
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Change Watch dialog box
General
Changes the data on the line selected in the Watch window. The line of an opened hierarchy, such as the elements
of an array and the members of a structure or a union cannot be changed. If watch data is changed, the contents of
the selected line are replaced by new data.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window,
Select [View] → [Change Watch…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V and G keys in that order.
• In the Watch window,
button.
Click the
Window
Figure 6-46. Change Watch Dialog Box
(1) Symbol specification
area
(2) Display radix select
area
(3) Display size
specification area
(4) Displayed number of data
specification area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
211
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
Changes the data on the line selected in the Watch window. The line of an opened hierarchy, such as the elements
of an array and the members of a structure or a union cannot be changed. If watch data is changed, the contents of
the selected line are replaced by new data.
The Change Watch dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Symbol specification area
• Display radix select area
• Display size specification area
• Displayed number of data specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Symbol specification area
This area changes the symbol name.
For details, refer to the symbol specification area of the Add Watch dialog box.
(2) Display radix select area
This area changes the radix to be displayed.
For details, refer to the display radix select area of the Add Watch dialog box.
(3) Display size specification area
This area changes the size to be displayed.
For details, refer to the display size specification area of the Add Watch dialog box.
(4) Displayed number of data specification area
This area changes the number of data to be displayed.
For details, refer to the display size specification area of the Add Watch dialog box.
212
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Always dimmed.
Replaces the registered contents of the line currently selected by the specified data,
and then closes the Change Watch dialog box.
Closes the Change Watch dialog box.
Returns the input data to its original form.
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
213
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Register Window
General
This window displays and changes the contents of the registers (general-purpose registers and control registers).
Opening method
This window can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Browse] → [Register] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + B , and R keys in that order.
Click the
button on the toolbar.
Window
Figure 6-47. Register Window
Function
Displays and changes the contents of registers (general-purpose registers and control registers).
The register to be displayed can be selected in the Register Select dialog box.
The Register window can be opened only in the active state.
214
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The Register window consists of the following areas.
• Register bank setting area (ID78K0-NS only)
• General-purpose register display area
• Control register display area
The boundary line between the general-purpose register display area and control register display area can be
moved up or down using the mouse. To move the boundary, drag the mouse cursor at the point when it changes from
“
” to “↔”.
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Register bank setting area (ID78K0-NS only)
This area displays and sets the bank number of the general-purpose registers.
Item
Register Bank:
Description
Displays and sets the register bank displayed in the generalpurpose register display area. Changing the bank number is
performed using the
Current Bank:
button.
Displays the register bank number currently set to the target
(current bank).
(2) General-purpose register display area
This area displays or changes the contents of the registers with the bank number displayed by Register Bank:
in the register bank setting area. The contents can be written to the target memory by pressing the Enter
key. The contents prior to the change can be erased using the ESC key.
This area also functions as a jump pointer for the jump function in addition to displaying/changing generalpurpose registers. Operation of the jump function is the same as in the case of the control registers.
General-purpose registers are displayed as absolute names or function names, which can be switched using
an item in the View menu displayed or the menu bar.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
215
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Control register display area
This area displays or changes the contents of the control registers. The contents can be written to the target
memory by pressing the Enter key. The contents prior to the change can be erased using the ESC key.
The flag names and flag values of the register to which “+” is prefixed are displayed by double-clicking the
register name. “+” then changes to “−”. Switching can also be done by selecting a register name using the
arrow keys then pressing the Enter key.
In addition, this area also functions as a jump pointer for the jump function.
The jump function is a function to jump to the Source window, Assemble window, Memory window, or
Coverage window
Note
by using a selected control register value as a jump pointer. The jump destination
window displays the jump pointer at the beginning.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
<1> Select the control register.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
• If the jump destination window is the Source window.
Select [Jump] → [Source] from the menu bar.
Press GRPH + J , and S keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + U .
• If the jump destination window is the Assemble window.
Select [Jump] → [Assemble] from the menu bar.
Press GRPH + J , and A keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + D .
• If the jump destination window is the Memory window.
Select [Jump] → [Memory] from the menu bar.
Press GRPH + J , and E keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + M .
• If the jump destination window is the Coverage window
Note
.
Select [Jump] → [Coverage] from the menu bar.
Press GRPH + J , and C keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + I .
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
When the memory bank is used, the address width of the PC changes.
216
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Closes the Register window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
217
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
SFR Window
General
This window displays and changes SFRs. The I/O ports set in the Add I/O Port dialog box can also be displayed
and changed.
Opening method
This window can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Browse] → [SFR] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + B , and F keys in that order.
Click the
button in the tool bar.
Window
Figure 6-48. SFR Window
Function
Displays and changes the contents of the SFRs. Note, however, that values cannot be changed for read-only
SFRs.
Also, SFRs that cause the device to operate when read are read-protected and cannot therefore be read. When
reading such SFRs, select the SFR to be read and execute [View] → [Compulsion read] from the menu bar.
The I/O ports set in the Add I/O Port dialog box can also be displayed and changed.
The operation for read-only or read-protected I/O ports is the same as that for SFRs.
218
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The SFR window consists of the following areas.
• SFR name display area
• Attribute display area
• Contents of SFR display area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) SFR name display area
This area displays the SFR and I/O port names.
When the I/O port address is an undefined value, the I/O port name is dimmed.
(2) Attribute display area
This area displays the read/write attribute, access type, and absolute address of the SFR name or I/O port.
Whether to display or not display the attribute display area can be selected using [View] → [Attribute] from the
menu bar.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
219
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The types of read/write attributes are as follows.
Attribute
Meaning
R
Read-enabled SFR or I/O port
W
Write-enabled SFR or I/O port
R/W
Read-/Write-enabled SFR or I/O port
The access types are as follows.
Access Type
Meaning
1
Bit-access-enabled SFR
8
Byte-access-enabled SFR or I/O port
16
Word-access-enabled SFR or I/O port
(3) Contents of SFR display area
This area displays and changes the contents of the SFRs or I/O ports. This area is displayed as follows
depending on the attribute of the SFR or I/O port.
• Read-enabled SFR or I/O port:
Displayed in black
• Write-enabled SFR or I/O port:
Displayed with “—-”
• Read-/Write-enabled SFR or I/O port:
Displayed in black
• SFR or I/O port with values that change when read:
Displayed with “**”
The changed contents are written to the target by pressing the Enter key. The contents before change can
be erased with the Esc key. The value of an SFR or I/O port which is protected from reading can be read by
executing [View] → [Compulsion read] from the menu bar.
220
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Closes the SFR window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
221
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
SFR Select Dialog Box
General
Selects SFRs or I/O ports that are not displayed in the SFR window.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods when the current window is the SFR window.
• In the main window
Select [View] → [Select…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and E keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-49. SFR Select Dialog Box
Function
The SFR Select dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Display SFR select area
• Display order specification button
• No display list display order change button
The function of each area is explained below.
222
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Display SFR select area
Select the SFRs or I/O ports that are to be displayed in the SFR window, and the SFRs or I/O ports that are
not to be displayed.
The SFRs or I/O ports displayed in the SFR window are shown on the [Display:] list, and the SFRs or I/O
ports not displayed are shown on the [No Display:] list. The SFRs or I/O ports displayed or not displayed in
the SFR window can be changed by selecting an SFR or I/O port name from these lists and by clicking the
or
button. If all the SFRs or I/O ports are to be displayed, click the
button. If all the SFRs or I/O ports are to be hidden, click the
button. The function of each button
is explained below.
Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [No Display:] area to the [Display:] list
area.
Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list area to the [No Display:]
area.
Moves all the SFRs or I/O ports to the cursor position in [Display:].
Moves all the SFRs or I/O ports to [No Display:].
Two or more SFRs or I/O ports can be selected by clicking the mouse while holding down the control key or
the shift key when selecting an SFR or I/O port from the [Display:] list or [No Display:] list.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
223
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Display order specification button
This button sets the display order in the [Display:] list. The SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list is
moved to the top of the list with the
button, and to the bottom with the
also moved up one line with the
button and down one line with the
button. It is
button.
The function of each button is as follows.
Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list to the top of the list.
Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list up one line in the list.
Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list to down one line in the list.
Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list to the bottom of the list.
(3) Display order of non-display list change button
This button selects the display order in the [No Display:] list. SFRs or I/O ports are displayed in alphabetical
order using the
button and in address order using the
button.
The function of each button is as follows.
Displays the list in [No Display:] in alphabetical order.
Displays the list in [No Display:] in address order.
Function buttons
Reflects the result of selection and specification of display order in the SFR window and closes the
SFR Select dialog box.
Cancels the change and closes this dialog box.
Cancels the change and restores the original setting.
Opens the help window.
224
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Add I/O Port Dialog Box
General
Registers an I/O port to be added to the SFR window.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Option] → [Add I/O Port…] from the menu bar.
Press GRPH + O , and P keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-50. Add I/O Port Dialog Box
(1) I/O port select area
(2) I/O port name specification area
(4) Access size specification area
(3) I/O port address specification area
(5) Access attributes specification area
Function
The Add I/O Port dialog box consists of the following areas.
• I/O port select area
• I/O port name specification area
• I/O port address specification area
• Access size specification area
• Access attribute specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
225
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) I/O port select area
This area displays a list of the currently entered I/O ports. If a new I/O port is entered, it is added to this list.
An I/O port that has already been entered can also be selected and changed or deleted.
(2) I/O port name specification area
This area specifies the name of the I/O port to be added.
An I/O port name with up to 15 characters can be specified.
(3) I/O port address specification area
This area specifies the I/O port address to be added.
Addresses can be specified using symbols or expressions. The specification method is the same as in the
case of the Address Move dialog box.
The default radix when inputting numerical values is hexadecimal.
(4) Access size specification area
This area specifies the access size of the added I/O port.
Byte:
8 bits (default)
Word:
16 bits
Word access can be specified only for SFRs or external SFRs.
226
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) Access attribute specification area
This area specifies the access attributes of the added I/O port.
Read Only:
Sets exclusive read only.
Write Only:
Sets exclusive write only.
Read Protect:
Sets read protect.
In the default (all unchecked state), read and write are both enabled.
Function buttons
Reflects the add results in the SFR window and closes the Add I/O Port dialog box.
Cancels the change and closes this dialog box.
Cancels the change and restores the original state.
Opens the help window.
Adds the I/O port with the specified address.
Changes the settings for the selected I/O port.
Deletes the selected I/O port.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
227
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Local Variable Window
General
This window displays or changes the local variable in the current function.
Opening method
This window can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Browse] → [Local Variable] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + B , and L keys in that order.
Click the
button on the toolbar.
Window
Figure 6-51. Local Variable Window
(1) Local variable name display area
(2) Local variable value display/setting area
Function
Displays or changes the local variable.
This window automatically displays the local variable in the current function. Variables cannot be added or deleted.
The boundary line between the local variable name display area and local variable value display/setting area can
be moved to the left or right by the mouse. The boundary can be moved by dragging when the mouse cursor changes
from “
228
” to “↔”.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The Local Variable window consists of the following areas.
• Local variable name display area
• Local variable value display/setting area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Local variable name display area
This area displays local variable names.
The type and variable name are shown. These are displayed in the same way as in the Watch window. Also,
it is possible to have an expansion display like in the Watch window. However, variable names that have
become invalid due to optimization compilation, etc., are not displayed.
The auto variable, internal static variable and the register variable can be displayed.
Caution
A local variable cannot be displayed if the value of the program counter (PC) is in the
prologue or epilogue of a function.
(2) Local variable value display/setting area
This area displays/changes local variable values.
The variable value is displayed in the same way as in the Watch window.
Change contents are written to the target by pressing the Enter key. The contents prior to the change can
be erased using the ESC key.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
229
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Closes this window.
230
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Stack Window
General
This window displays and changes the current stack contents of the user program.
Opening method
This window can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Browse] → [Stack Trace] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + B , and K keys in that order.
Click the
button on the toolbar.
Window
Figure 6-52. Stack Window
(1) Stack frame number display area
(2) Stack frame contents display area
(3) Stack contents display/setting area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
231
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
Displays and changes the stack contents.
If the full traced contents cannot be displayed, a vertical scroll bar is displayed so that the contents can be scrolled.
The boundary between the stack frame contents display area and the stack contents display/setting area can be
moved to the left or right by the mouse. To move the boundary, drag the mouse cursor at the point when it changes
from “
” to “↔”.
This window has an active state only.
This window consists of the following areas.
• Stack frame number display area
• Stack frame contents display area
• Stack contents display/setting area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Stack frame number display area
This area displays the stack frame numbers.
The stack frame number is a natural number starting from 1, and the shallower the stack nest is, the larger
this number becomes. A stack number that is 1 larger than a certain function is the calling function of that
function.
(2) Stack frame contents display area
This area displays the stack frame contents.
The function or local variable names are displayed.
232
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
If the stack contents are functions, they is displayed by [Program name $ File name # Function name (Index
list) # Line no.]. The delimiter between the program name and the file name is a “$” and the delimiter between
the file name and the function name is a “#”. The “#” is also used as the delimiter between the function name
and the line no. The local variable list is not expanded and not displayed by clicking the Shrink button, and
is expanded and displayed by clicking the Expand button. If there are local variables in a function, the local
variables are displayed on the following and subsequent lines.
If the contents of the stack are local variables, the type and variable name is displayed. They are displayed in
the same way as in the Watch window. Whether to display or not display the variable type can be set in the
Debugger Option dialog box. Note that internal static variables and register variables other than current
functions are not displayed.
Caution
If “automatically assign to auto variable register, saddr area (-qv1 or -qv2)” or “access SP
argument/auto variable (-qf)” is specified by an option of the CC78K4, the stack frame
cannot be correctly displayed.
(3) Stack contents display/setting area
This area displays and changes the contents of the stack. “–” or local variable values are displayed. If the
stack contents are functions, a “–” is displayed and the contents cannot be changed.
If the stack contents are local variables, the variable values are displayed. Variable values are displayed in
the same way as in the Watch window. It is possible to change variable values.
Changed contents are written to the target by pressing the Enter key. The contents prior to the change can
be erased using the ESC key.
Other than displaying the stack contents, this area has the following functions.
(a) Jump function
Note
Jumps to the Source window, Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage window
by using the
function indicated by the stack frame number at the cursor as a jump pointer. The jump destination
window displays the jump pointer at the beginning.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in the sequential order.
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
<1> Position the cursor in the stack contents display/setting area.
<2> Perform one of the following operations on the main window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
233
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
• If the jump destination is the Source window
Select [Jump] → [SourceText] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + U .
• If the jump destination is the Assemble window
Select [Jump] → [Assemble] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + D .
• If the jump destination is the Memory window
Select [Jump] → [Memory] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + M .
• If the jump destination is the Coverage window
Note
Select [Jump] → [Coverage] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + I .
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Details of the jump destination are as follows.
Type of Function
Description of Operation
Function with the shallowest
nest (in the case of the current
function)
• If the jump destination is the Source window, it jumps to the
current PC line.
• If the jump destination is other than the Source window, it jumps
to the current PC address.
Functions with nests below
(in the case of a function other
than the current function)
• If the jump destination is the Source window, it jumps to the line
where the function nested below is called.
• If the jump destination is other than the Source window, it jumps
to the next address of the instruction that is calling the function
nested below.
Function buttons
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Closes this window.
Cancels expanded display of the local variable list of the selected function. This button changes to
Expand when it is selected.
Expands and displays the local variable list of the selected function. This button changes to
Shrink when it is selected.
234
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Cautions
(1) If the stack trace display function has a function that does not push the frame pointer (HL) to a stack frame
(such as the noauto or norec function) or the -qf option is added as an optimization option when compiling, it
may not be displayed correctly.
(2) [ERROR] may be displayed during function prologue processing or epilogue processing.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
235
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace View Window
General
This window displays the trace results.
Opening method
This window can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Browse] → [Trace] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + B , and T keys in that order.
Click the
button on the toolbar.
Window
Figure 6-53. Trace View Window
Function
Displays the trace results.
The contents can be scrolled by the vertical scroll bar. It is also possible to move up one page or down one page
using the
button or
button.
There are two modes in the Trace View window, the normal display mode and the mixed display mode.
236
• Normal display mode:
Displays the trace results only.
• Mixed display mode:
Displays the source file together with the trace results.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The Trace View window can be opened only in the active state and the window’s display is updated during a break
or step execution.
The tracer has a ring structure. For that reason, if data exceeding a valid frame is written, the oldest data is
overwritten. Also, in the display, the frames are displayed in frame order with the oldest data as frame 0.
Block information is written to the tracer between the end of one execution of the user program and the beginning
of the next one. A horizontal line is displayed indicating the block information display in each display area. Block
information is written in the following cases, depending on the previous and subsequent execution mode.
Previous Execution Mode
Execution Mode This Time
Real-time execution
When executing real-time execution
When executing step execution
Step execution
When executing real-time execution
When executing step execution after changing execution address
To clear the trace contents, select [Option] → [Trace Clear] .
Note that, operation with respect to a tracer during program execution is performed by selecting [Run] → [Tracer
Start/Close] (this is possible only when executing with a break ignored).
The Trace View window consists of the following areas.
• Point mark display area
• Trace mode display area
• Trace result display area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Point mark display area
This area displays the setting states of various events. If an execution event or fetch event (access operation)
is set to the corresponding trace address, the mark corresponding to the type of the event is displayed.
Note that the marks displayed are not marks from tracing but are event marks set when the trace results are
displayed.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
237
CHAPTER 6
Mark
Meaning
E
Shows that an event condition is set.
L
Shows that the final level of an event link is set.
B
Shows that a break event is set.
T
Shows that a trace event is set.
Note 1
Shows that a timer event is set.
Note 1
Shows that a snapshot event is set.
A
Shows that two or more events are set.
Note 2
Shows that a DMM event is set
Ti
S
WINDOW REFERENCE
M
Notes 1.
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Supported only in the ID78K0S-NS
(2) Trace mode display area
This area displays the type of trace mode.
The display contents are as follows.
A: All traces or section-traced frames
Q: Qualify-traced frames
S: Step execution frames
T: Delay trigger frames
“T” is displayed for all the frames in which a delay trigger is generated.
“Q” is displayed when the qualify trace condition is met while the section trace condition has been met.
238
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Trace result display area
This area displays the trace results. If this area is selected, the jump function and the window linking function
can be used.
The following contents are displayed in the trace results display area. Note that display or non-display of each
area can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box.
• Trace frame number display
• Time tag display
Note 1
• Fetch access display
• Data access display
• External sense data display
Note 1
• Branch source address display
Note 2
• Mnemonic display
Notes 1.
This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
2.
Supported only in the ID78K4
(a) Trace frame number display (Frame)
This is where the trace frame number is displayed.
(b) Time tag display (Time)
Displays the clocks required for the target chip from the start of execution of the previous trace contents
to the start of execution of the current trace contents.
This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
The count division rate can be changed in the Extended Option dialog box.
The Trace Data Select dialog box can select the display or non-display of the time tag.
The time tag display can be switched between clock count display and time display.
Number of
Clocks
Time Tag Value
Division Ratio 1
Division Ratio 2
Division Ratio 4
Division Ratio 8
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
4
4
3
2
2
5
5
3
2
2
6
6
4
3
2
7
7
4
3
2
8
8
5
3
2
9
9
5
3
2
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
239
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(c) Fetch access display (Address Data Status)
This is where the fetch results of the program and the snap contents are displayed. This field is displayed
as follows depending on the status displayed in the status display field (Status).
Item
Display Contents
Status
M1
Program fetch display (the first byte fetch of the instruction)
OP
Program fetch display (2nd and subsequent op code fetch)
IF
SNAP
Notes 1.
Program fetch display (invalid fetch or status unknown)
Note 1
Snap display
BRM1Note 2
The first byte fetch of the first instruction after a branch.
Other than
above
No display (blank)
This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A
or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
2.
Supported only in the ID78K4 (-NS)
In the case of the program fetch display, the display is as follows.
Item
Display Contents
Address
Fetch address display
Data
Fetch data display
Note that display/non-display of fetch operation access can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog
box.
In the case of the snap display, the display is as follows.
Item
Address
Data
240
Snap Type
Display Contents
Register
Register name
SFR
SFR name
Memory
Memory address
Register
Register name
SFR
SFR name
Memory
Memory contents
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(d) Data access display (Address Data Status)
This is where the data access results are displayed.
[ID78K0 (-NS), ID78K0S (-NS)]
Items
Status
Display Contents
VECT
RW
Vector read
Data read/write
R
Data read
W
Data write
Address
Address display
Data
Data display
[ID78K4 (-NS)]
Items
Status
Display Contents
VECT
RW
Vector read
Data read/wirteNote
R
Data readNote
W
Data wirteNote
RWP
Data read/write by user program
RP
Data read by user program
WP
Data write by user program
RWM
Data read/write by macro service
RM
Data read by macro service
WM
Data write by macro service
Address
Address display
Data
Data display
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
241
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(e) External sense data display (Ext Probe)
This is where the input level of the external sense clip at trace time is displayed.
The correspondence of each bit is as follows.
[ID78K0-NS, ID78K0S-NS]
This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
External Sense Data Display
External Sense Clip Number
bit 15
NO.16
bit 14
NO.15
bit 13
NO.14
bit 12
NO.13
bit 11
NO.12
bit 10
NO.11
bit 9
NO.10
bit 8
NO.9
bit 7
NO.8
bit 6
NO.7
bit 5
NO.6
bit 4
NO.5
bit 3
NO.4
bit 2
NO.3
bit 1
NO.2
bit 0
NO.1
[ID78K0, ID78K4]
External Sense Data Display
External Sense Clip Number
bit 7
NO.8
bit 6
NO.7
bit 5
NO.6
bit 4
NO.5
bit 3
NO.4
bit 2
NO.3
bit 1
NO.2
bit 0
NO.1
Note that display/non-display of external sense data can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box.
242
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(f) Branch source address display (Jmpaddress)
Note
This is where the last address at the branch destination is displayed.
This is displayed only when the status is BRM1.
Whether the branch source address is displayed or not can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog
box.
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
(g) Mnemonic display (DisAsm)
This is where the disassemble result is displayed.
This is displayed only when the status of the fetch operation access display is M1.
In the trace results display area, the normal display mode and mixed display mode can be switched by
selecting [View] → [Mix] from the menu bar.
• Normal display mode
Normal display mode is the mode in which only the trace results are shown.
• Mixed display mode
Mixed display mode is the mode in which the source file is displayed in combination with the trace
results.
If the program code corresponds to the displayed program fetch address line, the source file line is
displayed before that trace results line.
When the load module is downloaded and symbol information is being read, the mixed display mode
becomes valid only in cases where fetch address, fetch data, fetch status, or disassemble results are
being displayed.
Even in cases where [View] → [Mix] is selected on the menu bar and mixed display mode is selected, if
none of the above items is being displayed, the display is normal.
The source file line’s display color is changed and is highlighted in green.
The jump function and window link function are detailed below.
• Jump function
• Window link function
(i) Jump function
The jump function is executed by carrying out the following operations in order.
<1> Move the cursor to the jump source line.
<2> In the main window, do one of the following operations.
• If the jump destination window is the Source window
Select [Jump] → [Source] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + U .
• If the jump destination window is the Assemble window
Select [Jump] → [Assemble] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + D .
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
243
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
• If the jump destination window is the Memory window
Select [Jump] → [Memory] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + M .
• If the jump destination window is the Coverage window
(This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.)
Select [Jump] → [Coverage] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order.
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + I .
The address used as the jump source changes according to the cursor position.
Cursor Position
Jump Pointer
Access address display area
Access addressNote
Access data display area
Access addressNote
Access status display area
Access addressNote
Other than above
Fetch address
Note If the jump destination is the Source window or the Assemble window, the fetch address is
made the jump pointer.
(ii) Window link function
The window link function can be used by carrying out the following operations in order.
<1> Make the Trace View window the current window and select the window to be synchronized
with from among the items in [View] → [Window Synchronize] on the menu bar
Items in [Window Synchronize]
Linked Window
Source
Source window
Assemble
Assemble window
Memory
Memory window
CoverageNote
Coverage window
Note This is displayed when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
<2> Move the cursor to the synchronization origin line in the trace results display area in the Trace
View window. If the window to be synchronized with is not open in the active state, it will open
in the active state.
<3> The trace results address selected in <2> is used as the pointer, and the linked contents are
displayed in the corresponding window selected in <1>, or the cursor is positioned there.
244
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
In the case of window linking, the address which is the link origin also changes as follows in accordance
with the cursor position.
Cursor Position
Jump Pointer
Access address display area
Access addressNote
Access data display area
Access addressNote
Access status display area
Access addressNote
Other than above
Fetch address
Note If the linking destination is the Source window or the Assemble window, the fetch address
is always made the jump pointer. Unlike the jump function, if the cursor’s position is
moved in the Trace View window, the cursor or the highlighted display in each linked
window is also moved.
Unlike for the jump function, for the window link function, if the cursor is moved on the Trace window, the
cursor and display in reverse video on each of the linked windows are also moved.
Function buttons
Opens the Trace Search dialog box and searches trace results or performs pick up.
Note
Search results are highlighted in the Trace View window. In the pick up display mode
, frames
which matched the search conditions are picked up and displayed.
This button cannot be selected when a snap frame is picked up and displayed.
Searches for the trace results that match the search conditions set in the Trace Search dialog
box in the backward direction from the cursor position frame (toward the top of the display).
This button cannot be selected in the pick up display.
Searches for the trace results that match the search conditions set in the Trace Search dialog
box in the forward direction from the cursor position frame (toward the bottom of the display).
This button cannot be selected in the pick up display.
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Close this window.
Note The pick up display mode is when [View] → [Pick Up] → [Search] is selected or when
“Pick Up Search Frame” is selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
245
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace Search Dialog Box
General
Searches trace data.
If search frame pick up is specified from the [View] menu, or the Trace Data Select dialog box (pick up display
mode), pick up of trace data is executed.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods when the current window is the Trace View
window.
• In the main window
Select [View] → [Search…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and S keys in that order.
• In the Trace View window
button.
Click the
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + G .
Window
Figure 6-54. Trace Search Dialog Box (1/2)
When pick up is not displayed
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(7)
246
(1) Status select area
(5) External sense data setting area
(2) Access size select area
(6) Search conditions specification area
(3) Address setting area
(7) Search direction specification area
(4) Data setting area
(8) Search range specification area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 6-54. Trace Search Dialog Box (2/2)
When pick up is displayed
Functions
Trace data is searched and picked up.
• If [View] → [Pick Up] → [Off] is selected from the menu bar, or [Pick Up Off] is selected in the Trace Data
Select dialog box, a trace data search is executed.
• If [View] → [Pick Up] → [Search] is selected from the menu bar, or [Pick Up Search Frame] is selected in the
Trace Data Select dialog box (pick up display mode), trace data pick up is executed.
Note that if pick up of a snap frame is specified from the menu bar or the Trace Data Select dialog box, the Trace
Search dialog box cannot be called.
The Trace Search dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Status select area
• Access size select area
• Address setting area
• Data setting area
• External sense data setting area
• Search conditions specification area
• Search direction specification area
• Search range specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
247
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Status select area
This area sets and selects the status conditions.
The status conditions that can be specified are shown below. It is possible to specify the status condition in
abbreviated form. There is no distinction between uppercase and lowercase characters in the input status
condition.
[ID78K0 (-NS), ID78K0S (-NS)]
Status
Abbreviated Form
Meaning
M1 Fetch
M1
M1 fetch
R/W
RW
Data read/write (including R, W)
Read
R
Data read
Write
W
Data write
Vector Read
VECT
Vector read by an interrupt
All status
ALL
All of the above specifications (M1, RW, R, W, VECT)
[ID78K4 (-NS)]
Status
Abbreviated Form
Meaning
All status
ALL
All frames below (BRM1, M1, R, W, VECT)
BRM1 Fetch
BRM1
First M1 fetch after program branch
M1 Fetch
M1
M1 fetch (including BRM1)
R/W
RW
Data read/write (including R and W)Note
Read
R
Data readNote
Write
W
Data writeNote
R/W by Macro
RWM
Data read/write by macro service (including RM and WN)
Read by Macro
RM
Data read by macro service
Write by Macro
WM
Data write by macro service
R/W by Program
RWP
Data read/write by program (including RP and WP)
Read by Program
RP
Data read by program
Write by Program
WP
Data write by program
Vector Read
VECT
Vector code by interrupt
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
If the status condition setting is omitted, all the frames become search objects.
248
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Access size select area
This area sets and selects the access size conditions.
By specifying the access size conditions, the access width for the data condition during a trace data search is
determined.
The access size conditions that can be specified are shown below. It is possible to specify the access size
conditions in abbreviated form. There is no distinction between uppercase and lowercase characters in the
input access size condition.
Size
Abbreviated Form
Meaning
Byte
B
Search is made with an 8-bit width as the data condition.
Search is made only during 8-bit access.
WordNote
W
Search is made with a 16-bit width as the data condition.
Search is made only during 16-bit access.
No Condition
NC
An access-size search is not executed.
Bit
1
Detection is carried out with a 1-bit width as the data condition.
Detection is carried out only during 8-bit access.
Note Supported only in the ID78K4 (-NS)
When an op code fetch access event is specified as a status condition, the selection of Bit is not displayed.
Even if Bit or 1 is selected, an error will occur.
If Bit is specified as the access size condition, the search is made with a 1-bit width as the data condition.
However, due to emulator operation, access to the bit itself cannot be traced directly and the debugger
searches for a pseudo bit access by setting the address conditions and data conditions internally as follows.
Input Example
Trace Search Setting
Address
fe20.1
Address
fe20
Data
1
Data
00000010B
Mask
11111101B
For that reason, for access to other bits in the same address, or even for access to all 8 bits in the same
address, if the values match the specified values (address, bit), trace data is searched for in accordance with
the specified status.
• If No Condition is specified, the data setting area is displayed in gray and input is not possible.
• If the access size condition setting is omitted, it is judged automatically from the address conditions and
data conditions and set.
• If a bit is set for the address condition, the condition becomes Bit.
• If 8 bits is set for the data condition, the condition becomes Byte.
• If the data condition specification is omitted, the condition becomes No Condition.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
249
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Address setting area
This area sets the address condition.
The setting range is as follows.
[ID78K0 (-NS)]
(When a bank is not used)
Setting range:
0 ≤ Address value ≤ 0xFFFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFFFF
(When a bank is used)
Setting range:
0 ≤ Address value ≤ (n
Note
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ (n
<< 16)|0xFFFF
Note
<< 16)|0xFFFF
Note n is the maximum bank number used.
[ID78K0S-NS]
Setting range:
0 ≤ Address value ≤ 0xFFFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFFFF
[ID78K4 (-NS)]
(Execution or fetch event)
Setting range:
0 ≤ Address value ≤ 0xFFFFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFFFFF
(Data access event)
Setting range:
0 ≤ Address value ≤ 0xFFFFFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFFFFFF
Note n is the maximum bank number used.
There are two types of address conditions: Address, where the address value is set, and Mask, where the
mask value for the address value is input. The setting method is shown below.
(a) Address
Input the lower address and higher address, in that order.
The following three types of settings are possible for the address condition.
<1> Point setting
For a point setting, set a value in the lower address only, or set the same value in both the lower
address and the higher address. A mask setting can be made.
<2> Range setting
For a range setting, set values in the lower address and the higher address. Mask settings cannot
be made. Note that if the same value is input for the lower address and the higher address, it is
not handled as a range setting. In this case, it becomes a point setting or a bit setting.
250
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
<3> Bit setting
For a bit setting, set a value in the lower address only, or set the same value in the lower address
and the higher address. Specify the value in the address.bit format. Mask settings cannot be
made. The value of the bit that shows the bit position must be 0 ≤ bit ≤ 7.
For the address value, it is possible to specify a symbol or an expression. The specification method is the
same as in the Address Move dialog box.
The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal.
If the address condition setting is omitted, detection of the address condition is not performed.
(b) Mask
Set the mask value for the address value.
When mask setting is made, for a bit with a mask value of 1, it doesn’t matter if the address value is 0 or
1.
Example 1. Address:
Mask:
0x4000 to 0x4000
0xFF
In this kind of setting, the conditions match up to addresses 0x4000 to 0x40FF.
2. Address:
0x4000 to 0x4000
Mask:
0x101
In this kind of setting, addresses 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100 and 0x4101 match the
conditions.
If the mask value setting is omitted, masking is not executed.
The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal.
(4) Data setting area
This area sets the data condition. The setting range is as follows.
Access Size Condition
Setting Range
Byte
0 ≤ Data value ≤ 0xFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFF
WordNote
0 ≤ Data value ≤ 0xFFFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFFFF
Bit
Data value = 0, 1
Mask value = Cannot be specified.
Note Supported only in the ID78K4 (-NS)
There are two types of data conditions: Data, where the data value is set, and Mask, where the mask value
for the data value is set. The setting method is shown below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
251
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(a) Data
Specify the data value.
It is also possible to set a symbol or expression for the data value. The specification method is the same
as in the case of the Symbol To Address dialog box, but the default radix when numerical values are
input is hexadecimal.
If the data condition setting is omitted, data conditions are not detected.
(b) Mask
Set the mask value for the data value.
When mask setting is made, for a bit with a mask value of 1, it doesn’t matter if the data value is 0 or 1.
Example 1. Data:
Mask:
0x4000
0xFF
In this kind of setting, the conditions match when the data value is 0x4000 to 0x40FF.
2. Data:
Mask:
0x4000
0x101
In this kind of setting, when the data are 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101, they match
the conditions.
If the mask value setting is omitted, masking is not executed.
The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal.
(5) External sense data setting area
The external sense data cannot be set in this version.
(6) Search conditions specification area
This check box specifies whether to search the whole specified region or not when conducting a search. With
the default, only the portion remaining in the range is searched.
Searches the remaining portion of the range (default).
Searches the whole range.
252
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(7) Search direction specification area
Specify the search direction.
There are two search directions, an upward search and a downward search.
Up:
Upward search. This searches in the forward direction from the current cursor position (toward the
top of the display).
Down:
Downward search. This searches in the backward direction from the current cursor position (toward
the bottom of the display) (default).
(8) Search range specification area
This area specifies the frame number that is being searched for. The specification method is the same as in
the case of the Trace Move dialog box, but the default radix during input of numerical values is decimal.
Function buttons
Searches from the trace results in accordance with the specified conditions.
From the search results, the frames that match are highlighted in the Trace View window.
For a continuous search, click this button again.
Sets the specified conditions as the search conditions and closes the Trace dialog box.
Search is executed by the
and
buttons in the Trace View window.
Pick up the specified search data from the trace results in accordance with the conditions.
(During Pick
Only the frames that match the trace window conditions are displayed. To change the
Up Display)
conditions and conduct pick up again, click this button again.
This closes the Trace Search dialog box.
This opens the help window that explains the Trace Search dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
253
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace Data Select Dialog Box
General
Selects the items to be displayed in the Trace View window.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods when the current window is the Trace View window.
• In the main window
Select [View] → [Select] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and E keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-55. Trace Data Select Dialog Box
(1) Trace display item select area
(2) Trace display radix select area
(4) I/O port select areaNote
(3) Pick up select area
Note Supported only in the ID78K0
254
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The Trace Data Select dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Trace display item select area
• Trace display radix select area
• Pick up select area
• I/O port select area (ID78K0 only)
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Trace display item select area
This area selects the items to be displayed in the Trace View window.
The following items can be selected to be displayed or not displayed.
If there is a check mark, that area is displayed.
Frame:
Frame no. display field
Timetag
Note
:
Time tag display field
· Clock:
Clock display (default)
· Time:
Time display
Instruction Fetch Address:
Fetch address display field
Instruction Fetch Data:
Fetch data display field
Instruction Fetch Status:
Fetch status display field
Memory Access Address:
Access address display field
Memory Access Data:
Access data display field
Memory Access Status:
External Probe
DisAssemble:
Note
:
Access status display field
External sense data display field
Disassemble display field
Note This is displayed when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or
IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
255
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Trace display radix select area
This area selects the radix to be displayed. The display radix can be selected for the following items.
Instruction Fetch Data:
Fetch data display field
Memory Access Data:
Access data display field
External Probe
Port
Note 1
:
External sense data display field
Note 2
:
Notes 1.
I/O port data display field
This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or
IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
2.
Supported only in the ID78K0
The display radix can be selected from the following.
Hex:
Displayed in hexadecimal
Dec:
Displayed in decimal
Oct:
Displayed in octal
Bin:
Displayed in binary
(3) Pick up select area
This area selects the pick up conditions.
Pick Up Off:
Pick up is not displayed.
Pick Up Search Frame:
Pick Up Snap Frame
Pick Up BRM1 Frame
Notes 1.
Picks up and displays frames which match the search conditions.
Note 1
: Picks up and displays snap frames.
Note 2
: Picks up and displays the first M1 fetch frame (BRM1) after a program branch.
This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or
IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
2.
256
Cannot be selected in this version.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(4) I/O port select area (ID78K0 only)
Whether each I/O port data is displayed or not can be selected.
Function buttons
Reflects the result of selection in the Trace View window.
Closes this dialog box.
Cancels the change and restores the original setting.
Opens the help window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
257
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Coverage Window
(This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.)
General
This window displays the coverage result.
Opening method
This window can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Browse] → [Coverage] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + B , and O keys in that order.
Click the
button on the toolbar.
Window
Figure 6-56. Coverage Window
258
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
Displays the coverage result.
The vertical scroll bar is displayed at all times and the contents can be scrolled. It is also possible to move up one
page or down one page using the
button or
button.
The Coverage window has two states, the active state and the static state.
There can be only one Coverage window in the active state, but multiple windows can be opened in the static state
at the same time.
Active state:
The Coverage window in the active state has a display position and contents which are
synchronized with the current PC value and which are updated automatically. Also, in
addition to becoming a jump destination for the jump function, if it is synchronized with the
Trace View window, the Coverage window’s display is updated in synchronization with the
Trace View window.
The first Coverage window to be opened is in the active state.
Static state:
When in the static state, the Coverage window’s contents are updated in synchronization
with the current PC value, but the display position does not move. Also, it does not become a
jump destination and is not synchronized with the Trace View window.
If a Coverage window in the active state has already been opened, a new window is opened
in the static state.
Coverage measurement is enabled by selecting the check box in [Option] → [Coverage ON]. Note that operations
with respect to coverage measurement while a program is being executed are executed by [Run] → [Coverage
Start/Stop].
The Coverage window consists of the following areas:
• Address display area
• Coverage display area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Address display area
This area displays coverage addresses.
The ID78K4 displays 5-digit (20-bit) addresses.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
259
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Coverage display area
This area displays the coverage result.
The symbols displayed in this area have the following meanings.
When in 1-byte display mode
Symbol
Meaning
.
Nothing has been executed.
X
Execution only
R
Read only
W
Write only
A
Read and write
$
Execute and read
#
Execute and write
%
All execution, reading, and writing have been performed.
When in 64-/1,024-byte display mode
Symbol
Meaning
.
No execution, read, and write operations concerning the addresses
within the 64-/1,024-byte area were performed.
X
All addresses in the 64-/1,024-byte area were executed.
R
All addresses in the 64-/1,024-byte area were read.
W
All addresses in the 64-/1,024-byte area were written.
A
Reading and writing were executed at all addresses in the 64-/1,024byte area.
$
Execution and reading were performed at all addresses in the 64-/1,024byte area.
#
Execution and writing were performed at all addresses in the 64-/1,024byte area.
%
All execution, read, and write operations concerning all addresses within
the 64-/1,024-byte area were performed.
This area has two functions besides displaying the coverage results.
260
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(a) Jump function
Jumps to the Source window, Assemble window, or Memory window using the address at the cursor as a
jump pointer. The jump destination window is displayed with the jump pointer at the beginning.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
<1> Position the cursor.
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
• If the jump destination is the Source window
Select [Jump] → [SourceText] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + U .
• If the jump destination is the Assemble window
Select [Jump] → [Assemble] form the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + D .
• If the jump destination is the Memory window
Select [Jump] → [Memory] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + M .
(b) Window link function
Uses the coverage results to show the linked relationship between the Trace View window and the
Coverage window. The coverage results that are the target of linking with the Trace View window are
positioned by the cursor. For details, refer to the Window link function of the Trace View window.
Function buttons
Opens the Coverage Search dialog box and searches for coverage results.
Search results are highlighted in the Coverage window.
This button can be selected when in 1-byte display mode only.
Searches the Coverage results which match the search conditions, and which have been set in the
Coverage Search dialog box, from the cursor position toward the beginning (toward the top of the
display).
This button can be selected when in 1-byte display mode only.
It changes to the
button during a search.
Searches the Coverage results which match the search conditions, and which have been set in the
Coverage Search dialog box, from the cursor position toward the end (toward the bottom of the
display).
This button can be selected when in 1-byte display mode only.
It changes to the
button during a search.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
261
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Interrupt a search.
During a search, the
and
buttons change to the
Updates the window’s contents with the latest data.
Closes this window.
262
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
button.
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Coverage Search Dialog Box
(This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.)
General
Searches the coverage result.
This can be called only when in 1-byte mode display.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods when the current window is the Coverage window.
• In the main window
Select [View] → [Search…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and S keys in that order.
• In the Coverage window
button.
Click the
Press the shortcut keys CTRL + G .
Window
Figure 6-57. Coverage Search Dialog Box
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
263
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Functions
Searches for coverage results.
Unmapped areas are not searched.
Also, searches cannot be performed when there are unmapped areas between areas to be searched.
The Coverage Search dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Search data specification area
• Search condition specification area
• Search direction specification area
• Search range specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Search data specification area
The search conditions can be specified from these 8 check boxes. The meanings of the respective symbols
are as shown below.
Symbol
Meaning
No Use [.]
Nothing has been executed.
Read [R]
Read only
Write [W]
Write only
Read x Write [A]
Execute [X]
Read and write
Execute only
Execute x Read [$]
Execute and read
Execute x Write [#]
Execute and write
Execute x Read x
Write [%]
All execution, reading, and writing has been performed.
If multiple search conditions have been selected, whichever one of the conditions matches is searched (an
OR search).
264
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Search condition specification area
This is a check box which specifies whether to search the whole specified region or not when conducting a
search. With the default, only the portion remaining in the range is searched.
Searches the remaining portion of the range (default).
Searches the whole range.
(3) Search direction specification area
This area specifies the search direction.
There are two search directions, an upward search and a downward search.
Up:
Upward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the beginning (upward on
display).
Down:
Downward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the end (downward on
display).
(4) Search range specification area
This area specifies the address that is being searched for. Addresses can be specified using a symbol or
expression. The specification method is the same as in case of the Address Move dialog box. The default
radix during input of numerical values is hexadecimal.
Function buttons
Searches from the coverage results in accordance with the specified conditions.
For the search results, the frames that match are highlighted.
For continuous search, click this button again.
Sets the specified conditions as the searched conditions and closes this dialog box.
Interrupts a search.
During a search, the
button changes to the
button.
Closes the Coverage Search dialog box.
It changes to the
button during a search.
Opens the help window that explains this dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
265
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Coverage-Clear Dialog Box
(This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.)
General
Clears the coverage results.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Option] → [Coverage] → [Clear…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + O , O , and L keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-58. Coverage-Clear Dialog Box
Function
Clears the coverage measurement results in the specified address range.
It initializes the Coverage window and the contents in the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box.
The Coverage-Clear dialog box consists of the following area.
• Address specification area
The function of this area is explained below.
(1) Address specification area
This area specifies the addresses in the coverage results to be cleared. Addresses can also be specified
using symbols or an expression. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move
dialog box. The default radix during input of numerical values is hexadecimal.
266
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Clears the coverage results in the address range specified by the address specification area and
closes the dialog box.
Interrupts clearing the coverage results.
During the coverage result clear operation, the
button changes to the
button.
Closes this dialog box.
It changes to the
button during the coverage result clear operation.
Cancels the change and restores the original setting.
Opens the help window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
267
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Coverage-Condition Setting Dialog Box
(This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.)
General
Specifies the coverage efficiency measurement range.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Option] → [Coverage] → [Condition…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + O , O , and O keys in that order.
• Click the
button in the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box.
Window
Figure 6-59. Coverage-Condition Setting Dialog Box
(1) Select list display
area
(2) Address specification
area
(3) Function specification
area
(4) Coverage condition specification area
268
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Select list display area
• Address specification area
• Function specification area
• Coverage condition specification area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Select list display area
Displays the currently selected lists.
Selected lists can be added by the following two methods.
(a) When adding from the function list
<1> Specify the status conditions in the status condition specification area.
<2> Select the function to be added to the function specification area and click the
The specified function can be deleted from the list by using the
button.
button.
Note It is meaningless to select an instruction other than Execute.
(b) When specifying and adding an address
<1> Specify the status conditions in the status condition specification area.
<2> Input the address range to the address specification area and click the
The specified address range can be deleted from the list by using the
button.
button.
(2) Address specification area
This area is used to input the coverage efficiency address range conditions. Addresses can also be specified
by a symbol or expression. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog
box. The default radix during input of numerical values is hexadecimal.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
269
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Function specification area
This area is used to input the coverage efficiency address conditions in function units or to select the function
name from the drop-down list.
Function names registered to the load module file are displayed.
(4) Status condition specification area
This area selects the coverage efficiency status conditions. The selectable status conditions are as follows:
Status
Description
Execute
Proportion of program execution performed.
Read
Proportion of memory read performed.
Write
Proportion of memory write performed.
All
Proportion of either program execution, memory read or memory write performed.
Function buttons
Closes the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box.
Displays the coverage efficiency.
Opens the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box.
Cancels the changes and restores the original setting.
Opens the help window.
Clears the contents in the select list display area.
Deletes the function name or the address range specified in the select list display area from the
list.
Enters the function name specified in the function specification area or the address range
specified in the address specification area in the select list display area.
270
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Coverage-Efficiency View Dialog Box
(This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.)
General
Displays the coverage results in the range specified in the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box as coverage
efficiency.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Option] → [Coverage] → [Efficiency…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + O , O , and E keys in that order.
• Click the
button in the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box.
Window
Figure 6-60. Coverage-Efficiency View Dialog Box
(1) Coverage range display area
(2) Coverage efficiency display area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
271
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
The Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Coverage range display area
• Coverage efficiency display area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Coverage range display area
This area specifies the coverage efficiency measurement range.
The range specified in the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box is displayed in this area.
If specified by a function name, it is displayed as “Program name $ File name # Function name.”
(2) Coverage efficiency display area
This area displays the coverage efficiency.
The coverage efficiency shows what percentage of the measurement range the specified status (execute,
read, write) occupies.
272
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The status list is shown below.
Status
Description
X
Proportion of program execution performed.
W
Proportion of memory write performed.
R
Proportion of memory read performed.
All
Proportion of either program execution, memory read or memory write performed.
Function buttons
Closes the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box.
Sets the displayed contents of the coverage efficiency.
Opens the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box.
Opens the help window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
273
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Event Manager
General
This window displays, enables/disables and deletes various events.
Through manipulation in this window, the event conditions registered in the Event dialog box or Event Link dialog
box can be allocated to break events, trace events, snapshot events
events
Note 1
, DMM events
Note 2
, timer events
Note 1
, or stub
Note 3
.
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
Opening method
This window can be opened by one of the following methods:
• In the main window
Select [Event] → [Event Manager] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + N , and M keys in that order.
Click the
button from the toolbar.
• In the Source window
Moves the cursor to the source line in the source text display area where the event is set, or to the
disassemble line in case of the mix display mode, and carry out either of the following steps:
Select [View] → [Event?] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and E keys in that order.
• In the Assemble window
Moves the cursor to the line in the mnemonic display/change area where the event is set, and carry out either
of the following steps:
Select [View] → [Event?] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V , and E keys in that order.
• In the Event dialog box
Click the
button.
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + G .
• In the Set Other dialog box
Click the
button.
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + M .
274
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-61. Event Manager
In list display mode
(1) Event display area
In detailed display mode
(1) Event display area
(1) Event detail display area
Function
Displays, enables/disables, and deletes various events and manages event conditions for registering or setting
various event conditions (such as event link conditions, break event conditions, trace event conditions, snapshot event
conditions
Note 1
, DMM event conditions
Notes 1.
Note 2
, timer event conditions
Note 1
, and stub event conditions
Note 3
).
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
The Event Manager consists of the following areas.
• Event display area
• Event detail display area
The function of each area is explained below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
275
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Event display area
• In list display mode
• In detailed display mode
In the event display area, icons (event icons) for various types of event conditions of the registered event,
event link, break, trace, snapshot
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
, timer
Note 1
, and stub
Note 3
are displayed.
The icon of the event condition consists of a mark indicating the type of each event condition and an event
name.
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
Mark
Event name
The contents displayed in the event display area can be changed by the Event Info dialog box which is
opened by the [View] menu or the
button in the Event Manager.
The marks are listed below.
276
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Mark
Meaning
Indicates event condition
Indicates event link condition
Indicates break event
Indicates trace event
Indicates snapshot eventNote 1
Indicates DMM eventNote 2
M.
Indicates timer eventNote 1
Indicates stub eventNote 3
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
The color of the character displayed in a mark indicates the setting status of each event condition.
Character
Color in Mark
Corresponding Mark
Meaning
Red
Indicates that the event conditions using events and event
link conditions are valid.
,
,
,
,
M.
,
Indicates that each event condition is “enabled”. Each event
is generated when condition is satisfied.
,
Black
Indicates that the event conditions using events and event
link conditions are invalid.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
M.
,
,
,
,
Yellow
Indicates that an event is invalid. The event does not occur
even if the conditions are established.
M.
,
Indicates that the symbol specified in the event cannot be
recognized by the program that is currently loading, so it is
held pending.
,
In addition to the above function, this area also has the following four functions.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
277
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(a) Jump function
Jumps to the Source window, Assemble window, Memory window or Coverage window by using the
address condition of the selected icon as a jump pointer if the selected icon is the event condition. The
jump destination window displays the jump pointer at the beginning.
If the address condition is a range setting, the lower address becomes the jump pointer. If a mask is set,
the point address before the mask is executed becomes the jump pointer.
In the case of a bit setting, the address of the specified bit position becomes the jump pointer.
This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order.
<1> Select an icon (
).
<2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window.
• If the jump destination is the Source window
Select [Jump] → [SourceText] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + U .
• If the jump destination is the Assemble window
Select [Jump] → [Assemble] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + D .
• If the jump destination is the Memory window
Select [Jump] → [Memory] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + M .
• If the jump destination is the Coverage window
Note
Select [Jump] → [Coverage] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order.
Press shortcut keys CTRL + I .
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
(b) Open function
Opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected icon’s event. The contents of the selected
event are displayed in each setting dialog box that is opened.
This function is executed by performing one of the following operations.
<1> Double-click the icon.
<2> Select the icon, then click
278
.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(c) Enabled state switching function
Switches the state of the event corresponding to the selected icon between enabled and disabled.
Except for an event and event link, it is possible to operate break, trace, snapshot
1
, and stub
Note 3
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
, timer
Note
events by icons.
This function is executed by performing one of the following operations.
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
<1> Click the left button of the mouse when the mouse cursor is on the icon mark.
<2> Select an icon and click
or
, or press the GRPH + Enter keys.
If an event is in the enabled state, it becomes disabled (black), and if the event is in the disabled state, it
becomes enabled (red).
button is displayed when an icon in the disabled state is selected, and the
The
button is displayed when an icon in the enabled state is selected.
(d) Delete function
Deletes registration/set contents of the event condition of a selected icon.
Multiple icons can be selected using the SHIFT and CTRL keys.
To select all the icons, select [View] → [Select All Event] from the menu bar.
However, an event condition
and event link condition
condition is not used by other event condition (
,
,
can be deleted only when that event
,
M.
,
, or
). If the event
condition or event link condition has already been used for any other event, delete the event used.
This function is executed by performing one of the following operations.
<1> Select an icon and perform one of the following operations in the main window.
Select [Edit] → [Delete Event] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + E , and D keys in that order.
<2> Select an icon and perform one of the following operations in the Event Manager.
button.
Click
Press the DEL key.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
279
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Event detail display area
This area is displayed only when the detailed display mode is selected.
This area displays the detailed information corresponding to the icon of each event. This area displays the
contents of the status condition, access size condition, data condition, external sense data condition, and
pass count condition, in that order, by using the information of each key as a delimiter, when an event
condition is specified. The following tables show the correspondence between the information of each key
and the condition.
• Event condition
Key Information
Notes 1.
2.
Description
[S]
Status condition
[Z]
Access size condition
[A]
Address condition
[D]
Data condition
[E]
External sense data conditionNote 1
[M]
Mask condition
[P]
Pass count conditionNote 2
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Supported only in the ID78K4 (-NS)
• Event link condition
Key Information
[P1] to [P4]
Description
Event link condition of nth stage (n = 1 to 4)
[D]
Disable conditionNote
[P]
Pass count conditionNote
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
280
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
• Break condition
Key Information
[B]
Description
Break condition
• Trace condition
Key Information
• Timer condition
Description
[M]
Trace mode
[D]
Delay count
[Q]
Qualify trace condition
Note
Key Information
Description
[S]
Timer measurement start condition
[E]
Timer measurement end condition
[U]
Timer measurement unit
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
• Snapshot condition
Note
Key Information
Description
[SN]
Snapshot condition
[R]
Register condition
[B]
Register bank condition
[M]
Memory condition
[Z]
Access size condition
[F]
SFR condition
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
• DMM condition
Note
Key Information
[DM]
Description
DMM condition
[A]
Address condition
[D]
Data condition
[Z]
Data size condition
Note Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
281
CHAPTER 6
• Stub condition
WINDOW REFERENCE
Note
Key Information
Description
[SU]
Stub condition
[A]
Jump address
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
If the address condition of an event condition, a data condition, or the memory condition of a snapshot
condition is a symbol or an expression, the actual address is displayed within “( )”.
Function buttons
Opens the New Event dialog box.
In the New Event dialog box, by clicking each button, the setting dialog box for event, event
Note 1
link, break, trace, snapshot
Note 2
, DMM
, timer
Note 1
, and stub
Note3
events can be opened.
Each setting dialog box that is opened has the new event name set in it.
After each setting dialog box is opened, the New Event dialog box is closed.
is clicked or the ESC key is pressed, the New Event dialog box closes and
If
the screen returns to the Event Manager.
Opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the event condition selected in the event
display area. The event condition contents selected in the event display area are displayed in
the setting dialog box.
If the event condition has not been selected, or if multiple conditions are selected, this button
is dimmed and can no longer be clicked.
The Enter key also has the same operation.
Notes 1.
282
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Note 1
Note 2
Note 1
Note 3
Sets break, trace, snapshot
, DMM
, timer
, and stub
events in the enabled state.
The
button is displayed in place of the
button if one disabled event or
multiple events including only disabled events are selected.
Note 1
Note 2
Note 1
Sets break, trace, snapshot
, DMM
, timer
, and stub
The
button is displayed in place of the
Note 3
events in the disabled state.
button if one enabled event is
selected or multiple events including enabled events are selected.
If an event or an event link only is selected, this button is dimmed and it can no longer be
clicked.
Deletes the event condition selected in the event display area.
When deleting an event or event link, if that event is being used by a break, trace,
Note 1
Note 2
Note 1
Note 1
snapshot
, DMM
, timer
, stub
, or event link, it results in an error. The DEL key
also has the same operation.
Delete All
Deletes all the events whether they are enabled or disabled.
Opens the Event Info dialog box.
The
button rearranges events in name order and displays them.
The
button rearranges events by type and displays them.
The
button displays the events in the order in which they were entered without
rearranging them.
button sets the display mode to the detailed display mode.
The
The
button sets the display mode to the list display mode.
The
button or the ESC key closes the dialog box.
Closes the Event Manager.
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
283
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Software Break Manager
(This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-78K4-NS or IE-784000-R is used.)
General
This window displays, switches enable/disable, and deletes software breaks.
Opening method
This window can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Event] → [Software Break Manager] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + N , and M keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-62. Software Break Manager
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Event name display area
(2) Break mark display area
(4)
(3) Break point display area
(4) Address display area
Function
Displays, switches enable/disable, and deletes software breaks. Up to 100 software break events can be valid
simultaneously.
Note that the setting of the software break point is not performed in this window, but in the Source window or
Assemble window.
284
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The software break manager consists of the following areas.
• Event name display area
• Break mark display area
• Break point display area
• Address display area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Event name display area
This area consists of check boxes to indicate the registered event name and valid/invalid status of the event.
To change the event name, edit directly after clicking the name to be changed. The name will be determined
by pressing the return key. [Swb + number] is displayed in this area as the default.
To validate the event, check the check box (as the default, the check box is checked for a newly created
event).
Also, double-clicking the event name makes it possible to jump to the window where the event was created
(the Source window/Assemble window).
Remark
By clicking Name on the label, character strings of the displayed items are compared and
arranged in alphabetical order (ascending or descending can be switched by clicking).
(2) Break mark display area
This area displays the mark “>” for the software break event set at the current PC area to make it easy to
specify the software break event that has caused the break.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
285
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Break point display area
This area displays the location where the software break event is set in the following format.
File name # line number (when set in the Source window)
Symbol + offset (when set in the Assemble Text window)
Re-evaluating the event when redownloading symbols is performed based on the above.
Remark
By clicking File#Line/Symbol+Offset on the label, character strings of the displayed items are
compared and arranged in alphabetical order (ascending or descending can be switched by
clicking).
(4) Address display area
This area displays addresses where software break events are set.
Remark
By clicking Address on the label, values of the displayed items are compared and arranged in size
order (ascending or descending can be switched by clicking).
Function buttons
Validates the event selected.
Invalidates the event selected.
Deletes the event selected.
Delete All
Deletes all software break events set.
Closes the Software Break Manager window.
286
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Event Dialog Box
General
Registers and displays event conditions.
The event conditions created (registered) in this dialog box are automatically registered to the Event Manager.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Event] → [Event…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + N , and E keys in that order.
Click the
button on the toolbar.
• Execute one of the following operations in the Break, Trace, Snap Shot
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
, Timer
Note 1
, Stub
Note 3
, or
Event Link dialog boxes.
button.
Click the
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + E .
• Execute one of the following operations in the event setting area or the event manager area of the Break,
Note 1
Note 2
Trace, Snap Shot
, DMM
, Timer
Select the event condition and click
Note 1
Note 3
, Stub
.
, or Event Link dialog boxes.
Select the event condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O .
Double-click the event condition.
• In the Event Manager, execute one of the following operations.
.
Select an event condition and click
Double-click the event condition.
• Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or the Set Other dialog box.
Click the Event… button.
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + E .
• In the Source window
Move the cursor to the source line in the source text display area where the event is set, or to the disassemble
line in the mixed display mode, and execute one of the following operations.
Select [View] → [Event?] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V and E keys in that order.
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
287
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
• In the Assemble window
Move the cursor to the line of the mnemonic display/change area where the event is set and execute one of
the following operations.
Select [View] → [Event?] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + V and E keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-63. Event Dialog Box (1/2)
ID78K0S-NS, ID78K0-NS
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1) Event name setting area
(5) External sense data setting area
(2) Status select area
(6) In-range/out-of-range break select area
(3) Address setting area
(7) Event manager area
(4) Data setting area
288
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 6-63. Event Dialog Box (2/2)
ID78K0, ID78K4 (-NS)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Notes 1.
2.
(1) Event name setting area
(5) External sense data setting areaNote 1
(2) Status select area
(7) Event manager area
(3) Address setting area
(8) Access size select area
(4) Data setting area
(9) Pass count setting areaNote 2
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Not supported in the ID78K0
Function
This dialog box registers and displays event conditions.
Up to 256 conditions can be entered for event conditions. However, the number of event conditions which can be
Note 1
used simultaneously in enabled break, trace, snapshot
Note 2
, DMM
, timer
Note 1
, and stub
Note3
events is 8 execution
events (or one event link) and 4 access events.
When when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, the
number of event conditions that can be used simultaneously will increase by 8 for each.
In the IE-78K4-NS, four execution events and four access events can be used. In the IE-784000-R, three execution
events and seven access events can be used.
The number of event conditions that can be used simultaneously is up to the number of event conditions given
above, but a single event condition can be set in multiple break, trace, snapshot
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
, timer
Note 1
Note 3
, stub
, and
event link events.
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
289
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The Event dialog box has two modes, the normal mode and the select mode.
• Normal mode
button from the toolbar or [Event] → [Event…] from the menu bar in the main window is
When the
selected and the Event dialog box is opened, event conditions can be entered without restriction as to purpose.
This is the normal mode.
• Select mode
Note 1
button in the Break, Trace, Snap Shot
When the
Note 2
, DMM
, Timer
Note 1
, Stub
Note 3
, and Event Link
dialog boxes is clicked and the Event dialog box is opened, the event conditions used by these are selected.
This is the select mode.
is clicked, the event condition selected in the event name setting area of
In the select mode, when
the Event dialog box is set in the event condition setting area of the setting dialog box that originally called the
Event dialog box.
Even in the select mode, event conditions can be entered and displayed just as in the normal mode.
Depending on the mode, the title bar display on the dialog box will differ. Refer to the section entitled [Title Bar]
described later on.
The Event dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Event name setting area
• Status select area
• Access size select area
Note 1
• Address setting area
• Data setting area
• External sense data setting area
Note 2
• In-range/out-of-range break select area
Note 3
• Pass count setting area
Note 4
• Event manager area
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K0S-NS and ID78K0-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
3.
Not supported in the ID78K0 and ID78K4 (-NS)
4.
Supported only in the ID78K4
The function of each area is explained below.
290
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Event name setting area
This area sets an event name and selects an event condition.
When entering an event condition, it is necessary to set an event name. An event name may consist of up to
eight alphanumeric characters.
When displaying event conditions which have already been created, either type the name of the already
created event in the text box or select the event condition from the drop-down list in the event name setting
area.
Note that when moving to another event before completing an event setting, the data which was being set is
deleted.
In the select mode, the selected event condition can be set in the event condition setting area of the original
setting dialog box that called the Event dialog box.
mark on the left side of the event name setting area shows the use conditions of the event condition.
The
The relationship between the color of the character in the
Color of Character in
mark and the status is shown below.
Condition
Mark
That event condition is being used by break, trace, snapshotNote 1,
DMMNote 2, timerNote 1, stubNote 3, or event link and indicates that it is
Red
enabled.
Black
Indicates that that event condition has not been enabled.
Gray
Indicates that that event condition is currently being edited and that it
has not been entered.
Yellow
Indicates that that event is an event which is in the hold state. An
event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by the
event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to.
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
(2) Status select area
This area sets and selects a status condition.
By specifying the status condition, the distinction between the execution event and access event is decided at
the same time. If execution event is specified, the access size select area, the mask field of the address
setting area and the data setting area are dimmed and are in a state where input is impossible.
The status conditions that can be specified are shown below. It is possible to specify a status condition in
abbreviated form.
The input status condition is not case sensitive.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
291
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
[ID78K0 (-NS), ID78K0S (-NS)]
Status
Abbr.
Event Type
Execution event
Meaning
Execution
EX
Program execution
Before Execution
EX-B
R/W
RW
Read
R
Memory read
Write
W
Memory write
External Trigger1
Trigger-1
External Trigger (1 bit)
External Trigger2
Trigger-2
External Trigger (ID78K0-NS: 8 bits,
ID78K0S-NS: 16 bits)Note 2
Program execution (break before execution)Note 1
Access event
Memory read/write
Notes 1. Valid only for products with new packages (IE-78K0-NS with a control code D or later or the IE78K0-NS-A (IE-78K0S-NS-A)).
2. Valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE78K0S-NS-A is used.
[ID78K4 (-NS)]
Status
Abbr.
Event Type
Execution event
Meaning
Program exectuionNote
Execution
EX
Opcode Fetch
OP
R/W
RW
Read
R
Memory readNote
Write
W
Memory writeNote
R/W by Macro
RWM
Data read/write by macro service
Read by Macro
RM
Data read by macro service
Write by Macro
WM
Data write by macro service
R/W by Program
RWP
Data read/write by program
Read by Program
RP
Data read by program
Write by Program
WP
Data write by program
Vector Read
VECT
Vector read by interrupt
Access
AC
All access statuses
External Trigger1
Trigger-1
External trigger (1 bit)Note
Op code fetch (including prefetch)
Access event
Memory read/writeNote
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
In the ID78K0 (-NS) and ID78K0S-NS, two or more of External Trigger1 and External Trigger 2 can be
registered, but only one of them can be enabled.
Two or more of Before Execution can be registered but only 16 (15 in flash self-mode) of them can be
enabled. In addition, they cannot be used as other event conditions.
In the ID78K4 (-NS), an address range can be set for Execution. At this time, the start address must be an
even address and the end address must be an odd address.
If Op code Fetch is specified, an address other than those in the 1M space must not be set.
A value greater than 1 can be set as the Pass Count only when one event is used in the ID78K4-NS or when
two events are used in the ID78K4.
These areas are blank when the condition of a newly created event is set.
292
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Address setting area
This area sets an address condition.
The setting range is as shown below.
[ID78K0S-NS]
Setting range:
0 ≤ Address value ≤ 0xFFFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFFFF
[ID78K0 (-NS)]
(When a bank is not used)
Setting range:
0 ≤ Address value ≤ 0xFFFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFFFF
(When a bank is used)
Setting range:
0 ≤ Address value ≤ (n
Note
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ (n
<< 16)|0xFFFF
Note
<< 16)|0xFFFF
Note n is the maximum bank number used.
[ID78K4 (-NS)]
(Execution event)
Setting range:
0 ≤ Address value ≤ 0xFFFFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFFFFF
(Access event)
Setting range:
0 ≤ Address value ≤ 0xFFFFFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFFFFFF
Input the lower and higher addresses in that order.
The following three types of settings can be made when specifying an address condition.
<1> Point setting
Only the lower address or the same address value is set to the lower and higher addresses when a
point is set. Masks can be set.
<2> Range setting
A range is specified by the lower and higher addresses.
Note that if the same value is input for the lower address and the higher address, it is not handled as a
range setting. In this case, it becomes a point setting or a bit setting.
In the ID78K4 (-NS), an error occurs unless the start address is an even address and the end address
is an odd address.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
293
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
<3> Bit setting
For a bit setting, set a value in the lower address only, or set the same value in the lower address and
the higher address. Specify the value in the address.bit format. The value of the bit that shows the bit
position must be 0 ≤ bit ≤ 7.
For the address, it is possible to specify a symbol or an expression. The specification method is the
same as in the Address Move dialog box.
The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal.
This area is blank in the case of newly created event conditions.
(4) Data setting area
This area sets a data condition.
The setting range is as follows.
Access Size Condition
Setting Range
Byte
0 ≤ Data value ≤ 0xFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFF
WordNote
0 ≤ Data value ≤ 0xFFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFFF
Bit
Data value = 0, 1
Mask value = Cannot be specified
Note Supported only in the ID78K4 (-NS)
If the data condition setting has been omitted, data condition detection is not performed.
For a newly created event condition, the address value and the mask value input columns are both blank.
There are two types of data conditions: Data, which sets the data value, and Mask, which inputs the mask
value of the data value.
How to set each of these types is explained below.
(a) Data
Set a data value.
A data value can also be specified by a symbol or expression. The specification method is the same as in
the case of the Symbol To Address dialog box, but the default radix when numerical values are input is
hexadecimal.
294
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(b) Mask
Set a mask value for the data value.
When mask setting is made, for a bit with a mask value of 1, it doesn’t matter if the data value is 0 or 1.
Example 1. Data:
Mask:
0x4000
0xFF
In this kind of setting, the conditions match when the data value is 0x4000 to 0x40FF.
2. Data:
Mask:
0x4000
0x101
In this kind of setting, when the data is 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101, the
conditions are matched.
If the mask value setting is omitted, masking is not executed.
The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal.
(5) External sense data setting area
This area sets the external sense data condition.
Setting range: 0 ≤ Data value ≤ 0xFFFF
0 ≤ Mask value ≤ 0xFFFE
The external sense data condition enables the input pin level of the external sense clip attached to the
emulation probe connected to the in-circuit emulator to be a search condition.
The correspondence between the external sense data and the external sense clip is as follows.
[ID78K0 (-NS), ID78K0S-NS]
External Sense Data Display
External Sense Clip Number
bit 15
NO.16
bit 14
NO.15
bit 13
NO.14
bit 12
NO.13
bit 11
NO.12
bit 10
NO.11
bit 9
NO.10
bit 8
NO.9
bit 7
NO.8
bit 6
NO.7
bit 5
NO.6
bit 4
NO.5
bit 3
NO.4
bit 2
NO.3
bit 1
NO.2
bit 0
NO.1
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
295
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
[ID78K4]
External Sense Data Display
External Sense Clip Number
bit 7
NO.8
bit 6
NO.7
bit 5
NO.6
bit 4
NO.5
The input pin level of the external sense clip is set to 1 for high level and 0 for low level.
There are two types of external sense data conditions: Ext Probe, which sets the external sense data value,
and Mask, which sets the mask value of the external sense data value.
The setting method is shown below.
(a) Ext Probe
Specify the external sense data value.
The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal.
(b) Mask
Set a mask value for the external sense data value.
When mask setting is made, for a bit with a mask value of 1, it doesn’t matter if the data value is 0 or 1.
Example 1. Data:
0x8
Mask:
0x7
In this kind of setting, the conditions match when the data value is 0x8 to 0xF.
2. Data:
0x8
Mask:
0x5
In this kind of setting, when the data is 0x8, 0x9, 0xC, and 0xD, the conditions are
matched.
If the mask value setting is omitted, masking is not executed.
The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal.
When the debugger uses the external sense data condition for event detection of the bank address, those
bits cannot be accessed
Note
.
If the number of bits in the bank port is equal to or more than the maximum number of the external sense
data condition, the external sense data condition and mask value are dimmed and cannot be input
Note
.
If less than the maximum, the unused bits of the external sense data condition can be set arbitrarily.
At this time, setting bits that are being used by the debugger will cause an error
Note
.
If the external sense data condition setting is omitted, the external sense data condition is not detected.
The data value and mask value text boxes are blank in the case of newly created event conditions.
Note These specifications do not apply to the ID78K4.
296
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(6) In-range/out-of-range break select area (ID78K0S-NS, ID78K0-NS)
This area selects the break condition (in-range/out-of-range).
In range:
Break within the range (default)
Out range:
Break out of the range
This area selects whether the break occurs within the specified address range or not. This can be selected
only when R/W, Read, Write, or Before Execution is specified for the status.
(7) Event manager area
This area displays a list of each of the entered events, event links, breaks, trace, snapshots
Note 1
, timer
Note 1
, and
Note 2
events.
stub
By selecting an event and clicking
, or by double-clicking the event, a setting dialog box opens
corresponding to the selected event and the event setting contents can be displayed.
When the focus is on the event manager area, select the event icon and click
, or press the
DEL key to delete the selected event.
, it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing.
By clicking
Notes 1.
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Supported only in the ID78K4
(8) Access size select area (ID78K0 and ID78K4 (-NS))
This area sets or selects the access size condition.
By specifying an access size condition, the access width of the data condition to be detected by the access
event is determined.
The access size conditions that can be specified are shown below. An access size condition can also be
specified in an abbreviated form. The uppercase and lowercase characters of the input access size condition
are not distinguished.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
297
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Access Size
Abbreviation
Form
Description
Byte
B
Detection is carried out with an 8-bit width as the data condition.
Detection is carried out only during 8-bit access.
Word
W
Detection is carried out with a 16-bit width as the data condition.
Detection is carried out only during 16-bit access.
No Condition
NC
An access-size search is not executed
Bit
1
Detection is carried out with a 1-bit width as the data condition.
Detection is carried out only during 8-bit access.
(9) Pass count setting area (ID78K4 (-NS) only)
This area sets a pass count condition.
[ID78K4]
Setting range: 1 ≤ Pass count value ≤ 32,767
[ID78K4-NS]
Setting range: 1 ≤ Pass count value ≤ 255
This area sets the condition that is to be satisfied if an event condition (address condition, status condition,
access size condition, data condition, or external sense data condition) has been satisfied a given number of
times during user program execution.
If the pass count is set to 1, the condition is satisfied as soon as the event condition has been satisfied.
If the pass count is set to 2 or more, the number of events that can be simultaneously enabled is up to two,
with event conditions and event link conditions combined. In the ID78K4, an event condition for which the
pass count is set to 2 or more cannot be used as an event link condition.
If the pass count condition setting is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.
The pass count is also assumed to be 1 when there is a newly created event condition.
Function buttons
Closes the Event dialog box.
(Normal mode)
If there is an event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically and
the dialog box is closed.
Sets the displayed event as the event condition of the original dialog box that
(Select mode)
called the Event dialog box and returns to the original setting dialog box.
If the Event dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal
mode only and the Event dialog box does not close. In other cases, it closes.
If there is an event condition being edited, enter/select is performed automatically
and the program returns to the original setting dialog box.
298
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Newly creates an event condition.
An event name is generated automatically and a newly created event condition is
prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the event condition using the
or the
button.
Enters an event condition.
When a new event condition has been created or when the contents of an event
condition have been changed, be sure to enter the event condition using this
button. The entered event condition is reflected in the Event Manager.
If event conditions that have already been entered are displayed, they cannot be
selected.
Clears the contents of an event condition.
If an event condition is entered but not edited, the
button is displayed
in place of this button.
Returns the contents of an event condition to the original contents.
If an event condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area is made
blank except the event name, or the settings return to the default settings.
If an event condition is being edited, the
button is displayed in place
of this button.
Closes the Event dialog box.
(Normal mode)
If an event condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the
button becomes this button.
Even if there is an event condition that is being edited, the dialog box closes
without the event condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Closes the Event dialog box.
(Normal mode)
If an event condition is not being created/changed/deleted, the
button
becomes this button.
Even if an event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the event
condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Returns to the original setting dialog box that called the Event dialog box without
(Select mode)
an event condition being selected.
If an event condition is not being created/changed/deleted, the
button becomes this button.
If the Event dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal
mode only, and the Event dialog box does not close. In other cases, the Event
dialog box closes.
Even if an event condition is being edited, it is not entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
299
CHAPTER 6
(Select mode)
WINDOW REFERENCE
Returns to the original setting dialog box without selecting the event condition.
If an event condition has been edited/changed/deleted, the
button
becomes this button.
If the Event dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal
mode only, and the Event dialog box does not close. In other cases, the Event
dialog box closes.
Even if an event condition is being edited, it is not entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Opens the help window.
Opens the Event Link dialog box.
Opens the Break dialog box.
Opens the Trace dialog box.
Note 1
Opens the Snap Shot dialog box.
DMM…
Note 2
Opens the DMM dialog box.
Note 1
Opens the Timer dialog box.
Note 3
Opens the Stub dialog box,
Opens the Event Manager.
Expand
Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of
the
button.
Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the
Expand
button.
Opens the setting dialog boxes and displays the event, event link, break, trace,
snapshot
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
, timer
Note 1
, or stub
Note 3
manager area.
Notes 1.
300
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
conditions selected in the event
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Deletes the event, event link, break, trace, snapshot
stub
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
, DMM
, timer
Note 2
, or
conditions selected in the event manager area.
Opens the Event Info dialog box.
The
button rearranges events in name order and displays them.
The
button rearranges the events in order by type and displays them.
The
button displays the events in the order in which they were
entered without rearranging them.
button changes the event manager area to the detailed display
The
mode.
The
button changes the event manager area to the list display mode.
The
button or the ESC key closes the dialog box.
Notes 1.
Supported only in the ID78K4
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
3.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
301
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Title bar
In the normal mode, [Event] is displayed as the title in the title bar.
Title bar
Event
In the select mode, the title in the title bar becomes as follows in accordance with the original setting dialog box
that called the Event dialog box.
Title Bar
Event – Break
Break dialog box
Event – Trace
Trace dialog box
Event – Snap Shot
Snap Shot dialog boxNote 1
Event – DMM
DMM dialog boxNote 2
Event – Timer
Timer dialog boxNote 1
Event – Stub
Stub dialog boxNote 3
Event – Event Link
Event Link dialog box
Event – Event Link – Break
Event Link dialog box
(While in the Break dialog box select mode)
Event – Event Link – Trace
Event Link dialog box
(While in the Trace dialog box select mode)
Event – Event Link – Snap ShotNote 1
Event Link dialog box
(While in the Snap Shot dialog box select mode)
Event – Event Link – TimerNote 1
Event Link dialog box
(While in the Timer dialog box select mode)
Event – Event Link – StubNote 3
Event Link dialog box
(While in the Stub dialog box select mode)
Notes 1.
302
Original Setting Dialog Box
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Event Link Dialog Box
General
Registers and displays event link conditions.
The event link conditions created (registered) in this dialog box are automatically registered to the Event Manager.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Event] → [EventLink…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + N , and L keys in that order.
• In the Event dialog box
Click the
button.
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + L .
• Execute one of the following operations in the Break dialog box.
button.
Click the
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + L .
• Execute one of the following operations in the event setting area or the event manager area of the Event,
Break, Trace, Snap Shot
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
, Timer
Note 1
, or Stub
Note 3
dialog boxes.
.
Select the event link condition and click
Select the event link condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O .
Double-click the event link condition.
• In the Event Manager, execute one of the following operations.
.
Select an event link condition and click
Double-click the event link condition.
• Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or the Set Other dialog box.
button.
Click the
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + L .
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
303
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-64. Event Link Dialog Box
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(1) Event link name setting area
(2) Link condition setting area
(3) Disable condition setting areaNote
(4) Pass count setting areaNote
(5) Event manager area
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
Function
Registers and displays event link conditions.
If the event link conditions are satisfied, an event occurs only if the user program is executed in the specified order
of the event conditions that have been set.
Up to 256 event link conditions can be registered.
However, the number of event link conditions which can be used simultaneously is 1.
The Event Link dialog box has two modes, the normal mode and the select mode.
• Normal mode
When [Event] → [Event Link…] from the menu bar in the main window is selected and the Event Link dialog
box is opened, event link conditions can be entered without restriction as to purpose. This is the normal mode.
304
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
• Select mode
in the Break dialog box is clicked and the Event Link dialog box is opened, the event
When
conditions used by these are selected. This is the select mode.
In the select mode, when
is clicked, the event link condition selected in the event link name
setting area of the Event Link dialog box is set in the event condition setting area of the setting dialog box that
originally called the Event Link dialog box.
Even in the select mode, event conditions can be entered and displayed just as in the normal mode.
Depending on the mode, the title bar display on the dialog box will differ. Refer to the section entitled [Title Bar]
described later.
The Event Link dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Event link name setting area
• Link condition setting area
• Disable condition setting area
• Pass count setting area
Note
Note
• Event manager area
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Event link name setting area
This area sets event link names and selects event link conditions.
When entering an event link condition, it is necessary to set an event link name.
An event link name may consist of up to eight alphanumeric characters.
When displaying event link conditions which have already been created, either type the event link name of
the already created event link condition in the text box or select the event link condition from the drop-down
list in the event link name setting area.
In the select mode, the selected event link condition can be set in the event link condition setting area of the
original setting dialog box that called the Event Link dialog box.
mark on the left side of the event link name setting area shows the use conditions of the event link
The
condition.
The relationship between the color of the character in the
Color of Character in
Red
mark and the status is shown below.
Condition
Mark
Indicates that that event link condition is being used and that it is
enabled.
Black
Indicates that that event link condition has not been enabled.
Gray
Indicates that that event link condition is currently being edited and
that it has not been entered.
Yellow
Indicates that that event is an event which is in the hold state. An
event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by the
event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
305
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Link condition setting area
This area sets the sequence of event detection as a link condition.
Event conditions are set in four steps, from Phase 1 to Phase 4. Event conditions need not be set up to
Phase 4. If Phase 4 is not set, an event occurs when the event condition set to the last Phase is detected.
Event conditions can be set in only Phase 1, and same event conditions can be set in two or more Phases.
The number of event conditions that can be set to each Phase in the link condition setting area is up to 1
Note 1
.
Also, the only type of event condition that can be set to each Phase in the link condition setting area is on
execution event
Notes 1.
2.
Note 2
.
Up to 10 event conditions can be set in the ID78K4.
An event condition for which the pass count is set to 1 or an access event condition can be set in
the ID78K4.
To set an event condition, use one of the following methods.
• Click
and open the Event dialog box in the “Select mode”, then select the event conditions to
be set.
• In the event manager area, select one (or more than one) event condition, then click
or set it
by a drag-and-drop operation.
Setting of an event condition by a drag-and-drop operation is possible even from outside the Event Link
dialog box’s event manager area; event conditions can be set from the event manager area of each setting
dialog box and from the Event Manager.
When the focus is on each Phase of the link condition setting area, click
to delete the event
condition selected in the Phase which was focused on.
It can also be deleted by pressing the DEL key.
Each Phase of the link condition setting area and the event conditions in the disable condition setting area
can be copied mutually or moved by drag-and-drop. The contents are shown below.
• If an event condition is dropped only by the mouse, it is moved.
• If it is dropped while pressing the SHIFT key, the event condition is moved.
• If it is dropped while pressing the CTRL key, the event condition is copied.
Selecting only one event condition in the link condition setting area and clicking
clicking it opens the Event dialog box and displays the contents of the event condition.
306
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
or double-
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Disable condition setting area (ID78K4 only)
This area sets an event condition that invalidates the event condition that has been satisfied.
The number of event conditions that can be set in the disable condition setting area is up to 10, with both
execution events and access events combined.
Set an event condition with a pass count set to 1. An event condition with a pass count set to 2 or more
cannot be set.
Click the Add Event… button and open the Event dialog box in the “select mode,” then select the event
conditions to be set.
Or, select an event condition in the event manager area and click the Add button or set it by a drag-anddrop operation.
Setting of an event condition by drag-and-drop is possible even from outside the Event Link dialog box’s
event manager area; event conditions can be set from the event manager area of each setting dialog box and
from the Event Manager.
When the focus is on the disable condition setting area, click the Remove button to delete the selected
event condition.
It can also be deleted by pressing the DEL key.
Each Phase of the disable condition setting area and the link condition setting area can be copied manually
or moved by drag-and-drop as follows:
• If an event condition is dropped only by the mouse, it is moved.
• If it is dropped while pressing the SHIFT key, the event condition is moved.
• If it is dropped while pressing the CTRL key, the event condition is copied.
Selecting only one event condition in the disable condition setting area and clicking the Open button opens
the Event dialog box and displays the contents of the event condition.
The disable condition setting area is blank when there is a newly created event condition.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
307
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(4) Pass count setting area (ID78K4 only)
This area sets a pass count condition.
Setting range: 1 ≤ Pass count value ≤ 32,767
This area sets the condition that is to be satisfied if an event link condition has been satisfied a given number
of times while the user program is executed.
If the pass count is set to 1, the condition is satisfied as soon as the event link condition has been satisfied.
If the pass count is set to 2 or more, the number of events that can be simultaneously enabled is up to two,
with event conditions and event link conditions combined.
If a value is directly input to the text box, 1 is assumed.
The pass count is also assumed to be 1 when there is a newly created event link condition.
(5) Event manager area
This area displays a list of each of the entered events, event links, breaks, traces, snapshots
and Stub
Note 2
Note 1
, timer
Note 1
,
events.
An event condition that is displayed in the event manager area can be set in the link condition setting area or
disable condition setting area by clicking
.
By dragging it from the event manager area in the Event Link dialog box, it can be set in the event setting
area in each setting dialog box for break, trace, snapshot, and timer.
When the focus is on the event manager area, select the event icon and click
DEL key to delete the selected event.
Also, when the focus is on the event manager area, select one event icon, then click
, or press the
, or double-
click the event icon to open the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event and display the event’s
setting contents.
By clicking
Notes 1.
2.
308
, it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Closes the Event Link dialog box.
(Normal mode)
If there is an event link condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically
and the dialog box is closed.
Sets the displayed event as the event link condition in the original dialog box that
(Select mode)
called the Event Link dialog box.
If the Event Link dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal
mode only and the Event Link dialog box does not close. In other cases, it closes.
If there is an event link condition being edited, enter/select is performed
automatically and the program returns to the original setting dialog box.
Newly creates an event link condition.
An event name is generated automatically and a newly created event link
condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the event link condition
or the
using the
button.
Enters an event link condition.
When a new event link condition has been created or when the contents of an
event link condition have been changed, be sure to enter the event link condition
using this button. The entered event link condition is reflected in the Event
Manager.
If event link conditions that have already been entered are displayed, they cannot
be selected.
Clears the contents of an event link condition.
button is
If an event link condition is entered but not edited, the
displayed in place of this button.
Returns the contents of an event link condition to the original contents.
If an event link condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area is
made blank except the event link name, or the settings return to the default
settings.
If an event link condition is being edited, the
button is displayed in
place of this button.
Closes the Event Link dialog box.
(Normal mode)
If an event link condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the
button becomes this button.
Even if there is an event link condition that is being edited, the dialog box closes
without the event link condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
309
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Closes the Event Link dialog box.
(Normal mode)
If an event link condition is not being created/changed/deleted, this button is
displayed.
Even if an event link condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the
event link condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Returns to the original setting dialog box that called the Event Link dialog box
(Select mode)
without an event link condition being selected.
If an event link condition is not being created/changed/deleted, the
button becomes this button.
If the Event Link dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal
mode only, and the Event Link dialog box does not close. In other cases, the
Event Link dialog box closes.
Even if an event link condition is being edited, it is not entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Returns to the original setting dialog box without selecting the event link condition.
(Select mode)
If an event link condition has been created/changed/deleted, the
button becomes this button.
If the Event Link dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal
mode only, and the Event Link dialog box does not close. In other cases, the
Event Link dialog box closes.
Even if an event link condition is being edited, it is not entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Opens the help window.
Opens the select mode in the Event dialog box and makes additional settings in
the link condition setting area or disable condition setting area. The area where
additional settings are made becomes the selected area when
is
clicked.
Opens each setting dialog box for the event selected in the link condition setting
area, disable condition setting area or event manager area and displays the
contents.
If an event is not selected, or if multiple events are selected, selection cannot be
made.
The operation is the same as double-clicking the event icon.
Deletes the event selected in the link condition setting area, disable condition
setting area or event manager area.
The same operation is performed by pressing the DEL key.
310
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
Expand
WINDOW REFERENCE
Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of
the
button.
Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the
Expand
button.
Adds an event condition or event link condition selected in the event manager
area to the link condition setting area or disable condition setting area and sets it.
The area where it is added becomes the selected area when
is
clicked.
Opens the Event Info dialog box.
The
The
button rearranges events in name order and displays them.
button rearranges the events in order by type and displays
them.
The
button displays the events in the order in which they were
entered without rearranging them.
The
button changes the event manager area to the detailed display
mode.
The
button changes the event manager area to the list display
mode.
The
button or the ESC key closes the dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
311
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
This opens the Set Other dialog box.
Clicking each button opens the Event Manager and the Event, Break, Trace, Snap
Shot
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
, Timer
Note 1
, or Stub
Note 3
dialog box, and closes the dialog box.
Close the dialog box by clicking
or
and return to the
Event Link dialog box.
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
Title bar
In the normal mode, [Event Link] is displayed as the title in the title bar.
Title bar
Event Link
In the select mode, the title in the title bar becomes as follows in accordance with the original setting dialog box
that called the Event Link dialog box.
Title Bar
Event Link – Break
Break dialog box
Event Link – Trace
Trace dialog box
Event Link – Snap Shot
Snap Shot dialog boxNote 1
Event Link – DMM
DMM dialog boxNote 2
Event Link – Timer
Timer dialog boxNote 1
Event Link – Stub
Stub dialog boxNote 3
Notes 1.
312
Original Setting Dialog Box
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Break Dialog Box
General
Registers, sets, and displays break event conditions.
The break event conditions registered in this dialog box are automatically registered to the Event Manager.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Event] → [Break…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + N , and B keys in that order.
Click the
button on the toolbar.
• In the Event dialog box
button.
Click the
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + B .
• Execute one of the following operations in the event manager area in the Event, Event Link, Trace, Snap
Note 1
Note 2
Note 1
Note 3
Shot
, DMM
, Timer
, or Stub
dialog box.
Select the break event condition and click
.
Select the break event condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O .
Double-click the break event condition.
• In the Event Manager, execute one of the following operations.
.
Select an break event condition and click
Double-click the break event condition.
• Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or the Set Other dialog box.
Click the
button.
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + B .
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
313
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-65. Break Dialog Box
When event manager area is displayed
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Break event name setting area
(3) Event manager area
(2) Break condition setting area
Function
Registers, sets, and displays break event conditions.
Up to 256 break event conditions can be entered. However, when the IE-78K0-NS is used, the number of break
event conditions that can be used simultaneously is 12, when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the
IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, this number is 28, when the IE-784000-R is used, this number is 10, and
when IE-78K4-NS is used, this number is 8.
Break event conditions become valid automatically when they are entered. However, if the number of break event
conditions exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, or if the number of event conditions or event link
conditions in use exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, the break event conditions are entered in the
disabled state. Also, in this case, a break event condition cannot be enabled.
Note that if [Run] → [Ignore Break Point] is selected, the break event condition will not operate even if it is enabled.
The Break dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Break event name setting area
• Break condition setting area
• Event manager area
The function of each area is explained below.
314
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Break event name setting area
This area sets break event names and selects break event conditions. When entering an event condition, it is
necessary to set a break event name. Break event names of up to 8 alphanumeric characters can be set.
When displaying break event conditions which have already been created, either type the break event name
of the already created break event condition in the text box or select the break event condition from the dropdown list in the break event name setting area.
Clicking the
mark in the break event name setting area switches between enabling or disabling the break
event condition.
The relationship between the color of the character in the
Color of Character in
mark and the status is shown below.
Mark
Condition
Red
Indicates that the break event condition has been enabled.
A break event occurs if the condition is satisfied.
Black
Indicates that the break event condition has not been enabled.
No break event occurs if the condition is satisfied.
Gray
Indicates that the break event condition is currently being edited and
that it has not been entered.
Yellow
Indicates that the break event is an event which is in the hold state.
An event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by
the event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to.
(2) Break condition setting area
This area sets an event condition for a break.
The number of event conditions that can be set in the break condition setting area is 12 when the IE-78K0-NS
is used (8 execution events and 4 access events), 28 when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS
or the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used (16 execution events and 12 access events), 10 when the IE784000-R is used, and 8 when the IE-78K4-NS is used.
Also, the number of event link conditions that can be used simultaneously is up to 2, as long as the number of
event conditions in use does not exceed the number of event conditions that can be used simultaneously.
Carry out setting of the disable conditions by one of the following methods.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
315
CHAPTER 6
• Click
WINDOW REFERENCE
and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition
which is to be set.
• Click
and open the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, then select the event link
condition which is to be set.
• Select an event link condition in the event manager area and click
, or make the setting by a
drag-and-drop operation.
When setting the event condition or event link condition by a drag-and-drop operation, besides the event
manager area in the Break dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager
in each setting dialog box.
When the focus is on the break condition setting area, clicking
deletes the selected event
condition or event link condition.
It can also be deleted by DEL key.
If only one event condition or event link condition in the break condition setting area is selected and
is clicked or the item is double-clicked, the Event dialog box or Event Link dialog box is opened
and the event condition or event link condition contents are displayed.
(3) Event manager area
This area displays a list of each of the entered events, event link, break, trace, snapshot
timer
Note 1
, and stub
Note 3
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
,
events.
An event or event link condition that is displayed in the event manager area can be set in the break condition
setting area by clicking
.
Also, event conditions or event link conditions in the event manager area can be dragged directly to the break
condition setting area.
When the focus is on the event manager area, select the event icon and click
DEL key to delete the selected event.
, or press the
Also, when the focus is on the event manager area, select one event icon, then click
, or
double-click the event icon to open the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event and display the
event’s setting contents.
By clicking
Notes 1.
316
, it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Closes the Break dialog box.
If there is a break event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically
and the dialog box is closed.
A break event conditions are enabled as soon as it is entered.
Newly creates a break event condition.
A break event name is generated automatically and a newly created break event
condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the break event condition
or the
using the
button.
Enters the break event condition.
This button is displayed when a new break event condition is created or when the
contents of a break event condition have been changed. In this case, be sure to
enter the break event condition.
If a break event condition that has already been entered is displayed, this button
button or the
button.
changes to either the
A break event condition is enabled as soon as it is entered.
Enables a break event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a break event condition is in the disabled
state.
button or the
It changes to either the
button.
Disables a break event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a break event condition is in the enabled
state.
button or the
It changes to either the
button.
Clears the contents of a break event condition.
If a break event condition is entered but not edited, this button is displayed. It
changes to the
button.
Restores the break event condition to its original contents.
If a break event condition that has not been entered is displayed, the display area
is restored to the blank state except for the break event name.
This button is displayed in the case where a break event condition is being edited.
It changes to the
button.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
317
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Closes this dialog box.
If a break event condition is not being created/changed/deleted, this button is
displayed.
Even if a break event condition is being edited, this dialog box is closed without
entering the condition.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Closes this dialog box.
If a break event condition has being created/changed/deleted, the
button becomes this button.
Even if a break event condition is being edited, this dialog box is closed without
entering the condition.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Opens the help window.
Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode and selects the set event
condition.
Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode and selects the set event link
condition.
Displays the contents of an event selected in the break condition setting area or
the event manager area by opening each setting dialog box. Its operation is the
same as double-clicking the event icon.
When the event icon is not selected, or if multiple icons have been selected, this
button is disabled.
Deletes an event selected in the break condition setting area or the event
manager area.
Pressing the DEL key performs the same operation.
Expand
Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of
the
button.
Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the
Expand
button.
Adds the event condition or event link condition selected in the event manager
area to the break condition setting area.
An event other than an event condition or an event link condition cannot be added.
318
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Opens the Event Info dialog box.
The
button rearranges events in name order and displays them.
button rearranges the events in order by type and displays
The
them.
button displays the events in the order in which they were
The
entered without rearranging them.
button changes the event manager area to the detailed display
The
mode.
button changes the event manager area to the list display
The
mode.
button or the ESC key closes the dialog box.
The
Opens the Set Other dialog box.
Clicking each button opens the Event Manager and the Event, Event Link, Trace,
Snap Shot
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
, Timer
Note 1
, or Stub
Note 3
dialog box, and closes the dialog
box.
Close the dialog box by clicking
or
and return to the
Break dialog box.
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
319
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace Dialog Box
General
Registers, sets, and displays trace event conditions.
The trace event conditions registered in this dialog box are automatically registered to the Event Manager.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Event] → [Trace…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + N , and T keys in that order.
Click the
button on the toolbar.
• In the Event dialog box
button.
Click the
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + T .
• Execute one of the following operations in the event manager area in the Event, Event Link, Break, Snap
Shot
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
, Timer
Note 1
, or Stub
Note 3
dialog box.
button.
Select the trace event condition and click the
Select the trace event condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O .
Double-click the trace event condition.
• Execute one of the following operations in the Event Manager.
Select the trace event condition and click the
button.
Double-click the trace event condition.
• Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or Set Other dialog box.
Click the
button.
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + T .
Notes 1.
320
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-66. Trace Dialog Box
(1)
(4)
(5)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(1) Trace event name setting area
(4) Trace end condition setting area
Note
(2) Delay trigger condition setting area
(5) Qualify trace condition setting area
(3) Trace start condition setting area
(6) Event manager area
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
Function
Sets various types of trace operations, and registers, sets and displays trace event conditions.
The trace operation settings shown in (a) and (b) below can be executed.
(a) Operation when trace data is written to entire trace memory
The trace frame makes a scan of the trace memory and when it arrives at the oldest frame, it continues the
trace operation and overwrites the oldest trace frame.
(b) Setting trace event conditions
The following three types of trace event conditions can be set when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-784000-R is used,
• Section trace start event condition
• Section trace end event condition
• Qualify event condition
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
321
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The following event condition can be set only when the IE-784000-R is used.
• Delay trigger event condition
Up to 256 trace event conditions can be entered. However, the number of trace event conditions that can be
used simultaneously is 1
Note
.
Trace event conditions become valid automatically when they are entered. However, if an enabled trace
event condition already exists, or if the number of event conditions or event link conditions in use exceeds the
number that can be used simultaneously, the trace event conditions are entered in the disabled state. Also, in
this case, a trace event condition cannot be enabled.
A trace is performed only when the tracer is in the enabled state. Set it by the procedure shown below.
Note Ten trace event conditions can be used in the ID78K4.
• When performing a trace or a qualify trace, select [Run] → [Cond. Trace ON], and in other cases, select
[Run] → [Uncond. Trace ON].
During emulation, in order to stop the currently operating tracer, select [Run] → [Tracer Stop] from the menu
bar. Also, during emulation, in order to run the currently stopped tracer, select [Run] → [Tracer Start] from the
menu bar. These two menus toggle and their display changes according to the current tracer state.
Note, however, that this operation is valid only when [Run] → [Ignore Break Point] is selected and executed.
This dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Trace event name setting area
• Delay trigger condition setting area
Note
• Trace start condition setting area
• Trace end condition setting area
• Qualify trace condition setting area
• Event manager area
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Trace event name setting area
This area sets trace event names and selects trace event conditions.
When entering a trace event condition, it is necessary to set a trace event name.
Trace event names that can be set must be of 8 alphanumeric characters or less.
When displaying trace event conditions which have already been created, either type the trace event name of
the already created trace event condition in the text box or select one from the drop-down list in the trace
event name setting area.
322
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
Clicking the
WINDOW REFERENCE
mark in the trace event name setting area switches between enabling or disabling the trace
event condition.
The relationship between the color of the character in the
Color of Character in
mark and the status is shown below.
Condition
Mark
Red
Indicates that the trace event condition has been enabled.
A trace event occurs if the condition is satisfied.
Black
Indicates that the trace event condition has not been enabled.
No trace event occurs if the condition is satisfied.
Gray
Indicates that the trace event condition is currently being edited and
that it has not been entered.
Yellow
Indicates that the trace event is an event which is in the hold state.
An event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by
the event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to.
(2) Delay trigger condition setting area (ID78K4 only)
This area sets the delay trigger event condition.
It is blank in the case of newly created event conditions.
The number of event conditions that can be set in the delay trigger condition setting area is up to 10 (3
execution events and 7 access events).
(3) Trace start condition setting area
This area sets an event condition for starting a trace.
In the ID78K0-NS, ID78K0S-NS, the number of event conditions that can be set in the trace start condition
setting area is 16 (8 execution events and 8 access events).
In the ID78K4, up to 10 event conditions (3 execution events and 7 access events) can be set. The number of
event link conditions that can be set is 2.
In the ID78K4-NS, the number of event conditions that can be set is 1.
Carry out setting of the trace start conditions by one of the following methods.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
323
CHAPTER 6
• Click
WINDOW REFERENCE
and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition
which is to be set.
• Click
and open the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, then select the event link
condition which is to be set.
• Select one or more event condition or event link condition in the event manager area and click
, or make the setting by drag-and-drop.
When setting the event condition or event link condition by drag-and-drop, besides the event manager area in
the Trace dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager in each setting
dialog box.
When the focus is on the trace start condition setting area, click the
DEL key to delete the selected event condition or event link condition.
button, or press the
It is possible to move and copy event conditions and event link conditions in the trace start condition setting
area back and forth among the different setting areas in the Trace dialog box by drag-and-drop operations, as
shown below.
• If an event condition or event link condition is dropped only by the mouse, it is moved.
• If it is dropped while pressing the SHIFT key, the event condition or event link condition is moved.
• If it is dropped while pressing the CTRL key, the event condition or event link condition is copied.
Selecting an event condition or event link condition in the trace start condition setting area and clicking
or double-clicking it opens the Event dialog box or Event Link dialog box and displays the
contents of the event condition or event link condition.
The trace start condition setting area is left blank when there is a newly created trace event condition.
(4) Trace end condition setting area
This sets an event condition for ending a trace.
When Trace Stop is selected in the trace full mode, the trace end condition cannot be set.
The number of event conditions that can be set in the trace end condition setting area is 16 (8 execution
events and 8 access events).
In the ID78K4, up to 10 event conditions (3 execution events and 7 access events) can be set. The number of
event link conditions that can be set is 2.
In the ID78K4-NS, the number of event conditions that can be set is 1.
Carry out setting of the trace end conditions by one of the following methods.
• Click
and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition
which is to be set.
• Click
and open the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, then select the event link
condition which is to be set.
• Select one or more event condition or event link condition in the event manager area and click
, or make the setting by drag-and-drop.
324
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
When setting the event condition or event link condition by drag-and-drop, besides the event manager area in
the Trace dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager in each setting
dialog box.
When the focus is on the trace ending condition setting area, click the
DEL key to delete the selected event condition or event link condition.
button, or press the
It is possible to move and copy event conditions and event link conditions in the trace end condition setting
area back and forth among the different setting areas in the Trace dialog box by drag-and-drop operations, as
shown below.
• If an event condition or event link condition is dropped only by the mouse, it is moved.
• If it is dropped while pressing the SHIFT key, the event condition or event link condition is moved.
• If it is dropped while pressing the CTRL key, the event condition or event link condition is copied.
Selecting an event condition or event link condition in the trace end condition setting area and clicking
or double-clicking it opens the Event dialog box or Event Link dialog box and displays the
contents of the event condition or event link condition.
The trace end condition setting area is left blank when there is a newly created trace event condition.
(5) Qualify trace condition setting area
This area sets event conditions for a qualify trace.
A qualify trace is executed only when the trace condition is satisfied.
If two or more event conditions are set, the trace is executed when each event condition is satisfied.
The number of event conditions that can be set in the qualify trace condition setting area is 4 (4 access
events)
Note 1
.
The number of event link conditions that can be set is 1
Note 2
.
Carry out setting of the qualify trace condition by either of the following methods.
Notes 1.
2.
For the IE-784000-R, up to 10 event conditions
For the IE-784000-R, the number of event link conditions is up to 2
• Click
and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition
which is to be set.
• Select one or more event condition in the event manager area and click
, or make the setting
by drag-and-drop.
When setting the event condition by drag-and-drop, besides the event manager area in the Trace dialog box,
it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager in each setting dialog box.
When the focus is on the qualify trace condition setting area, click the
DEL key to delete the selected event condition.
button, or press the
It is possible to move and copy event conditions in the qualify trace condition setting area back and forth
among the different setting areas in the Trace dialog box by drag-and-drop operations, as shown below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
325
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
• If an event condition is dropped only by the mouse, it is moved.
• If it is dropped while pressing the SHIFT key, the event condition is moved.
• If it is dropped while pressing the CTRL key, the event condition is copied.
The event condition in the qualify trace condition setting area can be moved or copied alternately with other
setting areas in the Trace dialog box by a drag-and-drop operation.
Selecting an event condition in the qualify trace condition setting area and clicking
or double-
clicking it opens the Event dialog box and displays the contents of the event condition.
The qualify trace condition setting area is left blank when there is a newly created trace event condition.
(6) Event manager area
This area displays list of each event, event link, break, trace, snapshot
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
, timer
Note 1
, and stub
Note 3
event.
By selecting an event condition or event link condition displayed in the event manager area and clicking
, the event condition or event link condition, etc. can be set in the delay trigger condition setting
area, trace start condition setting area, trace end condition setting area, qualify trace condition setting area
and other setting areas.
Also the event condition or event link condition in the event manager area can be directly dragged to each
event setting area.
When the focus is on the event manager area, select an event icon, and click the
press the DEL key to delete the selected event.
button, or
When the focus is on the event manager area, selecting an event icon and clicking
or double-
clicking an event icon opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event, and displays the
contents of the event.
, it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing.
By clicking
Notes 1.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
Function buttons
Closes the Trace dialog box.
If there is a trace event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically
and the dialog box is closed.
A trace event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered.
326
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Newly creates a trace event condition.
A trace event name is generated automatically and a newly created trace event
condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the trace event condition
using the
or the
button.
Enters a trace event condition.
When a new trace event condition has been created or when the contents of a
trace event condition have been changed, be sure to enter the trace event
condition using this button.
If trace event conditions that have already been entered are displayed, it changes
to either the
button or
button.
A trace event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered.
Enables a trace event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a trace event condition is in the disabled
state.
button or the
It changes to either the
button.
Disables a trace event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a trace event condition is in the enabled
state.
button or the
It changes to either the
button.
Clears the contents of a trace event condition.
If a trace event condition is entered but not edited, this button is displayed.
It changes to the
button.
Returns the contents of a trace event condition to the original contents.
If a trace event condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area is
made blank except the trace event name, or the settings return to the default
settings.
If a trace event condition is being edited, the
button is displayed in
place of this button.
Closes the Trace dialog box.
If a trace event condition is not being created/changed/deleted, this button is
displayed.
Even if a trace event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the
trace event condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
327
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Closes the Trace dialog box.
If a trace event condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the
button becomes this button.
Even if there is a trace event condition that is being edited, the dialog box closes
without the trace event condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Opens the Help window.
Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode and adds an event condition to the
selected position in the delay trigger condition setting area, trace start condition
setting area, trace end condition setting area or qualify trace condition setting
area.
The area where the event condition is added becomes the selected area when
is clicked.
Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode and adds an event link
condition to the selected position in the trace start condition setting area, trace end
condition setting area or qualify trace condition setting area.
The area where the event link condition is added becomes the selected area when
is clicked.
Displays the event contents selected in the trace start condition setting area, trace
end condition setting area, qualify trace condition setting area or event manager
area by opening each setting dialog box.
Its operation is the same as double-clicking the event icon.
When the event icon is not selected, or if multiple icons have been selected, this
button is disabled.
Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode and deletes the event
selected in the trace start condition setting area, trace end condition setting area,
qualify trace condition setting area or event manager area.
The DEL key has the same operation.
Expand
Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of
the
button.
Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the
Expand
328
button.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Adds the event condition or event link condition selected in the event manager
area to the selected position in the trace start condition setting area, trace end
condition setting area or qualify trace condition setting area.
The area where the event condition is added becomes the selected area when
is clicked.
Opens the Event Info dialog box.
The
The
button rearranges events in name order and displays them.
button rearranges the events in order by type and displays
them.
The
button displays the events in the order in which they were
entered without rearranging them.
The
button changes the event manager area to the detailed display
mode.
The
button changes the event manager area to the list display
mode.
The
button or the ESC key closes the dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
329
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Opens the Set Other dialog box.
Clicking each button opens the Event, Event Link, Break, Snap Shot
Timer
Note 1
, or Stub
Note 3
Note 1
Note 2
, DMM
,
dialog box and the Event Manager, and closes the Set Other
dialog box.
Close the dialog box by clicking
Trace dialog box.
Notes 1.
330
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
or
and return to the
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Snap Shot Dialog Box
(Not supported in the ID78K4-NS)
General
Registers, sets, and displays snapshot event conditions.
The snapshot event condition registered in this dialog box is automatically registered to the Event Manager.
This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is
used, or when the IE-784000-R is used.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Event] → [Snap Shot…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + N , and S keys in that order.
• In the Event dialog box
Click the
button.
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + S .
• Execute one of the following operations in the event manager area in the Event, Event Link, Break, Trace,
Note 1
DMM
, Timer, or Stub
Note2
dialog box.
button.
Select the snapshot event condition and click the
Select the snapshot event condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O .
Double-click the snapshot event condition.
• Execute one of the following operations in the Event Manager.
Select the snapshot event condition and click the
button.
Double-click the snapshot event condition.
• Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or Set Other dialog box.
button.
Click the
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + S .
Notes 1.
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
331
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-67. Snap Shot Dialog Box (1/2)
Selection of register snap data
(1)
(2)
(7)
(4)
(3)
(8)
Selection of SFR snap data
(1)
(2)
(7)
(5)
(3)
(8)
332
(1) Snapshot event name setting area
(5) SFR snap data setting area
(2) Snapshot condition setting area
(6) There is no relevant area in this state
(3) Snap data select area
(7) Snap data display area
(4) Register snap data setting area
(8) Event manager area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 6-67. Snap Shot Dialog Box (2/2)
Selection of memory snap data
(1)
(2)
(7)
(6)
(3)
(8)
(1) Snapshot event name setting area
(5) There is no relevant area in this state
(2) Snapshot condition setting area
(6) Memory snap data setting area
(3) Snap data select area
(7) Snap data display area
(4) There is no relevant area this state
(8) Event manager area
Function
Registers, sets, and displays snapshot event conditions.
Snapshot is for saving the contents of the registers, memory and SFRs when the program is executed in the trace
buffer. The timing at which snapshot is to be performed is specified by a snapshot event condition.
Up to 256 snapshot event conditions can be set. However, the number of snapshot event conditions that can be
used simultaneously is 1.
Snapshot event conditions become valid automatically when they are entered. However, if the number of snapshot
event conditions exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, or if the number of event conditions or event
link conditions in use exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, the snapshot event conditions are
entered in the disabled state. Also, in this case, a snapshot event condition cannot be enabled.
Up to 16 items of snap data can be set for each of the registers, SFRs, and memory, for a total of up to 48 items.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
333
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
This dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Snapshot event name setting area
• Snapshot condition setting area
• Snap data select area
• Register snap data setting area
• SFR snap data setting area
• Memory snap data setting area
• Snap data display area
• Event manager area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Snapshot event name setting area
This area sets a snapshot event name and displays a snapshot event condition.
When entering a snapshot event condition, it is necessary to set a snapshot event name. A snapshot event
name may consist of up to eight alphanumeric characters.
When displaying snapshot event conditions which have already been created, either type the name of the
already created snapshot event condition in the text box or select the snapshot event condition from the dropdown list in the snapshot event name setting area.
Clicking the
mark in the snapshot event name setting area switches between enabling or disabling the
snapshot event condition.
The relationship between the color of the character in the
Color of Character in
334
mark and the status is shown below.
Condition
Mark
Red
Indicates that the snapshot event condition has been enabled.
A snapshot event occurs if the condition is satisfied.
Black
Indicates that the snapshot event condition has not been enabled.
No snapshot event occurs even if the condition is satisfied.
Gray
Indicates that the snapshot event condition is currently being edited
and that it has not been entered.
Yellow
Indicates that the snapshot event is an event which is in the hold
state. An event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol
specified by the event condition by program download, etc. cannot
be referred to.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Snapshot condition setting area
This area sets a snapshot event condition.
Only one event condition or event link condition can be set in the snapshot condition setting area.
Carry out setting of the snapshot condition by either of the following methods.
• Click
and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition
which is to be set.
• Click
and open the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, then select the event link
condition which is to be set.
• Select an event condition or event link condition in the event manager area and click
, or
make the setting by a drag-and-drop operation.
If an event condition or event link condition is already set in the snapshot condition setting area, it is replaced
by the newly set event condition or event link condition.
When setting the event condition or event link condition by drag-and-drop, besides the event manager area in
the Snap Shot dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager in each
setting dialog box.
When the focus is on the snapshot condition setting area, click the
DEL key to delete the selected event condition or event link condition.
button, or press the
Selecting an event condition or event link condition in the snapshot condition setting area and clicking
or double-clicking it opens the Event dialog box or Event Link dialog box and displays the
contents of the event condition or event link condition.
The snapshot condition setting area is left blank when there is a newly created snapshot event condition.
(3) Snap data select area
This area selects the type of snap data.
The following three types of snap data are available.
Item
Contents
Register
A register can be registered.
Sfr
An SFR can be registered.
Memory
Memory can be registered.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
335
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The following displays are switched by selection in the snap data select area.
• Register snap data setting area
• SFR snap data setting area
• Memory snap data setting area
Also, if snap data is selected in the snap data display area, the selection items in the snap data select area
change in accordance with the type of snap data selected.
(4) Register snap data setting area
Enter, change or delete register snap data in this area.
This area is displayed by selecting Register in the snap data select area.
Snap data which is entered/changed/deleted here is reflected in the snap data display area. If register snap
data is selected in the snap data display area, the contents of the selected register snap data are displayed.
Up to 16 items of register snap data can be entered.
The register snap data setting area consists of the following items.
(a) Register name setting area
This specifies the register name.
Specification of a register name is accomplished by selecting the register name from a drop-down list.
A general-purpose register or control register can be specified. Uppercase and lowercase characters are
not distinguished (in the Trace View window, all the characters are standardized to uppercase characters
and displayed).
Names that can be specified are function names and absolute names. Note, however, that the snap data
displayed in the Trace View window is always displayed as an absolute name.
To specify all the registers, select All from the drop-down list or specify directly in the text box.
For a newly created snapshot event condition, this area is blank.
When entering register snap data, it is necessary to specify a register name.
336
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(b) Register bank setting area
This area specifies the register bank.
To specify the register bank, enter the value directly in the text box or select from the drop-down list. The
setting range is as follows.
[When IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or when IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used]
Setting range: 0 ≤ Register bank ≤ 3
[When IE-784000-R is used]
Setting range: 0 ≤ Register bank ≤ 7
To specify the current bank, select “Current” from the drop-down list or enter “Current” or “C”
(abbreviation) directly in the text box.
If the register bank specification is omitted, the current bank will be specified.
For a newly created snapshot event condition, this area is blank.
button
(c)
Enters register snap data.
Entered snap data is inserted in the snap data display area’s select position and displayed.
button
(d)
Changes the contents of snap data selected in the snap data display area to the specified register snap
data.
button
(e)
Deletes the snap data selected in the snap data display area.
If the focus is on the snap data display area, the same kind of operation can be performed using the
DEL key.
(f)
button
Restores the contents of the snap data display area to the original contents.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
337
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) SFR snap data setting area
Enter, change or delete SFR snap data in this area.
This area is displayed by selecting Sfr in the snap data select area.
Snap data which is entered/changed/deleted here is reflected in the snap data display area. If SFR snap data
is selected in the snap data display area, the contents of the selected SFR snap data are displayed.
Up to 16 items of SFR snap data can be entered.
The SFR snap data setting area consists of the following items.
(a) SFR name setting area
This area specifies the SFR name. Only SFR names that are possible to read can be specified.
Also, SFR bit names and I/O port names entered in the Add I/O Port dialog box cannot be specified.
The SFR name can be set by typing the SFR name directly in the text box or by selecting the SFR name
from the drop-down list.
SFR names are not case sensitive (in the Trace View window, all the characters are standardized to
uppercase characters and displayed).
For a newly created snapshot event condition, this area is blank.
When entering SFR snap data, it is necessary to specify an SFR name.
button
(b)
Enters SFR snap data.
Entered snap data is inserted in the snap data display area’s select position and displayed.
button
(c)
Changes the contents of snap data selected in the snap data display area to the specified SFR snap
data.
(d)
button
Deletes the snap data selected in the snap data display area.
If the focus is on the snap data display area, the same kind of operation can be performed using the
DEL key.
(e)
button
Restores the contents of the snap data display area to the original contents.
338
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(6) Memory snap data setting area
This area specifies the range of the memory data for the snapshot and access size.
This area is displayed only when Memory is selected in the snap data select area.
Snap data which is entered/changed/deleted here is reflected in the snap data display area. If memory snap
data is selected in the snap data display area, the contents of the selected memory snap data are displayed.
Up to 16 items of memory snap data can be entered.
The memory snap data setting area consists of the following items.
(a) Memory address setting area
This area specifies the memory address range.
Input the start address and end address, in that order.
The setting range is as shown below.
[When IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or when IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used]
Setting range: 0 ≤ Address ≤ 0xffff
[When IE-784000-R is used]
Setting range: 0 ≤ Address ≤ 0xfffff
If a value is input for the start address only and the end address is omitted, it is regarded as if the value
specified for the end address was the same as that specified for the start address.
If the specified address range cannot be divided by the access size, the address range is rounded up
and corrected to a range that can be divided by the access size.
For the address range specification, it is possible to specify by a symbol or an expression. The
specification method is the same as in the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when numerical
values are input is hexadecimal.
If an expression or symbol is specified in the memory address setting area and then entered and
changed, the converted address value is displayed together with the specified expression or symbol in
the snap data display area.
Only the converted address value is displayed for snap data displayed in the Trace View window.
For a newly created snapshot event condition, this area is blank.
When entering memory snap data, it is necessary to specify a starting address.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
339
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(b) Memory display size setting area
This area specifies the memory snap data access size.
The access size can be specified by typing the value directly in the text box or by selecting it from the
drop-down list.
The following can be specified.
Access Size
Abbreviated Form
Byte
B
Memory snapshot is executed in 8-bit units.
Word
W
Memory snapshot is executed in 16-bit units.
Double word
DW
Memory snapshot is executed in 32-bit units.
Remark
Contents
The specified characters are not case sensitive.
For a newly created snapshot event condition, this area is blank.
When entering memory snap data, it is necessary to specify the access size.
button
(c)
Enters memory snap data.
Entered snap data is inserted in the snap data display area’s select position and displayed.
(d)
button
Changes the contents of snap data selected in the snap data display area to the specified memory snap
data.
button
(e)
Deletes the snap data selected in the snap data display area.
If the focus is on the snap data display area, the same kind of operation can be performed using the
DEL key.
(f)
button
Restores the contents of the snap data display area to the original contents.
340
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(7) Snap data display area
This area lists the registered snap data.
Snap data, including registers, SFRs, and memory data, can be registered.
The registered snap data is written to the tracer when a snapshot event occurs.
If snap data is selected in the snap data list, the contents of the selected snap data are displayed in the
setting areas for the register, the SFR, and memory.
Each type of snap data is displayed as follows.
(a) Register snap data
Register name
Example
RP0[0]
RP1[Current]
All[2]
(b) SFR snap data
SFR name
Example
PM0
PM1
(c) Memory snap data
Starting address <Symbol, expression> – End address <Symbol, expression>, Access size
Example
0xFE20<byVar >, B
0xFE22<wVar >, W
0xFE30<szVar >–0xFE2F<szVar+0x10 >, B
Remark
Symbols or expressions specified in the address are enclosed by “< >”.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
341
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(8) Event manager area
This area displays a list of each of the entered event and event link conditions, and break, trace, snapshot,
Note 1
DMM
, timer, and stub
Note 2
events.
An event or event link condition that is displayed in the event manager area can be set in the snapshot
button.
condition setting area by clicking the
Also, event conditions or event link conditions in the event manager area can be dragged directly to the
snapshot condition setting area.
When the focus is on the event manager area, select an event icon and click the
press the DEL key to delete the selected event.
button, or
When the focus is on the event manager area, selecting an event icon and clicking
or double-
clicking an event icon opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event and displays the
contents of the event.
By clicking
Notes 1.
2.
, it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Supported only in the ID78K4
Function buttons
Closes the Snap Shot dialog box.
If there is a snapshot event condition that is being edited, it is entered
automatically and the dialog box is closed.
A snapshot event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered.
Newly creates a snapshot event condition.
A snapshot event name is generated automatically and a newly created snapshot
event condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the snapshot event
condition using the
or the
button.
Enters a snapshot event condition.
When a new snapshot event condition has been created or when the contents of a
snapshot event condition have been changed, be sure to enter the snapshot event
condition using this button.
If snapshot event conditions that have already been entered are displayed, it
changes to either the
button or
button.
A snapshot event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered.
342
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Enables a snapshot event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a snapshot event condition is in the
disabled state.
button or the
It changes to either the
button.
Disables a snapshot event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a snapshot event condition is in the
enabled state.
button or the
It changes to either the
button.
Clears the contents of a snapshot event condition.
If a snapshot event condition is entered but not edited, this button is displayed.
It changes to the
button.
Returns the contents of a snapshot event condition to the original contents.
If a snapshot event condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area
except the snapshot event name is made blank.
If a snapshot event condition is being edited, the
button is displayed
in place of this button.
Closes the Snap Shot dialog box.
If a snapshot event condition is not being created/changed/deleted, this button is
displayed.
Even if a snapshot event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without
the snapshot event condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Closes the Snap Shot dialog box.
If a snapshot event condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the
button becomes this button.
Even if there is a snapshot event condition that is being edited, the dialog box
closes without the snapshot event condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Opens the help window.
Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode and selects the event condition to
be set.
Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode and selects the event link
condition to be set.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
343
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Displays the event contents selected in the snapshot condition setting area or
event manager area by opening the corresponding setting dialog box.
The
button is enabled only when the focus is on the snapshot
condition setting area or the event manager area, and when a single event is
selected. In cases other than that, it is dimmed and cannot be clicked.
Deletes an event selected in the snapshot condition setting area or event manager
area.
The
button is enabled only when the focus is on the snapshot
condition setting area or the event manager area, and when an event is selected.
In cases other than that, it is dimmed and cannot be clicked.
The DEL key has the same operation.
Expand
Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of
the
button.
Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the
Expand
button.
Adds the event condition or event link condition selected in the event manager
area to the selected position in the snapshot event condition setting area.
Events other than the event condition or event link condition cannot be added.
Opens the Event Info dialog box.
The
The
button rearranges events in name order and displays them.
button rearranges the events in order by type and displays
them.
The
button displays the events in the order in which they were
entered without rearranging them.
344
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
The
WINDOW REFERENCE
button changes the event manager area to the detailed display
mode.
The
button changes the event manager area to the list display
mode.
The
button or the ESC key closes the dialog box.
Opens the Set Other dialog box.
Clicking each button opens the Event Manager and the Event, Event Link, Break,
Note 1
Trace, DMM
, Timer, or Stub
Note 2
dialog box, and closes the Set Other dialog
box.
Close the dialog box by clicking the
or
and return to
the Snap Shot dialog box.
Notes 1.
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
345
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Stub dialog box
(Supported only in the ID78K4)
General
Registers, sets, and displays stub event conditions.
The stub event condition registered in this dialog box is automatically registered to the Event Manager.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Event] → [Stub…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + N , and U keys in that order.
• In the Event dialog box
Click the
button.
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + U .
• Execute one of the following operations in the event manager area in the Event, Event Link, Break, Trace,
Snap Shot, or Timer dialog box.
Select a stub event condition and click the
button.
Select a stub event condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O .
Double-click a stub event condition.
• Execute one of the following operations on the Event Manager.
Select a stub event condition and click the
button.
Double-click a stub event condition.
• Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box and Set Other dialog box.
Click the
button.
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + U .
346
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-68. Stub Dialog Box
When event manager area is displayed
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
When event manager area is not displayed
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Stub event name setting area
(3) Jump address setting area
(2) Stub condition setting area
(4) Event manager area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
347
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
Registers, sets, and displays stub event conditions.
The stub function is to execute a user program that has been downloaded or written by online assemble in
advance to a vacant area of the memory when an event condition is satisfied. The timing at which stub function is to
be performed is specified by a stub event condition.
Up to 256 stub event conditions can be set. However, only one stub event condition can be used at a time.
Stub event conditions become invalid automatically as soon as they are entered. However, if the number of stub
event conditions exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, or if the number of event conditions or event
link conditions in use exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, the stub event conditions are entered in
the disabled state. Also, in this case, a stub event condition cannot be enabled.
This dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Stub event name setting area
• Stub condition setting area
• Jump address setting area
• Event manager area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Stub event name setting area
This area sets a stub event name and selects a stub event condition.
When entering a stub event condition, it is necessary to set a stub event name.
A stub event name may consist of up to eight alphanumeric characters.
When displaying a stub event condition that has already been created, either type the name of the already
created stub event in the text box or select the stub event condition from the drop-down list in the stub event
name setting area.
mark in the stub event name setting area switches between enabling or disabling the stub
Clicking the
event condition.
The relationship between the color of the character in the
Color of Character in
348
Mark
mark and the status is as shown below.
Condition
Red
Indicates that the stub event condition has been enabled.
A stub event occurs if the condition is satisfied.
Black
Indicates that the stub event condition has been disabled.
No stub event occurs even if the condition is satisfied.
Gray
Indicates that the stub event condition is currently being edited and that it
has not been entered.
Yellow
Indicates that the stub event is an event which is in the hold state.
An event in the hold state is in a state in which the symbol specified by the
event condition cannot be referred to due to program download, etc.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Stub condition setting area
This area sets a stub event condition.
Only one event condition or event link condition can be set in the stub condition setting area.
Carry out setting of the stub condition by either of the following methods.
• Click the
button to open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event link
condition to be set.
• Click the
button to open the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, then select the event
link condition to be set.
• Select an event condition or event link condition in the event manager area and click the
button, or make the setting by a drag-and-drop operation.
If an event condition or an event link condition is already set in the stub condition setting area, it is replaced
by the newly set event condition or event link condition.
When setting the event condition or an event link condition by drag-and-drop, in addition to the event
manager area in the Stub dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager
in each setting dialog box.
When the focus is on the stub condition setting area, click the
button to delete the selected
event condition or event link condition.
The event condition or event link condition can also be deleted by pressing the DEL key.
Selecting an event condition or an event link condition in the stub condition setting area and clicking the
button or double-clicking the selection opens the Event dialog box or Event Link dialog box and
the displays contents of the event condition or event link condition.
The stub condition setting area is left blank when there is a newly created stub event condition.
(3) Jump address setting area
This area specifies the first address of the function to be executed when a stub event occurs.
To return from a specified function to the original position when a stub event occurs, the “RETB instruction”
must be described in the function.
The first address of the function can be also specified by a symbol or an expression, in the same manner as
in the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when inputting a numerical value is hexadecimal.
Specify the first address of the function in the following setting range:
Setting range: 0 ≤ First address of function ≤ 0xFFFFF
The jump address setting area is left blank when there is a newly created stub event condition.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
349
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(4) Event manager area
This area displays a list of the entered events, event links, breaks, traces, snap shots, stubs, and timers.
An event or event link condition that is displayed in the event manager area can be set in the stub condition
setting area by clicking the
button.
Also, the event conditions or event link conditions in the event manager area can be dragged directly to the
stub condition setting area.
When the focus is on the event manager area, select an event icon and click the
button, or
press the DEL key to delete the selected event.
When the focus on the event manager area, selecting an event icon and clicking the
button or
double-clicking the event icon opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event and displays
the set contents of the event.
button, it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or
By clicking the
sequencing.
Function buttons
Closes the Stub dialog box.
If there is a stub event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically and
the dialog box is closed.
A stub event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered.
Newly creates a stub event condition.
A stub event name is generated automatically and a newly created stub event
condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the stub event condition
or the
using the
button.
Enters a stub event condition.
When a new stub event condition has been created or when the contents of the stub
event condition have been changed, be sure to enter the stub event condition using
this button.
If stub event conditions that have already been entered are displayed, it changes to
button or the
button.
either the
A stub event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered.
Enables a stub event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a stub event condition is in the disabled state.
It changes to either the
350
button or the
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
button.
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Disables a stub event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a stub event condition is in the enabled state.
button or the
It changes to either the
button.
Clears the contents of a stub event condition.
If a stub event condition is entered but not edited, this button is displayed.
It changes to the
button.
Returns the contents of a stub event condition to the original contents.
If a stub event condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area except
the stub event name is made blank.
If a stub event condition is being edited, the
button is displayed in place
of this button.
Closes the Stub event dialog box.
If a stub event condition is not being created/changed/deleted, this button is
displayed.
Even if a stub event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the stub
event condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Closes the Stub dialog box.
If a stub event condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the
button becomes this button.
Even if a stub event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the stub
event condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Opens the Help window of the Stub dialog box.
Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode and selects the event condition to be
set.
Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode and selects an event link
condition to be set.
Displays the event contents selected in the stub condition setting area or event
manager area by opening the corresponding setting dialog box.
Double-clicking the event icon has the same operation.
If an event icon is not selected, or if two or more event icons are selected, this button
cannot be selected.
Deletes an event selected in the stub condition setting area or event manager area.
The DEL key has the same operation.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
351
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Displays the event manger area.
Expands the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of the
button.
Does not display the event manager area.
Shrinks the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the
button.
Adds the event condition or event link condition selected in the event manager area to
the selected position in the stub condition setting area.
Events other than an event condition or an event link condition cannot be added.
Opens the Event Info dialog box.
The
button rearranges the events in name order and displays them.
The
button rearranges the events in order by type and displays them.
The
button displays the events in the order in which they were entered
without rearranging them.
The
button changes the event manager area to the detailed display
352
mode.
The
button changes the event manager area to the list display mode.
The
button or the ESC key closes the dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Opens the Set Other dialog box.
Clicking each button opens the Event Manager and the Event, Event Link, Break,
Trace, Snap Shot, or Timer dialog box, and closes Set Other dialog box.
Close the dialog box by clicking the
button or the
button
and return to the Stub dialg box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
353
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Timer Dialog Box
General
Displays the result of measuring execution time, and registers and sets timer event conditions.
The timer event condition registered in this dialog box is automatically registered to the Event Manager.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Event] → [Timer…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + N , and I keys in that order.
button on the toolbar.
Click the
• In the Event dialog box
button.
Click the
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + I .
• Execute one of the following operations in the event manager area in the Event, Event Link, Break, Trace,
Note 1
Note 2
, or DMM
dialog box.
Snap Shot
Select the timer event condition and click the
button.
Select the timer event condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O .
Double-click the timer event condition.
• Execute one of the following operations in the Event Manager.
Select the timer event condition and click the
button.
Double-click the timer event condition.
• Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or Set Other dialog box.
Click the
button.
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + I .
Notes 1.
2.
354
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Window
Figure 6-69. Timer Dialog Box (1/2)
ID78K0S-NS, ID78K0-NS
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
ID78K4-NS
(1)
(4)
(3)
(1) Timer event name setting area
(5) Timer rate setting areaNote 2
(2) Timer condition setting areaNote 1
(6) Timer out time setting areaNote 2
(3) Timer display unit select area
(7) Event manager areaNote 2
(4) Execution time display area
Notes 1.
This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or when the IE-78K0NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used.
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
355
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 6-69. Timer Dialog Box (2/2)
ID78K0, ID78K4
(1)
(2)
(8)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(1) Timer event name setting area
(4) Execution time display area
(2) Timer condition setting area
(7) Event manager area
Note
(3) Timer display unit select area
(8) Timer measurement select area
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
Function
Displays the result of measuring execution time, and registers and sets timer event conditions.
The result of measuring execution time is displayed by selecting the set timer event condition.
Up to 256 timer event conditions can be entered. However, the number of timer event conditions that can be used
simultaneously is 16 (3 in the ID78K4).
Timer event conditions become valid automatically when they are entered. However, if the number of timer event
conditions exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, or if the number of event conditions or event link
conditions in use exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, the timer event conditions are entered in the
disabled state. Also, in this case, a timer event condition cannot be enabled.
The execution time from the start of the program to occurrence of a break can be displayed. It can be displayed by
selecting “Run-Break”
Note
in the timer event name setting area.
A timer event condition is set only when the timer is in the enabled state.
If the timer is disabled without checking [Option] → [Timer ON] on the menu bar in the main window, the timer will
not be executed. However, “Run-Break”
Note
is not affected by the timer’s on/off status. “Run-Break”
Note
is included in
the number of timer events that can be enabled simultaneously. If there is a vacancy in the setting numbers, “RunBreak” is always enabled and can be used.
Note For the ID78K4-NS, this is fixed to “Section”.
356
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
During emulation, in order to stop the currently operating timer, select [Run] → [Timer Stop] from the menu bar.
Also, during emulation, in order to run the currently stopped timer, select [Run] → [Timer Start] from the menu bar.
These two menus toggle and their display changes according to the current timer state.
However, only the ID78K4-NS displays the result of measuring the execution time of a section trace from the start
event to the end event. The timer operates only when a valid section trace event is set.
This dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Timer event name setting area
• Timer condition setting area
Note 1
• Timer display unit select area
• Execution time display area
• Timer rate setting area
Note 2
• Timer out time setting area
• Event manager area
Note 2
Note 3
• Timer measurement select area
Notes 1.
Note 4
This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS, when the IE-78K0-NS-A or
IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-78000-R or IE-784000-R is used.
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS) and ID78K0
3.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
4.
Supported only in the ID78K4
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Timer event name setting area
This area sets a timer event name and selects a timer event condition
Note
.
When entering a timer event condition, it is necessary to set a timer event name.
Timer event names of up to 8 alphanumeric characters can be set.
The timer event name “Run-Break”
Note
, which displays the execution time from the start of execution to
occurrence of a break, is registered from the beginning (this timer event name, however, is not displayed in
the Event Manager).
When displaying timer event conditions which have already been created, either type the timer event name of
the already created timer event condition in the text box or select from the drop-down list in the timer event
name setting area.
Clicking the
mark in the timer event name setting area switches between enabling or disabling the timer
event condition.
The relationship between the color of the character in the
mark and the status is shown below.
Note A timer event name cannot be set in the ID78K4-NS. The timer event name setting area of the
ID78K4-NS is fixed to “Section”.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
357
CHAPTER 6
Color of Character in
WINDOW REFERENCE
Condition
Mark
Red
Indicates that the timer event condition has been enabled.
A timer event occurs if the condition is satisfied.
Black
Indicates that the timer event condition has not been enabled.
No timer event occurs even if the condition is satisfied.
Gray
Indicates that the timer event condition is currently being edited and
that it has not been entered.
Yellow
Indicates that the timer event is an event which is in the hold state.
An event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by
the event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to.
(2) Timer condition setting area (This is valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS,
when the IE-78K0-NS-A or IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, or when the IE-78000-R or IE-784000-R is used.)
This area sets an event condition for the timer.
Start Event:
Sets event condition or event link condition to start time measurement.
End Event:
Sets event condition or event link condition to end time measurement.
The number of event conditions and event link conditions that can be entered in the timer condition setting
area is one condition for each of the start and end conditions.
Carry out setting of the timer condition by either of the following methods.
• Click
and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition
which is to be set.
• Click
and open the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, then select the event link
condition to be set.
• Select an event condition in the event manager area and click
, or make the setting by drag-
and-drop.
If an event condition or an event link condition is already set in the timer condition setting area, it is replaced
with the newly set event condition or event link condition.
When setting the event condition or event link condition by drag-and-drop, besides the event manager area in
the Timer dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager in each setting
dialog box.
When the focus is on the timer condition setting area, click the
DEL key to delete the event condition selected in [Start Event:] or [End Event:].
button, or press the
It is possible to move the event condition or event link condition in [Start Event:] and [End Event:] in the timer
condition setting area by a drag-and-drop operation.
Selecting an event condition or event link condition selected in [Start Event:] or [End Event:] in the timer
condition setting area and clicking
or double-clicking it opens the Event dialog box and displays
the contents of the event condition or event link condition.
The timer condition setting area is left blank when there is a newly created timer event condition.
358
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Timer display unit select area
This area selects the timer measurement results display unit.
The unit can be selected from the following five types.
nsec:
Measurement results are displayed in nanosecond units.
usec:
Measurement results are displayed in microsecond units.
msec:
Measurement results are displayed in millisecond units.
sec:
Measurement results are displayed in second units.
min:
Measurement results are displayed in minute units.
nsec is selected for a newly created timer event condition.
(4) Execution time display area
This area displays the execution time and execution count of the program. The execution time can be
measured up to 14 minutes (in 0.08 µs units from 0.16 µs to 204 µs of the resolution) in the ID78K0 (-NS), up
to 14 minutes and 18 seconds (0.2 µs of the resolution) in the ID78K4, and up to 14 minutes and 33 seconds
(0.2 µs of the resolution) in the ID78K4-NS. The execution count can be measured up to 65,535 counts.
If measurement is not conducted or if the measurement results are cleared, it is shown as a blank.
If the measurement results overflow, the message “Timer measurement overflowed!” is displayed
Note 1
.
The following functions can be used by operating each button.
• By clicking
Note 2
, the measurement results can be cleared.
• “Run-Break” measurement results cannot be cleared. They are cleared automatically when execution
starts.
• By clicking
• By clicking
, the measurement results can be copied to the clipboard in text format.
, the Timer Result dialog box, which displays the selected timer event conditions
or the “Run-Break” measurement results, is displayed.
Notes 1.
2.
Not displayed in the ID78K4 (-NS)
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
359
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) Timer rate setting area (Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS) and ID78K0)
This area sets the timer rate value to measure the execution time. The minimum rate value is 160 nsec
(default) which can be increased in 80 nsec units.
(6) Time out time setting area (Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS) and ID78K0)
When the Timer Out Break is on, time out time can be set, but not when the Timer Out Break is off.
When the measurement time of a period (from timer start event generation to timer end event generation)
exceeds the time out time, execution ends. Up to 24 hours can be set.
(7) Event manager area (Not supported in the ID78K4-NS)
Note 1
This displays a list of each of the entered event and event link conditions, and break, trace, snapshot
Note 2
DMM
, timer
Note 1
, and stub
Note 3
,
events.
An event condition or event link condition displayed in the event manager area can be set in the timer
.
condition setting area by clicking
Also, an event condition or event link condition in the event manager area can be dragged directly to the timer
condition setting area.
When the focus is on the event manager area, select the event icon and click
DEL key to delete the selected event.
When the focus is on the event manager area, selecting an event icon and clicking
or press the
or double-
clicking an event icon opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event and displays the
contents of the event.
By clicking
Notes 1.
360
, it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing.
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(8) Timer measurement select area (supported only in the ID78K4)
This area selects the timer measurement mode.
The following two modes can be selected:
Max Time
This mode is to measure the maximum execution time.
The longest processing time between the events set as timer event conditions is measured.
Min Time
This mode is to measure the minimum execution time.
The shortest processing time between the events set as timer event conditions is measured.
If “Run-Break” is selected in the timer event name setting area, the timer measurement select area is dimmed
and cannot be selected.
Max Time is selected for a newly created timer event condition.
Function buttons
Caution
The ID78K4-NS does not support any buttons other than OK , Help , Copy , and View Always .
Closes the Timer dialog box.
If there is a timer event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically
and the dialog box is closed.
A timer event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered.
Newly creates a timer event condition.
A timer event name is generated automatically and a newly created timer event
condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the timer event condition
or the
using the
button.
Enters a timer event condition.
When a new timer event condition has been created or when the contents of a
timer event condition have been changed, be sure to enter the timer event
condition using this button.
If timer event conditions that have already been entered are displayed, it changes
to either the
button or
button.
A timer event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered.
Enables a timer event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a timer event condition is in the disabled
state.
It changes to either the
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
button or the
button.
361
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Disables a timer event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a timer event condition is in the enabled
state.
button or the
It changes to either the
button.
Clears the contents of a timer event condition.
If a timer event condition is entered but not edited, this button is displayed.
It changes to the
button.
Returns the contents of a timer event condition to the original contents.
If a timer event condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area is
made blank except the timer event name, or the settings return to the default
settings.
If a timer event condition is being edited, this button is displayed.
It changes to the
button.
Closes the Timer dialog box.
If a timer event condition has not been created/changed/deleted, this button is
displayed.
Even if a timer event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the
timer event condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Closes the Timer dialog box.
If a timer event condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the
button becomes this button.
Even if there is a timer event condition that is being edited, the dialog box closes
without the timer event condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Opens the Help window.
Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode and adds to set the event condition
either in [Start Event:] or in [End Event:] in the timer condition setting area.
The area where the event condition is added becomes the selected area when
is clicked.
Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode and adds to set the event link
condition either in [Start Event:] or in [End Event:] in the timer condition setting
area.
The area where the event condition is added becomes the selected area when
is clicked.
362
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Displays the event contents selected in [Start Event:] or in [End Event:] in the
timer condition setting area or event manager area by opening the corresponding
setting dialog box.
Operation is the same as double-clicking the event icon.
If an event icon is not selected, or if multiple events are selected, selection cannot
be made.
Deletes an event selected in [Start Event:] or in [End Event:] in the timer condition
setting area or event manager area.
The DEL key has the same operation.
Expand
Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of
the
button.
Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the
Expand
button.
Adds the event condition or event link condition selected in the event manager
area to the selected position in [Start Event:] or in [End Event:] in the timer
condition setting area.
The area where the event condition is added becomes the selected area when
is clicked.
Opens the Event Info dialog box.
The
The
button rearranges events in name order and displays them.
button rearranges the events in order by type and displays
them.
The
button displays the events in the order in which they were
entered without rearranging them.
The
button changes the event manager area to the detailed display
mode.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
363
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The
button changes the event manager area to the list display
mode.
button or the ESC key closes the dialog box.
The
Opens the Set Other dialog box.
Clicking each button opens the Event Manager and the Event, Event Link, Break,
Note 1
Trace, Snap Shot
Note 2
, DMM
, or Stub
Note 3
dialog box, and closes the Set Other
dialog box.
Close the dialog box by clicking
or
and return to the
Timer dialog box.
This button clears the measurement results.
When measurement is not being performed, it is dimmed and cannot be clicked.
It is also dimmed and cannot be clicked when a user program is being executed.
Copies measurement results to the clipboard in text format.
Displays the Timer Result dialog box, which displays the selected timer event
condition or “Run-Break” measurement results.
Notes 1.
364
Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
2.
Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS)
3.
Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Timer Result Dialog Box
General
Displays the execution time measurement results.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• Select a timer event condition or “Run-Break” in the Timer dialog box
Note
and execute one of the following
operations.
Click the
button.
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + V .
Note Cannot be selected in the ID78K4-NS.
Window
Figure 6-70. Timer Result Dialog Box (1/2)
ID78K0S-NS, ID78K0-NS, ID78K4-NS
(1)
ID78K0
(2)
(1)
(1) Execution time display area
(2) Timer display unit select area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
365
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 6-70. Timer Result Dialog Box (2/2)
ID78K4
(1) Execution time display area
Function
Displays the execution time measurement results.
This displays the execution time measurement results for the timer event condition or “Run-Break” set in the Timer
dialog box.
The Timer Result dialog box corresponds 1 to 1 with a timer event condition or “Run-Break” and multiple dialog
boxes can be opened simultaneously. The number that can be opened simultaneously is 256 for timer event
conditions and 1 corresponding to “Run-Break”, for a total of 257. However, the number of measurements that can be
taken simultaneously for both timer event conditions and “Run-Break” is 17 (4 in the ID78K4)
Note
.
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
The Timer Result dialog box consists of the following area.
• Execution time display area
• Timer display unit select area
The function of this area is explained below.
(1) Execution time display area
This area displays the measurement results of the execution time and execution count of the program.
Execution time and execution count display the cumulative execution time, pass count, and average
execution time of the measurement period specified by the start event and end event conditions.
Also, the execution time is displayed in the unit set for the timer event condition.
366
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
Measurement Result
WINDOW REFERENCE
Contents
PassNote 1
Displays the pass count.
Total
Displays the cumulative execution time.
Note 1
Average
Max
Note 2
Note 2
Min
Notes 1.
2.
Remark
Not measured during "Run-Break".
Displays the average execution time.
Not measured during "Run-Break".
Displays the maximum execution time.
Not measured during "Run-Break".
Displays the minimum execution time.
Not measured during "Run-Break".
Not supported in the ID78K0
Supported only in the ID78K0-NS and ID78K4
If measurement is not conducted or if the measurement results are cleared, it is shown as a blank.
If the measurement results overflow, the message “Timer measurement overflowed!” is displayed.
(2) Timer display unit select area
This area selects the timer measurement results display unit.
The unit can be selected from the following five types.
nsec: Measurement results are displayed in nanosecond units.
usec: Measurement results are displayed in microsecond units.
msec: Measurement results are displayed in millisecond units.
sec:
Measurement results are displayed in second units.
min:
Measurement results are displayed in minute units.
“nsec” is selected for a newly created timer event condition.
Function buttons
Note
Clears the timer measurement results.
When timer measurement is not being performed, it is dimmed and cannot be
clicked.
It is also dimmed and cannot be clicked when a user program is being executed.
A “Run-Break” cannot be cleared. It is cleared automatically when program
execution starts.
Copies timer measurement results to the clipboard in text format.
Closes the Timer Result dialog box. It becomes the default button. The ESC key
has the same operation.
Opens the help window.
Note Not supported in the ID78K4-NS
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
367
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
DMM Dialog Box
(Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS))
General
Sets dynamic memory modification (DMM).
This dialog box is only valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE78K0S-NS-A is used.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Event] Æ [DMM] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + N and D keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-71. DMM Dialog Box
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
368
(6)
(1) Event name setting area
(4) Data setting area
(2) DMM event name setting area
(5) Data size setting area
(3) Address setting area
(6) Event manager area
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
Registers and displays DMM event conditions.
DMM is used to write arbitrary data to a specified address when a specified event occurs during emulation.
This dialog box consists of the following areas.
• Event name setting area
• DMM event name setting area
• Address setting area
• Data setting area
• Data size setting area
• Event manager area
The function of each area is explained below.
(1) Event name setting area
This area sets an event name and selects an event condition.
When entering an event condition, it is necessary to set an event name. An event name may consist of up to
eight alphanumeric characters.
When displaying event conditions which have already been created, either type the event name of the
already created event name in the text box or select the event condition from the drop-down list in the event
name setting area.
In the select mode, the selected event condition can be set in the event condition setting area of the original
setting dialog box that called the Event dialog box.
The mark M. on the left side of the event name setting area shows the use conditions of the event condition.
If the character in the mark M. is red, it indicates that that DMM event condition is valid.
If the character in the mark M. is black, it indicates that that DMM event condition is invalid.
If the character in the mark M. is yellow, it indicates that that DMM event condition is in the hold state. An
event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by the event condition by program download,
etc. cannot be referred to.
(2) DMM event name setting area
This area sets event conditions for DMM.
Up to 16 DMM event conditions can be set (8 execution events and 8 access events).
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
369
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Address setting area
This area sets the address to which data is written after the event has occurred.
(4) Data setting area
This area sets the data to be written after the event has occurred.
(5) Data size setting area
This area sets the size of the data to be written after the event has occurred.
The size can be selected from “Byte” or “Word”.
Example In the case of writing 0xff to 0xFBoo: 0xff is written to 0xFBoo when Byte is specified, and 0xff is
written to 0xFBoo and 0x00 to 0xFBo1 when Word is specified.
(6) Event manager area
This area displays a list of each of the entered event and event link conditions, and break, trace, snapshot,
DMM and timer events.
An event condition or event link condition displayed in the event manager area can be set in the delay trigger
condition setting area, trace start condition setting area, trace end setting condition area, qualify trace
condition area, etc. by clicking Add .
Also, an event condition or event link condition in the event manager area can be dragged directly to the each
event condition setting area.
When the focus is on the event manager area, select the event icon and click
DEL key to delete the selected event.
When the focus is on the event manager area, selecting an event icon and clicking
or press the
or double-
clicking an event icon opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event and displays the
contents of the event.
By clicking
370
, it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Closes the DMM dialog box.
If there is a DMM event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically
and the dialog box is closed.
This is the default button.
Newly creates a DMM event condition.
A DMM event name is generated automatically and a newly created DMM event
condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the DMM event condition
or the
using the
button.
Enters a DMM event condition.
When a new DMM event condition has been created or when the contents of a
DMM event condition have been changed, be sure to enter the DMM event
condition using this button.
If DMM event conditions that have already been entered are displayed, it changes
to either the
button or
button.
A DMM event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered.
Enables a DMM event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a DMM event condition is in the disabled
state.
button or the
It changes to either the
button.
Disables a DMM event condition.
This button is displayed in cases where a DMM event condition is in the enabled
state.
button or the
It changes to either the
button.
Clears the contents of a DMM event condition.
If a DMM event condition is entered but not edited, this button is displayed.
It changes to the
button.
Returns the contents of a DMM event condition to the original contents.
If a DMM event condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area is
made blank except the DMM event name.
If a DMM event condition is being edited, this button is displayed.
It changes to the
button.
Closes the DMM dialog box.
If a DMM event condition has not been created/changed/deleted, this button is
displayed.
Even if a DMM event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the
DMM event condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
371
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Closes the DMM dialog box.
If a DMM event condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the
button becomes this button.
Even if there is a DMM event condition that is being edited, the dialog box closes
without the DMM event condition being entered.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Opens the help window.
Opens the DMM dialog box in the select mode and adds the event condition
specified in the DMM condition setting area. The area to which the event condition
is added is the area selected when the
button is clicked.
Opens the DMM dialog box in the select mode and adds the event link condition
specified in the DMM condition setting area. The area to which the event link
condition is added is the area selected when the
button is clicked.
Displays the event contents selected in the DMM condition setting area or event
manager area by opening the corresponding setting dialog box.
The
button is only valid when the focus is on the DMM event setting
area or event manager area and when one event has been selected. In all other
cases, the button is dimmed and items cannot be selected.
Opens the DMM dialog box in the select mode and deletes an event selected in
the DMM condition setting area or event manager area.
The
button is only valid when the focus is on the DMM event setting
area or event manager area and when an event has been selected. In all other
cases, the button is dimmed and items cannot be selected.
The DEL key has the same operation.
Expand
Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of
the
button.
Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box.
When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the
Expand
372
button.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Opens the Event Info dialog box.
The
The
button rearranges events in name order and displays them.
button rearranges the events in order by type and displays
them.
The
button displays the events in the order in which they were
entered without rearranging them.
The
button changes the event manager area to the detailed display
mode.
The
button changes the event manager area to the list display
mode.
The
button or the ESC key closes the dialog box.
Opens the Set Other dialog box.
Clicking each button opens the Event manager and the Event, Event Link, Break,
Trace, DMM, Timer, or Stub
Note
dialog box, and closes the Set Other dialog box.
Close the dialog box by clicking the
or DMM… button and return
to the Snap Shot dialog box.
Note Supported only in the ID78K4
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
373
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Pass Count Dialog Box
(Not supported in the ID78K4 (-NS))
General
Sets the pass count.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Event] Æ [Pass Count…] from the menu bar
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + N and P .
Window
Figure 6-72. Pass Count Dialog Box
Function
Sets and displays the pass count.
The pass count setting is used to stop execution of the program and tracer after a specified number of events have
occurred.
The Pass Count dialog box consists of the following area.
• Pass count setting area
The function of this area is explained below.
(1) Pass count setting area
This area sets and displays the pass count.
The settable range is from 1 (default) to 255.
374
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Closes the Pass Count dialog box after setting the edited pass count.
This is the default button.
Returns the pass count to the previous value.
Closes the Pass Count dialog box without setting any changes made to the pass
count value.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Opens the help window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
375
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Delay Count Dialog Box
General
Sets the delay count.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Event] Æ [Delay Count...] from the menu bar
Press the shortcut keys GRPH + N and D .
Window
Figure 6-73. Delay Count Dialog Box
ID78K0S-NS, ID78K0-NS
ID78K0, ID78K4 (-NS)
376
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Function
Sets and displays the delay count.
The delay count setting is used to stop execution of the program and tracer after a stop condition event is satisfied
and a trace is performed for a specified count value.
The Delay Count dialog box consists of the following area.
• Delay count setting area
The function of this area is explained below.
(1) Delay count setting area
This area sets and displays the delay count.
[ID78K0-NS, ID78K0S-NS]
The delay count can be selected from the following three settings.
FIRST:
The trigger pointer is placed at the start of the trace data, and tracing stops after
about 8000 frames have been traced.
MIDDLE:
The trigger pointer is placed in the middle of the trace data, and tracing stops after
about 4,000 frames have been traced.
LAST:
The trigger pointer is placed at the end of the trace data, and tracing stops
immediately.
[ID78K0, ID78K4 (-NS)]
The delay count setting range is from 0 (default value) to 32,767 in the ID78K4 (-NS).
Function buttons
Closes the Delay Count dialog box after setting the edited delay count.
This is the default button.
Returns the delay count to the previous value.
Closes the Delay Count dialog box without setting any changes made to the delay
count value.
The ESC key has the same operation.
Opens the help window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
377
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Reset Debugger Dialog Box
General
Initializes the debugger, emulation CPU, and symbol information.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [File] → [Debugger Reset…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + F , and R keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-74. Reset Debugger Dialog Box
Function
Specifies, by using a check box, whether the debugger, emulation CPU, or symbol information is initialized. As the
default, only the debugger is initialized.
The Reset Debugger dialog box consists of the following area.
• Reset subject select area
The function of this area is explained below.
(1) Reset subject select area
This area selects the subject to be reset from the following.
378
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Selected Item
Description
Debugger
Initializes and restarts the debugger (default).
Symbol
Resets symbol information.
Target CPU
Resets emulation CPU.
Function buttons
Initializes the selected subject.
Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box.
Opens the help window.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
379
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
About Dialog Box
General
Displays the version information of the debugger.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [Help] → [About…] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + H , and A keys in that order.
Window
Figure 6-75. About Dialog Box
Function
Displays the version of the debugger and that of the device files, GUI, debugger DLLs, assembler DLLs, executor,
and packet DLLs.
Function button
Closes this dialog box.
380
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Exit Debugger Dialog Box
General
Terminates the debugger.
When terminating the debugger, the debugging environments can be saved in a project file.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened by the following methods.
• In the main window
Select [File] → [Exit] from the menu bar.
Press the GRPH + F , and X keys in that order.
Also, the Exit Debugger dialog box opens when a compulsory close is executed, such as when Windows is closed
or when an application is closed in the task list.
Window
Figure 6-76. Exit Debugger Dialog Box
Function
Specifies, by using a check box, whether the current debugging environments are saved in a project file or not
when the debugger is terminated. As the default, the debugging environments are not saved in a project file. If the
project file has been saved or loaded during a debugging operation, the default is to save the debugging
environments.
When the
button is clicked, the Project File Save dialog box is opened, the current debugging
environments are saved in the project file, and all the windows are closed. The debugger is then terminated.
If the project file has been saved or loaded during a debugging operation, however, the Project File Save dialog
box is not opened, and the debugging environments are saved in the project file.
If the
button is clicked, all the windows are closed, and the debugger is terminated.
Note that the Exit Debugger dialog box can be set not to open in the Debugger Option dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
381
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
When terminating the debugger during user program execution is attempted, the message “User program is
running, Do you want to stop use program?” is displayed. If the
button is selected, a Termination
Confirmation dialog box is displayed after the execution of the user program has been stopped. However, if a setting
not to display the termination confirmation dialog box has been made in the Debugger Option dialog box, the
debugger is directly terminated. If the
button is selected, execution of the user program is not stopped,
the Termination Confirmation dialog box is not displayed, and the debugger is not terminated.
Function buttons
After saving the current debugging environment to a project file, closes all the
windows and terminates the debugger. If the project file name has not been set,
the Project File Save dialog box appears. If the
button in the
Project File Save dialog box is selected, the project file is not saved and the
debugger is not terminated.
If the project file is loaded or saved during debugger operation, this button is the
default.
Closes all the windows and terminates the debugger.
If no project file is loaded or saved during debugger operation, this button is the
default.
Closes the dialog box without doing anything.
382
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Error/Warning Dialog Box
General
Opens if an error or a warning occurs, to inform the user to check the message.
Window
Figure 6-77. Error/Warning Dialog Box
Function
Displays the contents of the error or warning in the message display area.
Refer to APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST if an error occurs.
Function button
Closes this dialog box.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
383
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Console Window
General
This window is used to input debugger control commands.
Since the key bind is emacs-like, accelerator keys are not acknowledged when the Console window is active.
However, the F1 key displays the help file for the console window.
For the command specifications, refer to the help file displayed by clicking the F1 key.
Opening method
This dialog box can be opened using any one of the following methods.
• In Main window
On the menu bar, select [Browse] Æ [Console].
Press the GRPH + B , N keys, in this sequence.
Window
Figure 6-78. Console Window
Function
Since the key bind is emacs-like, accelerator keys are not acknowledged when the Console window is active.
However, the F1 key displays the help file for the console window.
For the command specifications, refer to the help file displayed by clicking the F1 key.
384
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
The command specifications are listed in the following table.
Table 6-7. Command Specifications
Command Name
Outline
Page
address
Evaluate address expression
p.386
assemble
Disassemble/Line assemble
p.387
breakpoint
Set/delete breakpoint
p.388
batch
Batch execution (with echo)
p.390
download
Download
p.391
errmesg
Display error message
p.392
extwin
Create extension window
p.393
finish
Return from function
p.394
go
Continue execution
p.395
help
Display Help
p.396
hook
Set hook
p.397
ie
IE control
p.398
jump
Jump to window
p.399
map
Set/delete memory mapping
p.400
mdi
Set extension window
p.401
memory
Display/set memory
p.402
module
Display file list, function list
p.403
next
Procedure steps
p.404
refresh
Redraw window
p.405
register
Display/set register value and I/O register value
p.406
reset
Reset
p.407
run
Reset & execute CPU
p.408
step
Step execution
p.409
stop
Stop execution
p.410
upload
Upload
p.411
version
Display version
p.412
watch
Display/set variable value
p.413
where
Trace stack
p.414
wish
Start Tclet
p.415
xcoverage
Coverage manipulation
p.416
xtime
Timer manipulation
p.417
xtrace
Tracer manipulation
p.418
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
385
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
address
Evaluate address expression
Syntax
address expression
Explanation
Converts the address expression specified with expression to an address.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % address main
0xaa
(IDCON) 2 % address main+1
0xab
386
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
assemble
Disassemble/Line assemble
Syntax
assemble ?options? address ?code?
Explanation
Assembles the character string specified with code from the address specified with address. If ‘.’ has been
specified for address, interprets this as the address following the one handled in the immediately preceding assemble
operation.
If code is omitted, disassembles from the address specified with address.
The following options are available. They are ignored in the case of assemble.
-code
Displays instruction code. Ignored in case of assemble.
-number number
Displays number lines. Ignored in case of assemble.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % assemble -n 5 main
0x000000aa
B7
PUSH
HL
0x000000ab
B1
PUSH
AX
0x000000ac
891C
MOVW
AX,SP
0x000000ae
D6
MOVW
HL,AX
0x000000af
A100
MOV
A,#0H
(IDCON) 2 % assemble main mov a,b
(IDCON) 3 % assemble . mov a,b
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
387
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
breakpoint
Set/delete breakpoint
Syntax
breakpoint ?options? ?address1? ?address2?
breakpoint -delete brkno
breakpoint -enable brkno
breakpoint -disable brkno
breakpoint -information
Explanation
Manipulates the breakpoint set with options and address.
A breakpoint number is returned when a breakpoint is correctly set.
The following options are available.
388
-software
Specifies software break.
-hardware
Specifies hardware break (default).
-execute
Sets address execution break (default).
-beforeexecute
Sets break before address execution
-read
Sets address data read break.
-write
Sets address data write break.
-access
Sets address data access break.
-size size
Sets access size (8, 16, or 32)
-data value
Sets data condition.
-datamask value
Sets data mask.
-extprobe value
Sets external sense data condition.
-extprobemask value
Sets external sense data mask.
-pass value
Sets pass count.
-information
Displays breakpoint list.
-delete
Deletes breakpoint of specified number.
-disable
Disables breakpoint of specified number.
-enable
Enables breakpoint of specified number.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
Description
example
(IDCON) 19 % breakpoint main
1
(IDCON) 20 % breakpoint -i
1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17
(IDCON) 21 % breakpoint -software sub1
2
(IDCON) 22 % breakpoint -i
1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17
2 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#8
(IDCON) 23 % breakpoint -disable 2
(IDCON) 24 % breakpoint -i
1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17
2 Brk00001 disable rammon.c#8
(IDCON) 25 % breakpoint -delete 1
2 Brk00001 disable rammon.c#8
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
389
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
batch
Batch execution (with echo)
Syntax
batch scriptname
Explanation
Executes at one time all the files selected with scriptname while displaying them on the screen.
Nesting is supported.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % clear
(IDCON) 2 % batch bat_file.tcl
(IDCON) 3 % tkcon save a:/log.txt
390
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
download
Download
Syntax
download ?options? filename ?offset?
Explanation
Downloads the file specified with filename according to the selected options.
If offset is specified, offsets addresses by the offset value.
-binary
Downloads binary format data.
-coverage
Downloads coverage data.
-append
Performs additional download.
-nosymbol
Performs download without reading symbol information.
-reset
Resets CPU following download.
-information
Displays downloaded information.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % download test.lmf
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
391
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
errmesg
Display error message
Syntax
errmesg errno
Explanation
Displays the error message corresponding to errno.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % errmesg 2
0002(F): This function is not supported.
392
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
extwin
Create extension window
Syntax
extwin scriptfile
Explanation
Creates extension window with scriptfile.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % extwin d:/foo.tcl
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
393
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
finish
Return from function
Syntax
finish
Explanation
Performs execution until return to the program that called the current function.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % finish
394
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
go
Continue execution
Syntax
go ?options?
Explanation
Continues the program execution. If -waitbreak is specified, waits until the program stops.
The following option is available.
-waitbreak
-waitbreak: Waits until program stops.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % go -w
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
395
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
help
Display Help
Syntax
help
Explanation
Displays the Dcl Help file.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % help
396
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
hook
Set hook
Syntax
hook scriptfile
Explanation
Sets the hook procedure with scriptfile.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % hook d:/foo.tcl
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
397
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
ie
IE control
Syntax
ie reg address ?value?
ie dcu address ?value?
Explanation
The ie command is IE-dependent.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % ie reg 0x100 1
(IDCON) 2 % ie dcu 0x100 1
398
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
jump
Jump to window
Syntax
jump -source -line filename ?line?
jump ?options? address
Explanation
Displays the window specified with the options.
-source
Displays Source window from address specified with address.
-assemble
Displays Assemble window from address specified with address.
-memory
Displays Memory window from address specified with address.
-coverage
Displays Coverage window from address specified with address.
-line
Moves to the line specified with line.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % jump -s main
(IDCON) 2 % jump -s -l mainfile.c 10
(IDCON) 3 % jump -m array
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
399
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
map
Set/delete memory mapping
Syntax
map options address1 address2 ?accsize?
Explanation
Displays the window specified with the options.
-source
Displays Source window from address specified with address.
-assemble
Displays Assemble window from address specified with address.
-memory
Displays Memory window from address specified with address.
-coverage
Displays Coverage window from address specified with address.
-line
Moves to the line specified with line.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % map -i
1: 0 0x7fff 8 {IROM}
2: 0x8000 0x87ff 8 {Target RRM}
3: 0x8800 0x9fff 8 {Target}
4: 0xa000 0xf7ff 8 {NonMap}
5: 0xf800 0xfaff - {NonMap}
6: 0xfb00 0xfedf 8 {Saddr}
7: 0xfee0 0xfeff 8 {Register}
8: 0xff00 0xffff 8 {SFR}
(IDCON) 2 % map -erom 0x100000 0x10ffff
(IDCON) 3 % map -c
400
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
mdi
Set extension window
Syntax
mdi geometry ?x y? width height
mdi title string
Explanation
Specifies the size and title of the extension window.
This command can be used only from the extension window.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % mdi geometry 0 0 100 100
(IDCON) 2 % mdi title foo
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
401
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
memory
Display/set memory
Syntax
memory ?options? address ?value?
memory ?options? -fill address1 address2 value
memory ?options? -copy address1 address2 address3
Explanation
Sets the value according to the options in the memory of the address specified with address.
When value is omitted, displays the value of the memory of the address specified with address.
When -fill is specified, fills the interval between address 1 and address 2 with value.
When -copy is specified, copies the interval between address 1 and address 2 to address 3.
The following options are available.
-byte
Displays/sets in 1-byte units (default).
-word
Displays/sets in 1-word units.
-fill
Fill data.
-copy
Copies data.
Description
example
(IDCON)
0x10
(IDCON)
(IDCON)
0x02
(IDCON)
402
1 % memory 100
2 % memory 100 2
3 % memory 100
4 % memory -fill 0 1ff 0
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
module
Display file list, function list
Syntax
module progname ?filename?
Explanation
Displays the file list, function list of the load module file specified with progname. If no filename is specified,
displays the file list. If filename is specified, displays the function list of the specified file.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 %
1: rammon.c
(IDCON) 2 %
1: rammon.c
2: rammon.c
module rammon.lmf
module rammon.lmf rammon.c
sub1
main
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
403
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
next
Procedure steps
Syntax
next ?options?
Explanation
Executes the procedure steps. If function call is performed, stops after that function is executed.
The following options are available.
-source
Executes in source line units (default).
-instruction
Executes in instruction units.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % next -i
(IDCON) 2 % next -s
404
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
refresh
Redraw window
Syntax
refresh
Explanation
Redraws the window and updates it with the latest data.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % batch foo.tcl
(IDCON) 2 % refresh
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
405
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
register
Display/set register value and I/O register value
Syntax
register ?options? regname ?value?
Explanation
Sets value to the register specified with regname. If value is omitted, displays value of register specified with
regname.
The following options are available.
-force
Performs forced read.
-bankno bankno
Specifies bank No.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % register pc
0x100
(IDCON) 2 % register pc 200
(IDCON) 3 % register pc
0x200
406
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
reset
Reset
Syntax
reset ?options?
Explanation
Resets the CPU, debugger, or symbol.
If options are omitted, resets the CPU.
The following options are available.
-cpu
Resets the CPU (default).
-debugger
Resets the debugger.
-symbol
Resets the symbol.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % reset
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
407
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
run
Reset & execute CPU
Syntax
run ?options?
Explanation
Executes the program following reset. If -waitbreak is not specified, does not wait for the program to stop.
The following option is available.
-waitbreak
Waits until the program stops.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % run
(IDCON) 2 % run -w
408
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
step
Step execution
Syntax
step ?options?
Explanation
Performs step execution. If function call is performed, stops at the start of that function.
The following options are available.
-source
Executes in source line units (default).
-instruction
Executes in instruction units.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % step -i
(IDCON) 2 % step -s
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
409
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
stop
Stop execution
Syntax
stop
Explanation
Forcibly stops the program.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % run
(IDCON) 2 % stop
410
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
upload
Upload
Syntax
upload ?options? filename address1 address2
Explanation
Saves the memory data or coverage data in the specified address range to a file.
The following options are available.
-binary
Saves in the binary format.
-coverage
Saves coverage data.
-intel
Saves in the Intel HEX format (default).
-motorola
Saves in the Motorola HEX format.
-tektronix
Saves in the Tektronix HEX format.
-force
Overwrites the file.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % upload -b foo.hex 0 0xffff
(IDCON) 2 % upload -c -f foo.cov 0 0xffff
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
411
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
version
Display version
Syntax
version
Explanation
Displays the debugger version.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % version
GUI
:
E2.00y [31-May-99]
Devicefile
: 78K0[uPD780034] E1.01a
Debugger
: 78K/0 Debugger E2.50c [02-
Apr-99]
Executer
Packet translator
Assembler
: 78K/0 Executer E1.3c
: 78K/0 Packet E2.00w
: 78K/0 Asm/Disasm E1.15a
[01-Apr-99]
Tcl/Tk
412
: 8.1.1
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
watch
Display/set variable value
Syntax
watch ?options? variable ?value?
Explanation
Displays and sets the value of the variable.
The following options are available.
-binary
Displays the value in binary.
-octal
Displays the value in octal.
-decimal
Displays the value in decimal.
-hexdecimal
Displays the value in hexadecimal.
-string
Displays the value as a character string.
-sizeof
Displays the size of the variable instead of its value in hexadecimal.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % watch var
0x10
(IDCON) 2 % watch -d var
16
(IDCON) 3 % watch array\[0\] 0xa
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
413
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
where
Trace stack
Syntax
where
Explanation
Back traces stacks.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % where
1: test2.c#sub2(int i)#13
2: test.c#num(int i)#71
3: test.c#main()#82
414
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
wish
Start Tclet
Syntax
wish scriptname
Explanation
Starts script (Tclet) using Tk.
Extension windows can be created with Tclet.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % wish test.tcl
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
415
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
xcoverage
Coverage manipulation
Syntax
xcoverage option
Explanation
Manipulates coverage.
The following options are available.
-start
Starts coverage during program execution.
-stop
Stops coverage during program execution.
-clear
Clears the coverage memory.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % xcoverage -start
(IDCON) 2 % xcoverage -stop
(IDCON) 3 % xcoverage -clear
416
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
xtime
Timer manipulation
Syntax
xtime option
Explanation
Manipulates the timer.
The following options are available.
-start
Starts the timer during program execution.
-stop
Stops the timer during program execution.
-gobreak
Displays the time between go-breaks as a number of clocks.
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % xtime -start
(IDCON) 2 % xtime -stop
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
417
CHAPTER 6
WINDOW REFERENCE
xtrace
Tracer manipulation
Syntax
xtrace -dump ?-append? frameno ?filename?
xtrace -start
xtrace -stop
xtrace -clear
xtrace -addup bool
xtrace -mode mode
Explanation
Manipulates the tracer.
The following options are available.
-start
Starts the tracer during program execution.
-stop
Stops the tracer during program execution.
-clear
Clears the trace memory.
-dump
Dumps the trace data (default)
When a file name is specified, writes the trace data to that file.
-append
Appends the dump result to the file.
-addup bool
Selects whether to add up time tags.
-mode mode
Selects the trace control mode (all, cond, nonstop, fullstop, fullbreak,
delaystop, delaybreak, machine, or event).
Description
example
(IDCON) 1 % xtrace -start
(IDCON) 2 % xtrace -stop
(IDCON) 3 % xtrace -dump 3
_ 01685 2 000000BC M1 br _sub2+0x2
_ 01686 4 0000009A BRM1 st.w r6, 0x8[sp]
_ 01687 3 0000009E BRM1 st.w r0, 0x0[sp]
(IDCON) 4 % xtrace -clear
(IDCON) 5 % xtrace -addup true
418
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX A
DEBUGGING WITH ID78K SERIES
This appendix explains the basic debugging operation using the ID78K Series.
For the details of each window and dialog box mentioned in this section, refer to CHAPTER 6
WINDOW
REFERENCE.
(1) Setting debug environment
Set the operating environment of debugger.
If a previous debug environment has been saved to a project file, the debug environment can be restored by
loading that file. The procedure differs as follows depending on whether a project file is used or not.
(a) When project file is not used
<1> Set all the items in the Configuration dialog box.
<2> Set the extended options in the Extended Option dialog box.
<3> Set the debug options in the Debugger Option dialog box.
(Caution Always specify the startup symbol.)
(b) When project file is used
• When project file is used at startup
<1> Click Project… in the Configuration dialog box.
→ The Project File Load dialog box will open.
<2> Specify the project file name and click OK .
→ The project file will be loaded.
The following procedure can also be used.
<1> Select [Run] from the Start menu in Windows.
<2> Use the Browse button to specify the file to be executed, IDK032A.EXE (for the ID78K0-NS).
<3> After IDK032A.EXE (for the ID78K0-NS), specify the name of the project file to be used
(eg. A:\nectools32\bin\IDK032A.EXE∆B:\Test\Test1.prj (∆ = space)).
<4> Click OK .
• When project file is used during debugging
<1> Select [File] → [Project] → [Open] in the main window, or click the
button.
→ The Project File Load dialog box will open.
<2> Specify the project file name and click OK .
→ The project file will be loaded.
(2) Download load module file
(a) Download the load module file to be debugged.
→ Download dialog box
(b) Confirming loaded files
→ Load Module List dialog box
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
419
APPENDIX A
DEBUGGING WITH ID78K SERIES
(3) Display disassemble result
Display the result of disassembling the downloaded user program.
→ Assemble window
The method of displaying the disassemble display label column and mnemonic column can be changed.
→ Debugger Option dialog box
(4) Display source program
Display the source program. A program whose source can be debugged must have debug information
compiled with the -g option specified.
→ Source window
(a) Setting source path information, display font, and source file extension
→ Debugger Option dialog box
(b) Selecting source file
→ Browse dialog box
(c) Source file and disassemble
→ Select [View] → [Mix] when the source text file is the current window.
(5) Setting of event
(a) Registering event conditions and event link conditions
→ Event dialog box
Event Link dialog box
(b) Setting of event conditions
Set event conditions by using the event icons in the Event Manager or in the event manager area of
various event setting dialog boxes (however, breakpoints can be set in the Source window/Assemble
window).
• Trace event condition
→ Trace dialog box
• Break event condition
→ Break dialog box
• Timer event condition
→ Timer dialog box
• Snap event condition
→ Snap Shot dialog box
• DMM event condition
→ DMM dialog box
(c) Checking setting of event conditions
→ Event Manager, the event manager area in each event setting dialog box
420
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX A
DEBUGGING WITH ID78K SERIES
(6) Executing user program
By executing the user program, the value of the PC advances to the set breakpoint, break event or forced
break.
• Types of execution
→ Execution control buttons on the toolbar in the main window, or [Run] menu
(7) Checking trace data
→ Trace View window
(8) Editing, checking, and changing contents of memory
→ Memory window
Memory Copy dialog box
Memory Fill dialog box
Memory Compare dialog box
Memory Compare Result dialog box
(9) Registering, checking, and changing variable values
→ Quick Watch dialog box
Add Watch dialog box
Watch window
Local Variable window
(10) Checking contents of stack
→ Stack window
(11) Checking and changing registered contents of register value
→ Register window
SFR window
The PC register value can also be checked in the Source and Assemble windows.
(12) Checking and changing contents of SFR
→ SFR window
SFR Select dialog box
(13) Registering, checking, and changing user-defined I/O port value
→ Add I/O Port dialog box
SFR window
(14) Changing mnemonics and executing on-line assemble
→ Assemble window
Source window
(15) Checking execution time of user program
→ Timer dialog box
Timer Result dialog box
Trace View window
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
421
APPENDIX A
DEBUGGING WITH ID78K SERIES
(16) Checking coverage measurement result
→ Coverage window
Coverage-Clear dialog box
Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box
Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box
(17) Searching character string in each window
→ Source Search dialog box
Assemble Search dialog box
Memory Search dialog box
Trace Search dialog box
Coverage Search dialog box
(18) Referencing “display file” saved in previous debugging process
→ View File Load dialog box
(19) Saving screen contents to “display file” during debugging
→ View File Save dialog box
(20) Uploading memory contents and coverage results
→ Upload dialog box
(21) Saving debug environment to project file
→ Project File Save dialog box
(22) Terminating ID78K Series
→ Exit Debugger dialog box
422
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX B
TERMINOLOGY
Words and window types (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE) used in this document are described
below.
B.1 Terminology
The following words are described in this document.
• Debugging mode
• Current window
• Delimiter symbol (separator)
• Program
• Current program
• File
• Current file
• Function
• Current function
• Structure
• Stack frame number
• Line
• Register name
• Numeric value
• Address
• Symbol
• Expression and operator
• Character set
Each word and the input conventions are explained below.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
423
APPENDIX B
TERMINOLOGY
(1) Debugging mode
Execution of the user program can be controlled in the following three debugging modes.
• Source mode
Step execution is performed in units of one line of a source text.
• Instruction mode
Step execution is performed in instruction units.
• Automatic mode
This mode automatically switches between source mode and instruction mode.
In this mode, when the Source window is active, step execution is performed in units of 1 line of source
text (instruction units for mixed display), and when the Assemble window is active, step execution is
performed in instruction units. When neither window is active, this mode becomes instruction mode.
These three debugging modes are selected from the “Option menu” of the main window. When starting the
debugger, the automatic mode is selected as the default.
(2) Current window
The current window is the window in which an operation is currently being performed.
In this window,
information can be input from the keyboard and menus can be selected.
(3) Delimiter symbol (separator)
A file, function, variable, or line can be specified by using the delimiter symbols listed in Table B-1.
Table B-1. Delimiter Symbols
Symbol
Specification
#
Used as a separator between file names and variable/function names and line numbers.
$
Used as a separator between load module names and file, variable, and function names.
(4) Program
A program is the executable unit that is subject to debugging. The ID78K Series deals with each load module
file specified when downloading as one program. The name of a program is specified by using the name of
the load module file that is downloaded.
(5) Current program
The current program is the program that contains the instruction for a break currently taking place (i.e., the
instruction indicated by the program counter (PC)).
When specifying a file in the current program, specifying the program name may be omitted.
(6) File
The allowable number of characters in a file name is up to 127 characters in a full path.
Depending on the file type, it may be possible to specify a file name with more than 127 characters.
424
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX B
TERMINOLOGY
(7) Current file
The current file is the source file that has the instruction for a break currently taking place (i.e., the instruction
indicated by the program counter (PC)).
When specifying a line or function in the current file by using a command, the file name can be omitted.
(8) Function
Functions constitute a C source program.
(9) Current function
The current function is the function that has the instruction for a break currently taking place (i.e., the
instruction indicated by the program counter (PC)). When accessing a local variable in the current function,
specifying the function name can be omitted.
(10) Structure
Structures and unions of the C language are generically referred to as “structures”. When a structure or
union variable is used without explicitly specifying a member, the term “structure” is used.
(11) Stack frame number
A stack frame number is a decimal number starting from 1. The stack contents are displayed numbered. The
shallower the nesting of the stack, the higher the number. Therefore, a function having a stack number 1 less
than the stack number of another function calls that function.
(12) Line
A line is specified to identify a certain line in the source file.
Line numbers are specified by an integer constant that starts from 1.
(13) Register name
A register name is specified by the absolute name of a system register or general-purpose register of the
78K/0, 78K/0S, and 78K/IV Series microcontrollers listed in Table B-2, or by the alias of a register.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
425
APPENDIX B
TERMINOLOGY
Table B-2. Register Set of 78K Series
Register Type
Register Name
Absolute Name
System registers
Alias
PC
PSW
SP
General-purpose
registers
r0
zero
r1
r2
r3
sp
r4
gp
r5
tp
r6
r7
r8Note
r9Note
r10Note
r11Note
r12Note
r13Note
r14Note
r15Note
Note r8 to r15 are supported only for the 78K/IV Series.
(14)Numeric value
The following four types of numeric values can be used.
• Binary
Input format:
nY
n…nY (n = 0, 1)
• Octal
Input format:
nO
n…nO (n = 0 to 7)
nQ
n…nQ (n = 0 to 7)
• Decimal
Input format:
n
n…n
nT
n…nT (n = 0 to 9)
426
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX B
• Hexadecimal Input format:
TERMINOLOGY
n
n…n
nH
n…nH
0xn
0xn…n (n = 0 to F)
Cautions 1. Suffixes (Y, O, Q, T, H, 0x) and the alphabetical characters in hexadecimal numbers are
not case sensitive.
2. If the first character is one of A to F, a 0 must be affixed in front.
3. The radix in the input column switches between decimal and hexadecimal in
accordance with the default radix.
(15) Address
• An address is specified by directly specifying a numeric value.
• An address can also be specified by using a symbol or expression.
• When specifying an address by using a numeric value, hexadecimal, decimal, octal, or binary numbers
can be used.
(16) Symbol
• A symbol consists of characters A to Z, a to z, @, _ (underline), and 0 to 9.
• A symbol must begin with a character other than numerals 0 through 9.
• This software distinguishes between uppercase (A to Z) and lowercase (a to z) characters.
• A symbol name can consist of up to 256 characters.
• If a symbol exceeding 256 characters is specified, the first 256 characters are valid.
• A symbol is defined by loading a load module file.
• Symbols can be classified into the following types by the valid range.
(a) Global symbols (assembly language, C language)
(b) Static symbols (C language)
Static symbols in files
Static symbols in functions
(c) Local symbols (C language)
Local symbols in files
Local symbols in functions
Local symbols in blocks
• The following symbols exist in each of the languages used.
(a) Assembly language
Label names
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
427
APPENDIX B
TERMINOLOGY
(b) C language
Variable names (including pointer function names, enumerate type variable names, array names,
structure name, and union names)
Function names, label names
Array elements, structure elements, union elements (if the symbol is an array, structure, or union)
• A symbol can be described instead of an address and numeric value.
• The valid range of symbols is determined based on the source debugging information when the source file
is assembled or compiled.
• A global symbol only describes a symbol name.
• A local symbol is expressed as a pair with a file name.
(17) Expression and operator
<Expression>
• An expression consists of constants, register names, SFR names, and symbols combined by operators.
• If an SFR name, label name, function name, or variable name is described as a symbol, an address is
calculated as the value of the symbol.
• Elements constituting an expression, other than operators, are called terms (constants and labels). Terms
are called the first term, second term, and so on, in the sequence they are described, starting from the one
on the left.
<Operator>
• The following operators of C language can be used.
Arithmetic operators
Symbol
Meaning
Remark
+
Addition
Returns sum of values of first and second terms
−
Subtraction
Returns difference in value between first and second terms
*
Multiplication
Returns product of values of first and second terms
/
Division
Divides value of first term by value of second term, and returns integer of
result
MOD, %
Remainder
Divides value of first term by value of second term, and returns remainder
of result
− sign
Unary operation (negative)
Returns two’s complement of value of term
+ sign
Unary operation (positive)
Returns two’s complement of value of term
Logical operators
Symbol
428
Meaning
Remark
NOT
~
Negation
NOTs each bit of term, and returns result.
AND
&
Logical product
ANDs each bit of values of first and second terms, and returns result
OR
|
Logical sum
ORs each bit of values of first and second terms, and returns result
XOR
^
Exclusive logical sum
Exclusive-ORs each bit of values of first and second terms, and returns result
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX B
TERMINOLOGY
Shift operators
Symbol
Meaning
Remark
SHR
>>
Right shift
Right shifts the first term the amount of the value (bit number) expressed by
the second term and returns the result. The number of higher bits shifted are
replaced with 0.
SHL
<<
Left shift
Left shifts the first term the amount of the value (bit number) expressed by
the second term and returns the result. The number of lower bits shifted are
replaced with 0.
Byte resolution operators
Symbol
Meaning
Remark
HIGH
Higher byte
The higher 8 bits of the term’s lower 16 bits are returned.
LOW
Lower byte
The lower 8 bits of the term’s lower 16 bits are returned.
Word resolution operators
Symbol
Meaning
Remark
HIGHW
Higher word
The higher 16 bits of the term’s 32 bits are returned.
LOWW
Lower word
The lower 16 bits of the term’s 32 bits are returned.
Others
Symbol
Meaning
(
Left parenthesis
)
Right parenthesis
Remark
Executes operation in ( ) before operations outside ( )
Cautions 1. Parentheses “(” and “)” must always be used in pairs.
2. Operations are performed in compliance with the following rules.
• The operation sequence is in accordance with the priority of the operator.
• When the priority of operators is the same, the operation sequence is from left to
right.
• The operation within parentheses is executed before the operations outside the
parentheses.
• Each term of an operation is treated as unsigned 32-bit data.
• All the operation results are treated as unsigned 32-bit data.
• If an overflow occurs during operation, the lower 32 bits are treated as valid, and the
overflow is not detected.
3. The priority of the operator is as follows.
Priority
Operator
1
↑
2
Higher
(, )
+ sign, – sign, NOT, ~, HIGH, LOW, HIGHW, LOWW
3
*, /, MOD, %, SHR, >>, SHL, <<
4
+, –
5
Lower
6
↓
AND, &
OR, I, XOR, ^
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
429
APPENDIX B
TERMINOLOGY
<Term>
• The following numeric values can be described when a constant is described as a term.
(a) Binary
0Y ≤ numeric value ≤ 11111111111111111111111111111111Y (32 digits)
(b) Octal
0O ≤ numeric value ≤ 37777777777O
(c) Decimal
−2147483648 ≤ numeric value ≤ 4294967295
A negative decimal number is internally converted into two’s complement.
(d) Hexadecimal
0H ≤ numeric value ≤ 0FFFFFFFFH
(18)Character set
With the ID78K Series, the following character set can be used.
Character set
Symbol
Alphabet
character
430
Description
Uppercase characters
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Lowercase characters
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Numerals
0123456789
Alphabet equivalent characters
@_
Special characters
.,:;*/%+−’”<>()![]&\^|~#=$?‘{}
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX B
TERMINOLOGY
Other character set
Character
Name
Main Usage
.
Period
Direct member operator, bit position specifier
,
Comma
Delimiter of operands
*
Asterisk
Multiplication operator or indirect reference operator
/
Slash
Division operator
%
Percent
Remainder operator
+
Plus
Positive sign or addition operator
−
Minus
Negative sign or subtraction operator
(
Left parenthesis
Changes operation sequence
)
Right parenthesis
Changes operation sequence
[
Left bracket
Base register specification symbol, array subscript operator
]
Right bracket
Base register specification symbol, array subscript operator
&
Ampersand
Address operator or bit AND operator
^
Control
Bit XOR operator
|
Vertical line
Bit OR operator
~
Tilde
Complement operator
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
431
APPENDIX B
TERMINOLOGY
B.2 Window Types and Configuration
The ID78K Series debuggers consist of windows and dialog boxes.
Basically, a window can be opened by using an icon, while a dialog box cannot.
B.2.1 Windows
Windows are broadly divided into the following two types.
• Main windows
• MDI child windows
MDI child windows cannot be displayed outside of the main window frame.
B.2.2 Dialog boxes
Dialog boxes can be classified into the following two types.
• Modal dialog boxes
• Modeless dialog boxes
(1) Modal dialog boxes
When this type of dialog box is open, the user cannot access other windows or dialog boxes until the dialog
box is exited.
When the dialog box is closed after the operation in the dialog box has been completed or by selecting the
Cancel button of the dialog box, other windows and dialog boxes can be accessed.
(2) Modeless dialog boxes
Unlike a modal dialog box, the user can access other windows and dialog boxes even if the operation in the
dialog box has not been completed.
432
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
The error messages displayed in the ID78K Series consist of Error No. + Type + Message .
Figure C-1. Display Format of Error Message
Error number
When the
OK
Type
Message
button is clicked, the Error Message window is closed, and the operation is performed in
accordance with the message.
The error type is identified by the following three uppercase characters.
Table C-1. Error Message Type
Type
Meaning
A
Fatal error (Abort Error).
The processing is aborted and the debugger is terminated. If this error occurs, the
debugging work cannot be continued.
F
Syntax error (Fatal Error).
The processing is aborted, and all open windows and dialog boxes are closed.
W
Warning.
The processing is aborted. Open windows and dialog boxes are not closed.
Table C-2 lists the error messages.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
433
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (1/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
0002
F
This feature is not supported.
This function is not supported.
0100
A
Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC
interface board.
Communication with the in-circuit emulator cannot be established. Check that the device driver
for the interface board has been correctly installed.
0101
A
Can not find initialization file (expc.ini).
An initialization file (EXPC.INI) cannot be found.
0102
A
Host name not found.
No host name is found.
0103
A
Data transfer to ICE is timed out. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface
cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board.
Data could not be transmitted to the in-circuit emulator. Check the in-circuit emulator’s power
supply, cable connection, I/O address settings, etc.
0104
A
Data receive from ICE is timed out. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface
cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board.
The in-circuit emulator returns no response. Check the in-circuit emulator’s power supply, cable
connection, I/O address settings, etc.
0105
A
Failed in reading device file (d0xxx.78k).
The device file (d0xxx.78k) could not be correctly read.
0106
A
Illegal data received.
Received data is abnormal.
01a0
A
No response from the evachip. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET, WAIT,
HLDRQ and so on.
There was no response from the evaluation chip. Check that the RESET, WAIT, HLDRQ (etc)
signals or the clock signal are not abnormal.
01a1
A
Failed in reading ie703000.ie.
ie703000.ie could not be correctly read.
01a2
A
Break board is not connected.
The BK board is not connected.
01a3
A
Emulation board is not connected.
The emulation board is not connected.
01a4
A
Board configuration of ICE is not consistent.
The board configuration in the in-circuit emulator is not consistent.
01a5
A
POD/EM1 board is not connected.
The POD/EM1 board is not connected.
01a6
A
Executor is running.
The executor is running.
01a8
A
Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini).
The initialization file (EXPC.INI) has not been correctly read.
01d0
A
Failed in starting simulator.
Simulator startup has failed.
01d1
A
Not enough memory in starting simulator.
The memory at simulator startup is insufficient.
434
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (2/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
0200
F
Verification error.
A verify error.
02a0
F
Bus hold error.
The bus is in the hold status.
02d2
F
Not enough memory for trace-buffer.
Memory for trace frame cannot be allocated.
0300
F
User program is running.
The user program is being executed.
0301
F
User program is being breaked.
The user program is undergoing a break.
0302
F
User program is being traced.
The user program is being traced.
0303
F
Not traced.
Tracer measurement is not performed.
0304
F
Trace memory is not set.
The tracer is off.
0306
F
No trace block exists.
There is no trace block.
0307
F
No event condition exists.
There is no event condition.
0308
F
No timer measurement is done.
Timer measurement is not performed.
0309
F
No trigger frame exists.
There is no trigger frame.
030a
F
Tracer is being stopped.
The tracer is stopped.
030b
F
Specified snap-event has not been registered.
The snap event to be referenced/deleted is not registered.
030d
F
Timer is running.
The timer is operating.
030e
F
Memory copy area is overlapped.
The memory copy range has been overlapped.
030f
F
Trace has been already set.
Trace is already in the ON status.
0310
F
Event condition is not set.
No event condition is set.
0311
F
Too many valid timer event conditions.
The number of valid timer event conditions exceeds the maximum settable number.
0312
F
Specified timer event is not set.
This timer event is not set.
0313
F
Illegal map range.
The map setting is wrong.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
435
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (3/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
03a0
W
Target is not turned on.
Power is not supplied to the target device.
03a1
F
Step execution is being done.
This command is under step execution.
03a2
F
Timer and Tracer are running.
The timer and tracer are operating.
03d0
A
Backtrace is being executed.
Back trace is under execution.
03d1
A
Backtrace is being stopped.
Back trace is stopped.
03d2
A
Backtrace execution point overrun oldest frame.
The back trace execution stop position exceeds the oldest frame.
03d3
A
Illegal AND condition.
AND condition is illegal.
03d4
A
No backtrace information exists.
The back trace information does not exist.
03d5
A
Last command can not be backstepped.
Back step of the last instruction could not be performed.
0400
F
Illegal condition.
The specified condition is illegal.
0401
F
Result of timer measurement overflowed.
The timer measurement result has overflow.
0402
F
Too many event conditions with path count.
Too many event conditions that set path count have been used.
0403
F
Too many address range conditions.
The maximum value of the address range specification condition is exceeded.
0404
F
Too many simultaneously-usable-event conditions.
The maximum number of event conditions that can be used simultaneously is exceeded.
0405
F
Too many snap-events.
The maximum number of snap events that can be set is exceeded.
0407
F
Too many initialization data.
The number of initialized data exceeds the initialization area.
0408
F
Too large search data (> 16 byte).
The searched data exceed 16 bytes.
0409
F
Too large search data (> search range).
The size of the searched data exceeds the size of the search range.
040a
F
Too many Linking-event conditions.
The maximum number of integrated events that can be set is exceeded.
04a0
F
Too many software breaks (> 100).
The number of software breaks exceeds 100.
04a1
F
Not enough memory for emulation.
The memory for emulation is insufficient.
436
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (4/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
04a2
F
Too many partition of bus size.
The maximum number of delimiters of bus size has been exceeded.
04a3
F
Too many execution-event conditions.
The maximum number of execution event conditions has been exceeded.
04a4
F
Too many bus-event conditions.
The maximum number of bus event conditions has been exceeded.
0600
A
Can not allocate buffer.
A buffer could not be allocated.
0c00
F
Monitor file read error.
The monitor file could not be read.
0c20
F
Guarded area can not be accessed.
There was an attempt to access a guarded area.
0c40
F
Different address condition is specified in re-registering event.
The address condition when the event was reregistered was different to the previous one.
0c41
F
Coverage test is being executed.
A coverage test is under execution.
0c60
F
Event number with different condition exits.
An event number with a different condition exists.
0c61
F
Can not register event numbers which can not be used for hardware break.
It is impossible to register event numbers that cannot be used for hardware breaks.
0c62
F
Event numbers reserved for hardware breaks can not be used.
It is impossible to use event numbers that are used for hardware breaks.
0ca0
F
Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface
cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board.
Communication with the in-circuit emulator could not be established. Check the in-circuit
emulator’s power supply, cable connection, I/O address settings, etc.
0ca1
F
Monitor file not found.
The monitor file could not be found.
1000
A
Failed in initializing ICE.
Initializing the in-circuit emulator has failed.
1001
A
No entry exists for specified number.
The entry of the specified number does not exist.
1002
A
Can not relocate internal RAM.
The internal RAM cannot be relocated.
1003
F
Illegal relocation address.
The relocation address is illegal.
1004
F
Illegal condition.
The specified condition is illegal.
1005
A
Invalid attribute.
The attribute is invalid.
1006
F
Illegal address.
The address is illegal.
1007
A
Not enough memory on ICE.
In-circuit emulator alternate memory is short.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
437
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (5/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
1008
A
Can not allocate memory for tables.
Memory for tables cannot be allocated.
1009
A
Already initialized.
Already initialized.
100a
A
Not initialized.
Not initialized yet.
100b
F
User program is running.
The user program is being executed.
100c
F
Different bus size has been already specified.
An attempt was made to set in duplicate an area with different bus size.
100d
F
Too large bus size.
The bus size exceeds the maximum value able to be defined.
100e
F
Too large bus partition size.
The delimiter of bus size has exceeded the maximum value.
100f
W
Target is not turned on.
The power supply of the target is off.
1010
A
Illegal map range.
An illegal map range specification was made.
1011
F
Failed in setting internal ROM and RAM.
Setting the internal ROM and RAM has failed.
1012
F
This feature is not supported.
This function is not supported.
1013
F
No terminal name.
This pin name does not exist.
10ff
A
Can not communicate with ICE.
A communication error has occurred. Communication with the in-circuit emulator cannot be
performed.
1dbe
A
Internal error.
Internal error of the debugger.
2000
F
Illegal I/O register name.
The I/O register name is illegal.
2001
A
Illegal address.
The address is illegal.
2002
F
User program is running.
The user program is being executed.
2003
F
Illegal I/O register number.
An illegal number of I/O registers were specified.
2004
F
Illegal bit number.
The bit position is illegal.
2005
W
Redraw I/O register name.
An I/O register that must not be redrawn is specified.
2006
F
This I/O register is hidden I/O register.
An I/O register with a hidden attribute was specified.
438
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (6/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
2007
F
Can’t read/write.
A read/write disabled I/O register was specified.
2008
F
Too big number.
The specified I/O register does not exist.
2009
A
Error in device file.
A device file error.
200a
F
Illegal value specified for I/O register.
An illegal value was specified for the I/O register.
200b
A
Can not copy.
Copying has failed.
200c
A
Can not allocate memory.
Memory allocation has failed.
20ff
A
Can not communicate with ICE.
A communication error has occurred. Communication with in-circuit emulator cannot be
established.
2222
A
Illegal condition.
The specified condition is illegal.
3000
F
Illegal address.
The address is illegal.
3001
F
Memory has different value.
The memory contents do not match.
3002
F
Illegal source address.
The source address is illegal.
3003
F
Illegal destination address.
The destination address is illegal.
3004
F
Illegal address (source & destination).
Both source address and destination address are illegal.
3005
F
Illegal condition.
The specified condition is illegal.
3006
F
User program is running.
The user program is being executed.
3007
A
Verification error.
Verify error.
3008
F
No condition specified.
A condition has not been specified.
3009
F
Parameter size does not align with access size alignment.
The size of the parameter is not access size aligned.
300a
F
Specified address does not align with access size alignment.
The specified address is not access size aligned.
300b
F
Source address does not align with access size alignment.
The specified address (Source) is not access size aligned.
300c
F
Destination address does not align with access size alignment.
The specified address (Destination) is not access size aligned.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
439
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (7/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
300d
F
Illegal end address.
The end address is illegal.
300e
F
Different access size in specified area.
The access size differs in the specified range.
300f
F
Different access size both in source and destination areas.
The access size differs in the specified range (Source).
3010
F
Different access size in destination area.
The access size differs in the specified range (Destination).
3011
F
Different access size, source & destination.
The access size differs between the specified Source range and the specified Destination range.
3012
A
Can not allocate memory.
Memory allocation has failed.
3013
A
Failed in writing DMM.
Writing DMM has failed.
3014
F
Overflowed mapping area.
The mapping area is exceeded.
3015
A
Interrupted.
Processing is aborted.
3016
F
This feature is not supported.
This function is not supported.
30ff
A
Can not communicate with ICE.
A communication error has occurred. Communication with the in-circuit emulator cannot be
established.
4000
F
Can not delete specified event number.
The specified event number cannot be deleted.
4001
F
Illegal table number.
The specified table number is illegal.
4002
F
Illegal start address.
The start address is illegal.
4003
F
Illegal end address.
The end address is illegal.
4004
F
Illegal status.
The status is illegal.
4005
F
Illegal data.
The data is illegal.
4006
F
Specified event number has been already used.
An attempt was made to specify an event number that has already been used.
4007
F
Too many same events are registered.
The maximum of the number of registered events of the same type is exceeded.
4008
F
Specified event has not been registered.
The specified event is not registered.
4009
F
Illegal data size.
The data size is illegal.
440
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (8/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
400a
F
Illegal mode.
The mode is illegal.
400b
F
Illegal condition.
The specified condition is illegal.
400c
F
Illegal type.
The type is illegal.
400d
F
Too many identical events are registered (>= 32767).
An attempt was made to make registration exceeding 32,767 of the same registered events.
400e
F
Specified event condition does not exist.
The specified event condition does not exist.
400f
F
Illegal event link condition.
An event link condition is illegal.
4010
F
Function not found.
The specified function was not found.
4011
F
Not enough memory.
Application has run out of memory.
4012
F
Timer is being disabled.
The timer is invalid.
4013
W
Access size is different from its mapped bus size.
The access size and mapped bus size differ.
4014
F
Can not use software break.
Software break cannot be used.
4015
F
Can not use event condition specifying address range.
An event condition with a range specified cannot be used for an address condition.
4016
F
Can not change event condition.
The event condition cannot be changed.
4017
F
Can not access word at odd address.
Word access to an odd address cannot be performed.
4018
A
Not enough memory.
Application has run out of memory.
4019
F
Not support.
This function is not supported.
401a
F
No Event.
There is no event.
401b
F
Can not use tag-event.
A tag event cannot be used.
4318
F
Illegal memory bank setting.
The setting of the memory bank is illegal.
5000
A
Illegal type.
The type is illegal.
5001
A
Can not allocate memory.
Memory allocation has failed.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
441
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (9/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
5002
A
Can not open device file.
Opening the device file has failed.
5003
A
Can not seek device file.
Seeking the device file has failed.
5004
A
Can not close device file.
Closing the device file has failed.
5005
A
Illegal device file format.
The format of the device file is wrong.
5006
A
Failed in initializing ICE.
Initializing the in-circuit emulator has failed.
5007
A
Device information does not exist.
Device information is missing.
5008
F
Can not open device file.
The specified device file cannot be opened.
5009
F
Can not open ie703000.ie.
ie703000.ie cannot be opened.
500a
F
Specified device file is illegal version.
The version of the device file is illegal.
500b
W
Specified device file does not relocate IRAM.
This device file does not relocate IRAM.
500c
A
Failed in reading expc.ini.
The initialization file (EXPC.INI) cannot be correctly read.
500d
A
Not enough memory.
The memory has run short.
5300
A
Illegal type.
The type is illegal.
5301
A
Can not allocate memory.
Memory allocation has failed.
5302
A
Can not open database file.
The database file could not be opened.
5303
A
Can not seek database file.
The database file could not be searched.
5304
A
Can not close database file.
The database file could not be closed.
5305
A
Illegal device format.
The format of the database file is illegal.
5306
A
Database information has been already initialized.
Initialization of the database information is already finished.
5307
A
Database information does not exist.
There is no database information.
5308
F
Can not open specified database file.
The specified database file could not be opened.
442
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (10/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
5309
F
Specified database file is illegal version.
The version of the database file is illegal.
6000
F
Current function does not exist.
The current function does not exist.
6001
F
Illegal symbol name.
The symbol name is illegal.
6002
F
Illegal condition.
The specified condition is illegal.
6003
F
Illegal function name.
The function name is illegal.
6004
F
Overflowed output buffer size.
The data size exceeds that of the output buffer.
6005
F
Illegal expression.
The expression is illegal.
7000
F
Illegal mode.
The specified mode is wrong.
7001
F
User program is running.
The user program is being executed.
7002
F
User program has been stopped.
The user program is being stopped.
7003
F
Trace enabled.
Trace is being executed.
7004
F
Trace memory is not set.
The trace memory is OFF.
7005
F
Function return address does not exist, can not do step execution.
The return address of the function does not exist. Step execution is not performed.
7010
W
No source information exists.
The source information is missing.
7011
W
Unknown result of step execution.
The result of step execution is unknown.
7012
A
Not enough memory.
Application has run out of memory.
70fe
A
Bus hold error.
The bus is in the hold status.
70ff
A
Can not communicate with ICE.
A communication error has occurred. Communication with the in-circuit emulator cannot be
established.
7801
F
Canceled step wait.
The wait status following completion of step execution has been canceled.
7802
F
Interrupted step execution.
Step execution processing was aborted.
7f00
F
Aborted step execution.
Step execution processing was forcibly terminated.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
443
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (11/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
7f02
F
Suspended step execution.
Step execution was aborted.
7f03
A
Failed in canceling RUN/STEP.
Canceling RUN/STEP has failed.
7f04
F
Can not execute non-mapped area.
An attempt is made to execute from an area not mapped.
7f05
F
This feature is not supported.
This function is not supported.
8000
F
File not found.
The specified file is not found.
8001
F
Illegal line number.
The line number is illegal.
8002
F
Current information is not set.
The current information is not set.
8003
F
Illegal address.
The address is illegal.
8004
F
This feature is not supported.
This function is not supported.
9000
A
Specified register symbol does not exist.
The specified register symbol does not exist.
9001
A
Specified register symbol ID does not exist.
The specified register symbol ID does not exist.
9002
F
Illegal value.
The specified value is illegal.
9003
A
Illegal condition.
The specified condition is illegal.
9004
A
Too large register size.
The register size is too big.
9005
F
This feature is not supported.
This function is not supported.
a001
F
Illegal expression.
The expression is illegal.
a002
F
Start address is bigger than the end address.
The start and end address specifications have been reversed.
a003
F
Illegal source path.
The specified source path information is illegal.
a004
F
Too long expression.
The expression is too long.
a005
A
Not enough memory.
Application has run out of memory.
a006
F
Illegal argument.
The argument is illegal.
444
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (12/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
a007
A
Illegal program number.
The program number is wrong.
a008
F
Source path is not set.
The source path is not set.
a009
F
File not found.
The file is not found.
a00a
F
Can not open file.
Opening the file has failed.
a00b
A
Can not close file.
Closing the file has failed.
a00c
A
Failed in reading file.
Reading the file has failed.
a00d
F
Not source file of load module.
This is not the load module’s source file.
a00e
F
Illegal line number.
The line number is illegal.
a00f
F
Variable does not exist.
The variable does not exist.
a010
A
Can not communicate with ICE.
A communication error has occurred. Communication with the in-circuit emulator cannot be
established.
a011
F
Can not access register.
The register cannot be accessed.
a012
F
Can not access memory.
The memory (variable) cannot be accessed.
a013
F
Can not seek file.
Seeking a file has failed.
a014
F
This is binary file.
This is a binary file.
a015
F
Can not get temporary path.
A temporary path could not be allocated.
a016
F
Can not create temporary file.
A temporary file could not be created.
a017
F
Can not remove temporary file.
A temporary file could not be deleted.
a020
F
This feature is not supported.
This function is not supported.
a021
F
Specified symbol is assigned to register.
The specified symbol has already been assigned to a register.
b000
F
Illegal command line.
The command line is illegal.
b001
F
Program information does not exist in specified load module file.
The load module file does not have program information.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
445
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (13/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
b002
F
File not found.
The file is not found.
b003
F
Function not found.
The function is not found.
b004
F
Illegal magic number.
The magic number is illegal.
b005
F
Symbol not found.
The symbol is not found.
b008
F
Illegal expression.
The expression is illegal.
b009
A
Not enough memory.
Application has run out of memory.
b00a
F
Illegal symbol in load module file.
An illegal symbol exists in the load module file.
b00b
F
Current program does not exist.
The current program does not exist.
b00c
F
Current file does not exist.
The current file does not exist.
b00d
A
Current function does not exist.
A current function does not exist.
b00e
A
Current line does not exist.
A current line does not exist.
b00f
A
Tag not found.
No tag is found.
b010
A
Failed in loading symbol table.
Loading the symbol table has failed.
b011
A
Illegal line number.
The line number is illegal.
b012
F
Too large line number.
The line number is too large.
b015
A
Failed in reading file.
Reading the file has failed.
b016
A
Can not open file.
Opening the file has failed.
b017
A
Failed in writing file.
Writing the file has failed.
b019
A
Can not seek file.
Seeking the file has failed.
b01a
A
Can not close file.
Closing the file has failed.
b01b
A
Too long load module file name.
The file name of the load module is too long.
446
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (14/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
b01c
A
Too many entries of the task kind.
There are too many task classification entries.
b01d
F
Address not found.
The address does not exist.
b01e
W
No line information (not compile with -g).
There is no line information (it was not compiled using -g).
b01f
F
Can not find structure member.
The member of the structure cannot be found.
b020
F
Can not find value.
The value could not be found.
b021
F
No symbol information exists in load module file.
The load module file does not have symbol information.
b022
F
Illegal line number.
The line number is illegal.
b023
A
Current stack frame is not active.
The current stack frame is not active.
b024
A
Different section.
The section is wrong.
b026
F
Too many array dimensions (> 4).
The displayed array exceeds the fourth dimension.
b027
F
Found end of file.
The file ends in the middle.
b028
F
This feature is not supported.
This function is not supported.
b029
F
Illegal address.
The address is illegal.
b02a
A
Can not communicate with ICE.
A communication error has occurred. Communication between in-circuit emulator cannot be
established.
b02b
F
Can not stack trace with current PC value.
Stack trace cannot be executed with the current PC value.
b02c
F
Too many blocks for one function.
The maximum number of blocks allowable in 1 function has been exceeded.
b02d
F
Illegal argument.
The argument passed to the function is illegal.
b02e
A
Path not found.
The specified path is not found.
b02f
A
Information has been deleted because of optimization.
Information has been deleted as a result of optimization.
b030
A
Monitor timed out.
Timeout for the monitor.
b031
A
Already set in memory.
Already set on the memory.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
447
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (15/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
b032
A
Out of scope.
Out of scope.
b033
A
LP is not stored.
LP has not been stored.
b034
A
Inside of prologue or epilogue.
Within the prologue or epilogue.
b036
W
Out of variable region.
The specified variable cannot be referenced by the current PC.
b037
F
Too Many Line-Numbers Information.
There is too much line information.
b038
F
Compiler version missmatch.
Because this compiler version is not supported, the debug information could not be loaded.
b039
A
Failed in loading debug information.
The debug information could not be loaded.
b03a
A
No more section information.
There is no section information.
b040
A
Specified file is not load module.
The specified file is not in a load module format.
b041
A
Too many files in load module to download.
The number of files in the load module exceeds the maximum number the debugger can handle.
b042
W
Symbol module is not initialized.
The SYM module has not been initialized.
b32e
F
Illegal port number.
An illegal port number.
b32f
F
Illegal port name.
An illegal port name.
b330
F
Illegal port position.
The bit position of the specified port is illegal.
b331
F
Illegal increment number.
The specified increment count is illegal.
b332
F
Port for memory bank is not set.
The port for memory bank is not set.
b333
F
Illegal bank number.
An illegal bank number is specified.
b334
F
Area for memory bank is not set.
An area for memory bank is not set.
b335
W
Too long symbol name.
The symbol name is longer than the maximum allowable length.
c001
F
Can not open file.
Opening the file has failed.
c002
A
Can not close file.
Closing the file has failed.
448
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (16/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
c003
A
Failed in reading file.
Reading the file has failed.
c004
A
Can not seek file.
Seeking the file has failed.
c005
F
Illegal file type.
A non-existent file type has been specified.
c006
F
Illegal magic number.
The magic number is illegal.
c007
F
Specified file is not load module.
The specified file is not in a load module format.
c008
F
Specified load module file (ELF) is old version.
The version of the load module file (ELF) is old.
c009
F
Not enough memory.
Application has run out of memory.
c00a
F
Illegal address.
The address is illegal.
c00b
F
Load module is not loaded.
The load module is not loaded.
c00c
F
Illegal argument.
The argument is illegal.
c00d
F
User program is being emulated.
The user program is being emulated.
c00e
F
User program is being traced.
The user program is being traced.
c00f
A
Interrupted.
Under processing.
c010
A
Can not communicate with ICE.
A communication error has occurred. Communication between the in-circuit emulator cannot be
established.
c011
F
Illegal load module file format.
The format of the load module file is wrong.
c012
F
Check sum error.
A check sum error has occurred.
c013
F
Too wide address range to upload (> 1M byte)
The address range to be uploaded exceeds 1 MB.
c014
F
Failed in writing file.
Writing the file has failed.
c015
F
Illegal program number.
The program number is illegal.
c016
F
Load information is full.
The load information is full.
c017
W
Symbol information is duplicated, please reset symbols.
The symbol information overlaps. Reset the symbol.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
449
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (17/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
c018
F
Specified file is not load module.
The specified file is not in a load module format.
c019
F
Failed in writing memory.
Memory could not be written to.
c100
F
This feature is not supported.
This function is not supported.
d000
A
Internal error.
An error occurs inside the debugger.
d001
F
Not enough memory.
Application has run out of memory.
d002
A
Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini).
The initialization file (EXPC.INI) cannot be read correctly.
d003
A
ICE is not connected.
The in-circuit emulator is not connected.
d004
A
Can not find Dynamic Link Library.
The dynamic link library could not be found.
e000
F
Illegal argument.
The argument is illegal.
e001
F
Illegal start address.
The start address is illegal.
e002
F
Illegal end address.
The end address is illegal.
e003
F
Too large size.
The address size is too large.
e004
F
Can not open file.
Opening the file has failed.
e005
F
Failed in reading file.
Reading the file has failed.
e006
F
Can not seek file.
Seeking the file has failed.
e007
F
Failed in writing file.
Writing the file has failed.
e008
F
Not enough memory.
Application has run out of memory.
e009
F
Illegal file format.
The file format is wrong.
e00a
F
Verification error.
Verify error.
e010
F
This feature is not supported.
This function is not supported.
f000
F
Not enough memory.
Application has run out of memory.
450
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (18/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
f001
F
XXX not found.
XXX could not be found.
f002
F
not found XXX. Search from the beginning?
XXX could not be found. Do you want to search from the beginning?
f003
W
Already exceed search region
The search range has already been exceeded.
f004
F
Missing parameter.
The parameter is illegal.
f005
F
Illegal name.
The name is illegal.
f006
F
Illegal number.
The number is illegal.
f007
F
Start address is bigger than end address.
Start address is bigger than end address.
f008
F
Illegal expression
The expression is illegal.
f009
F
XXX This file is illegal type.
XXX This file is an illegal type.
f100
F
Disk cannot write or full.
Either the disk could not be written to or it is full.
f101
F
File not found.
This file could not be found.
f102
F
File not Create.
This file could not be created.
f103
F
Old file version.
This file is an old version.
f104
F
Illegal file type.
The file format is illegal.
f105
F
This file is a project file for XXXX Please select a correct file.
This project file is a file for XXX. Specify a correct file.
f200
W
No differences encountered.
There were no differences found.
f201
F
Memory mapping error.
The memory could not be mapped.
f202
F
Verify error.
Verify error.
f300
F
Would you like to save the changes made in XXX?
Do you want the changes made in XXX to be saved?
f301
F
The symbol being used on the event condition can’t be evaluated.
The symbol being used in the event condition could not be evaluated.
f302
F
Delete XXX?
Do you want XXX to be deleted?
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
451
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (19/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
f303
F
XXX is edited. Delete YYY?
XXX is being edited; do you want YYY to be deleted?
f304
F
XXX is edited. Save YYY?
XXX is being edited; do you want YYY to be saved?
f305
F
XXX is already exist. Do you replace it?
Do you want to replace the existing XXX?
f306
F
This name is too long.
This name is too long.
f307
F
There is the same name in other kinds.
The same name is being used in other conditions.
f308
F
An address can’t be omitted.
An address cannot be omitted.
f309
F
Illegal address mask.
The address mask is illegal.
f30a
F
Illegal data mask.
The data mask is illegal.
f30b
F
Illegal ext probe mask.
The external probe mask is illegal.
f30c
F
Illegal ext probe data.
The external probe data is illegal.
f30d
F
Illegal pass count.
The pass count is illegal.
f30e
F
Illegal register name.
The register name is illegal.
f30f
F
Illegal register bank.
The register bank is illegal.
f310
F
Illegal delay count.
The delay count is illegal.
f311
F
Only one XXX can be enabled. Do you make this YYY to enable?
Only one XXX can be enabled; do you want to enable YYY?
f312
F
XXX is already there.
XXX already exists.
f313
F
Event number already exist.
This event number already exists.
f314
F
Event name is not set.
The event name has not been set.
f315
F
XXX is already there.
XXX already exists.
f316
F
Max number of XXX enabled event is over. Please disable other enabled event.
The maximum allowable number of valid event conditions has been exceeded. Disable other
event conditions.
f317
F
Max number of set event is over.
The maximum number of settable event conditions has been exceeded.
452
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (20/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
f318
F
Max number of set event link is over.
The maximum number of settable event link conditions has been exceeded.
f319
F
Max number of set break event is over.
The maximum number of settable break conditions has been exceeded.
f31a
F
Max number of set trace event is over.
The maximum number of settable trace conditions has been exceeded.
f31b
F
Max number of set snap event is over.
The maximum number of settable snap conditions has been exceeded.
f31d
F
Max number of set timer event is over.
The maximum number of settable timer conditions has been exceeded.
f31e
F
Illegal start address.
The start address is illegal.
f31f
F
Illegal end address.
The end address is illegal.
f320
F
Illegal bit address.
The bit address is illegal.
f321
F
Specified read-protect I/O register.
A read-protected I/O register has been specified.
f350
F
There is a phase which event are not in the middle.
An event condition setting is missing from the middle of a phase.
f351
F
The same event is contained in Link and Disable.
The same event condition is already being used.
f352
F
An event isn’t specified.
An event condition has not been set.
f353
F
Incompatible event is specified in phase 1.
An incompatible event condition has been set in Phase 1.
f354
F
AND event is in Phase 1. Can’t specify event with exception of phase 1.
An AND condition event has already been set in Phase 1. Event conditions cannot be set
anywhere except in Phase 1.
f355
F
REG/MEM event in Disable.
The REG/MEM status event has been set to Disable.
f356
F
AND event is in Disable.
The AND condition event has been set to Disable.
f400
F
Coverage mapping error.
Coverage mapping could not be performed.
f401
F
Clear coverage?
Do you want to clear the coverage?
f500
F
Illegal symbol.
The symbol is illegal.
f501
F
Illegal value.
The value is illegal.
f502
F
Illegal parameter.
The parameter is illegal.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
453
APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Table C-2. Error Message List (21/21)
Error No.
Type
Error Message/Meaning
f600
F
Save project file?
Do you want to save the project file?
f601
W
When connecting the target system, please turn on the target system.
When connecting the target system, be sure to turn its power supply on.
f700
F
Download failed.
Data could not be downloaded.
f800
F
Configuration of Memory Bank is not set.
The memory bank setting has not been made.
f801
F
BANK address must be in target memory.
The address of the memory bank must be inside the target memory.
f802
F
All events are deleted because the use of external probe was changed.
All event conditions have been deleted because the external probe has changed.
f803
F
This event address is invalid on current configuration.
The address of this event condition is illegal.
f804
F
Invalid PC value.
The PC value is illegal.
f805
F
Cannot set temporary break on this address.
A temporary break cannot be set to this address.
f806
F
External data is being used by Debugger.
External data is being used by the debugger.
f900
F
Missing parameter.
The name is illegal.
f901
F
Memory mapping error.
There is a fault with the memory mapping.
f902
F
Illegal access size.
The access size is illegal.
f903
F
Illegal access type.
The access type is illegal.
f904
F
There is the same name.
The same name cannot be registered.
f905
W
XXX is already exist. Do you replace it?
Do you want to replace the existing XXX?
f906
W
Would you like to register the change made in XXX?
Do you want to register the changes made to XXX?
fa00
F
The XXXX function of current program on PC position not found.
The function XXXX of the PC position program could not be found.
fa01
F
The line information on PC position not found.
The line information of the PC position could not be found.
fb00
W
User program is running. Do you want to stop user program?
The program is being executed. Do you want to stop the program?
454
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX D
KEY FUNCTION LIST
Efficient debugging can be realized by performing operations using the special function keys.
Note that because the key explanations differ depending on the type of keyboard in IBM PC/AT and compatible
machines, the key inscriptions employed here are general or generic key inscriptions.
D.1 Special Function Key Function List
A list of the special function key functions of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is shown in the
table below.
Table D-1. Special Function Key Function List (1/2)
Key Type
PC-9821 Series
Function
IBM PC/AT
Compatibles
BS .
BackSpace .
Deletes a character preceding the cursor and moves the cursor to the position of the
deleted character. At this time, the string of characters following the cursor moves
forward one space.
DEL .
Delete .
• Deletes a character at the cursor position and moves the following characters
forward one space.
• Deletes the event conditions selected in the Event Manager and each event dialog
box.
• Deletes the data selected in the Watch window.
INS .
Insert .
Switches the modes between insert mode and overwrite mode in the Source and
Assemble windows. However, this key is disabled in the Memory, Register, and SFR
windows, where the input mode is overwrite mode only.
COPY .
PrintScreen .
Places the entire screen display on the clipboard as a bitmap image (Windows
function).
ESC .
Esc .
• Closes a pull-down menu.
• Closes a modal dialog box.
• Restores input data.
GRPH .
Alt .
Moves the cursor on the menu bar.
HELP .
End .
Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
HOME CLR .
Home .
Moves the cursor to the start of the line.
ROLL DOWN .
PageUp .
Scrolls the screen up one screen.
Simultaneously moves the cursor to the top of the screen.
ROLL UP .
PageDown .
Scrolls the screen down one screen.
Simultaneously moves the cursor to the top of the screen.
SPACE .
Space .
Inserts a 1-character space.
TAB .
Tab .
Moves the cursor to the next item.
↑ .
↑ .
Moves the cursor up.
When the cursor is at the top of the screen, the screen is scrolled down one line at a
time.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
455
APPENDIX D
KEY FUNCTION LIST
Table D-1. Special Function Key Function List (2/2)
Key Type
PC-9821 Series
Function
IBM PC/AT
Compatibles
↓ .
↓ .
Moves the cursor down.
When the cursor is at the bottom of the screen, the screen is scrolled up one line at a
time.
← .
← .
Moves the cursor to the left.
When the cursor is on the far left of the screen, the screen is scrolled to the right one
item at a time.
→ .
→ .
Moves the cursor to the right.
When the cursor is on the far right of the screen, the screen is scrolled to the left one
item at a time.
↵ .
↵ .
• Sets the input data.
• Presses the default push button.
D.2 Function Key Function List
A list of the function key functions of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is shown in the table
below.
Table D-2. Function Key Function List (1/2)
Key Type
PC-9821 Series
Function
IBM PC/AT
Compatibles
f·1 .
F1 .
Opens the Help window.
f·2 .
F2 .
Forcibly stops program execution.
The same function as [Run] → [Stop] on the menu bar.
f·3 .
F3 .
Resets the emulation CPU.
The same function as [Run] → [CPU Reset] on the menu bar.
f·4 .
F4 .
Executes the program after resetting the emulation CPU.
The same function as [Run] → [Restart] on the menu bar.
f·5 .
F5 .
Executes the program.
The same function as [Run] → [Go & Go] on the menu bar.
f·6 .
F6 .
Executes the program as far as the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window.
The same function as [Run] → [Come Here] on the menu bar.
f·7 .
F7 .
Executes the program in real-time until execution returns to the calling origin.
The same function as [Run] → [Return Out] on the menu bar.
f·8 .
F8 .
Performs step execution.
The same function as [Run] → [Step In] on the menu bar.
f·9 .
F9 .
Sets/cancels a breakpoint at the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window.
The same function as [Run] → [Break Point] on the menu bar.
456
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX D
KEY FUNCTION LIST
Table D-2. Function Key Function List (2/2)
Key Type
PC-9821 Series
Function
IBM PC/AT
Compatibles
f·10 .
F10 .
Performs next step execution.
The same function as [Run] → [Next Over] on the menu bar.
vf·1 .
F11 .
Sets/cancels a software breakpoint.
The same function as [Run] → [Software Break Point] on the menu bar.
D.3 Special Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key)
A list of the special function key functions ( SHIFT + key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles
is shown in the table below.
Table D-3. Special Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key)
Key Type
PC-9821 Series
Function
IBM PC/AT
Compatibles
HELP .
End .
Extends the selected range to the end of the line.
HOME CLR .
Home .
Extends the selected range to the start of the line.
← .
← .
Extends the selected range one character to the left.
→ .
→ .
Extends the selected range one character to the right.
D.4 Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key)
A list of the function key functions ( SHIFT
+ key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is
shown in the table below.
Table D-4. Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key)
Key Type
PC-9821 Series
f·6 .
Function
IBM PC/AT
Compatibles
F6 .
Executes the program from the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window.
The same function as [Run] → [Start From Here] on the menu bar.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
457
APPENDIX D
KEY FUNCTION LIST
D.5 Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key)
A list of the special function key functions ( CTRL + key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles
is shown in the table below.
Table D-5. Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key)
Key Type
PC-9821 Series
Function
IBM PC/AT
Compatibles
HELP .
End .
Displays the last line. Simultaneously moves the cursor to the start of the last line.
HOME CLR .
Home .
Displays the first line. Simultaneously moves the cursor to the start of the first line.
← .
← .
Moves the cursor one word to the left. When the cursor is on the far left of the screen,
the screen is scrolled one item to the right.
→ .
→ .
Moves the cursor one word to the right. When the cursor is on the far right of the
screen, the screen is scrolled one item to the left.
D.6 Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key)
A list of the function key functions ( CTRL
+ key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is
shown in the table below.
Table D-6. Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key)
Key Type
PC-9821 Series
Function
IBM PC/AT
Compatibles
f·5 .
F5 .
Ignores the set breakpoint and executes the program.
The same function as [Run] → [Ignore break points and Go] on the menu bar.
f·9 .
F9 .
Sets the address of the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window in the PC.
The same function as [Run] → [Change PC] on the menu bar.
458
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX D
KEY FUNCTION LIST
D.7 Control Key Function List ( CTRL + Key)
A list of the control key functions ( CTRL + key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is shown
in the table below.
Table D-7. Control Key Function List ( CTRL + Key)
Key Type
Function
PC-9821 Series
IBM PC/AT Compatibles
D .
Shows a disassemble display from the jump destination address of the data value selected in the
current window. Opens the Assemble window.
The same function as [Jump] → [Assemble] on the menu bar.
C .
Copies the selected character string and places it in the clipboard buffer.
The same function as [Edit] → [Copy] on the menu bar.
G .
Performs a search. Opens the search dialog box appropriate to the current window.
The same function as [View] → [Search…] on the menu bar.
I .
Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address of the data value selected in the
current window. Opens the Coverage window.
The same function as [Jump] → [Coverage] on the menu bar.
J .
Moves the display position. Opens the Source Move, Address Move, and Trace Move dialog box
appropriate to the current window.
The same function as [View] → [Move…] on the menu bar.
M .
Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address of the data value selected in the
current window. Opens the Memory window.
The same function as [Jump] → [Memory] on the menu bar.
O .
Loads a display, source, or text file.
Opens the View File Load dialog box. Operations differ depending on the file extension.
For display files: Displayed in corresponding window.
For other files: Displayed in Source window.
The same function as [File] → [Open…] on the menu bar.
U .
Displays the corresponding source text and source line from the jump destination address of the
data value selected in the current window. Opens the Source window.
The same function as [Jump] → [Source] on the menu bar.
V .
Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer at the cursor position.
The same function as [Edit] → [Paste] on the menu bar.
W .
Temporarily displays the contents of the specified data. Opens the Quick Watch dialog box.
The same function as [View] → [Quick Watch…] on the menu bar.
X .
Removes the selected character string and places it on the clipboard buffer.
The same function as [Edit] → [Cut] on the menu bar.
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
459
APPENDIX D
KEY FUNCTION LIST
D.8 Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + SHIFT Key)
A list of the special function key functions ( CTRL
+
SHIFT
key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and
compatibles is shown in the table below.
Table D-8. Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + SHIFT Key)
Key Type
PC-9821 Series
Function
IBM PC/AT
Compatibles
← .
← .
Extends the selected range one word to the left.
→ .
→ .
Extends the selected range one word to the right.
460
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX E
[A]
INDEX
Dialog box ..............................................................432
About dialog box .................................................... 380
Add I/O Port dialog box.......................................... 225
Add Watch dialog box ............................................ 208
Address.................................................................. 427
Address Move dialog box....................................... 142
All trace.................................................................... 47
Assemble Search dialog box ................................. 178
Assemble window .................................................. 167
Automatic mode............................................... 60, 424
[B]
Disassemble display...............................................167
Display file ................................................................51
Displaying PC register value ..........................155, 170
Displaying stack contents .......................................231
DMM dialog box .....................................................368
Download dialog box ..............................................130
Drag-and-drop function...................................161, 176
[E]
Emulation board .......................................................19
Emulation execution functions..................................38
Bank Set Dialog Box ................................................ 92
Break by Come function........................................... 45
Break function.......................................................... 45
Break on satisfaction of condition during step
execution.............................................................. 45
Breakpoint setting function............................. 159, 174
Browse dialog box ................................................. 137
Emulation RAM ........................................................37
Emulation ROM ........................................................37
Error message list ..................................................433
Error/Warning dialog box........................................383
Event condition.........................................................41
Event detection break...............................................45
Event function...........................................................40
Event Manager .......................................................274
[C]
Exit Debugger dialog box .......................................381
Change Watch dialog box...................................... 211
Exiting.......................................................................36
Character set ......................................................... 430
Explanation of windows ............................................59
Clearing coverage result ........................................ 266
Expression and operator ........................................428
Come function................................................ 159, 173
Extended Option dialog box .....................................97
Conditional trace...................................................... 47
Extended Tektronix HEX format .....................130, 134
Configuration dialog box .......................................... 86
[F]
Console window..................................................... 384
Coverage measurement function............................. 50
Coverage Search dialog box.................................. 263
Coverage window .................................................. 258
Coverage-Clear dialog box .................................... 266
Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box.................. 268
Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box..................... 271
Current file ............................................................. 425
Current function ..................................................... 425
Current program .................................................... 424
Current window...................................................... 424
[D]
Fail-safe break..........................................................46
File ...................................................................52, 424
Font dialog box.......................................................111
Forced break ............................................................46
Function..................................................................425
[H]
Host machine ...........................................................19
IBM PC/AT or compatibles....................................19
PC-9821 series .....................................................19
PC98-NX series ....................................................19
[I]
Debugger Option dialog box .................................. 103
Debugging environment................................. 114, 117
Debugging with ID78K Series ................................ 419
Delay Count dialog box.......................................... 376
Delimiter symbol .................................................... 424
Detailed display mode............................................ 275
I/O protect area ........................................................37
In-circuit emulator.....................................................19
IE-74000-R ...........................................................19
IE-78001-R-A........................................................19
IE-78K0-NS...........................................................19
IE-78K0-NS-A .......................................................19
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
461
APPENDIX E
INDEX
IE-78K0S-NS ........................................................ 19
Memory window..................................................... 181
IE-78K0S-NS-A .................................................... 19
Mixed display mode ................................152, 157, 243
IE-78K4-NS .......................................................... 19
Motorola HEX format ......................................130, 134
In-circuit emulator optional board ............................. 19
MS-DOS .................................................................. 54
IE-780xxx-NS-EM1............................................... 19
IE-780xxx-NS-EM4............................................... 19
[N]
IE-780xxx-NS-EMx ............................................... 19
NEC load module format ....................................... 130
IE-780xxx-R-EM ................................................... 19
Next step execution ........................................... 39, 62
IE-784000-R-EM................................................... 19
Non real-time execution function ............................. 39
IE-784xxx-NS-EM1............................................... 19
Non-map break........................................................ 46
IE-784xxx-R-EM1 ................................................. 19
Normal display mode ......................151, 157, 243, 304
IE-789xxx-NS-EM1............................................... 19
Numeric value........................................................ 426
IE-78K0-NS-P0x ................................................... 19
[O]
IE-78K0-NS-PA .................................................... 19
IE-78K0-R-EXx ..................................................... 19
Operating environment ............................................ 19
IE-78K4-R-EXx ..................................................... 19
Operation of trace .................................................... 47
Information file.......................................................... 52
Operator ................................................................ 428
Initializing emulation CPU ........................................ 39
OS ........................................................................... 20
Instruction mode............................................... 60, 424
Windows 95, 98, Me, NT4.0................................. 20
Intel HEX format............................................. 130, 134
Interface board ......................................................... 19
IE-70000-98-IF-C.................................................. 19
IE-70000-CD-IF-A................................................. 19
IE-70000-PC-IF-C................................................. 19
IE-70000-PCI-IF-A................................................ 19
Internal RAM ............................................................ 37
Internal ROM............................................................ 37
[P]
Pass Count dialog box........................................... 374
Performance board .................................................. 19
Point mark area ......................................153, 168, 237
Program................................................................. 424
Program counter setting function....................160, 174
Project file...........................................52, 86, 115, 118
Project File Load dialog box .................................. 114
[J]
Project File Save dialog box .................................. 117
Jump function................. 160, 174, 184, 233, 243, 261
Project Manager ...................................................... 54
Pseudo DMM dialog box........................................ 197
[L]
[Q]
Line ........................................................................ 425
List display mode ................................................... 275
Quick Watch dialog box ......................................... 204
Load/save function ................................................... 51
Quick watch function.......................................161, 175
Local Variable window ........................................... 228
[R]
[M]
Real-time execution function ................................... 38
Main window ............................................................ 60
Real-time RAM sampling function ........................... 53
Mapping function...................................................... 37
Register manipulation .............................................. 53
Mask Option Dialog Box........................................... 95
Register name ....................................................... 425
Measuring execution time ...................................... 354
Register window .................................................... 214
Memory Compare dialog box ................................. 193
Reset Debugger dialog box ................................... 378
Memory Compare Result dialog box ...................... 195
[S]
Memory Copy dialog box ....................................... 191
Memory Fill dialog box ........................................... 189
Memory manipulation............................................... 53
Memory Search dialog box .................................... 186
462
Select mode........................................................... 305
Setting operating environment................................. 86
SFR illegal access break ......................................... 46
SFR Select dialog box ........................................... 222
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX E
INDEX
SFR window........................................................... 218
Toolbar .....................................................................61
Snap Shot dialog box............................................. 331
Trace condition setting function................................48
Snapshot function .................................................... 50
Trace Data Select dialog box .................................254
Software break......................................................... 45
Trace function...........................................................47
Software Break Manager ....................................... 284
Trace mode ..............................................................47
Source mode ................................................... 60, 424
Trace Move dialog box ...........................................145
Source Move dialog box ........................................ 139
Trace result display function.....................................49
Source Search dialog box...................................... 164
Trace Search dialog box.........................................246
Source window ...................................................... 151
Trace View window ................................................236
Specifying address ................................................ 144
Stack frame number....................................... 232, 425
[U]
Stack window......................................................... 231
Upload dialog box...................................................134
Start function.................................................. 159, 173
User area mapping...................................................37
Starting .................................................................... 34
[V]
Status display area .................................................. 64
Step execution ................................................... 39, 62
View File Load dialog box.......................................121
Structure ................................................................ 425
View File Save dialog box ......................................124
Stub dialog box ...................................................... 346
[W]
Symbol................................................................... 427
Symbol To Address dialog box .............................. 148
System register........................................................ 53
Watch function................................................161, 175
Watch window ........................................................199
Window link function.......................157, 171, 244, 261
[T]
Window list ...............................................................57
Term ...................................................................... 430
Window type and configuration ..............................432
Time measurement function .................................... 53
Windows.............................................................17, 20
Time tag display..................................................... 239
Write protect break .............................................37, 46
Timer dialog box .................................................... 354
Timer Result dialog box ......................................... 365
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
463
[MEMO]
464
User’s Manual U15185EJ1V0UM
Facsimile Message
From:
Name
Company
Tel.
Although NEC has taken all possible steps
to ensure that the documentation supplied
to our customers is complete, bug free
and up-to-date, we readily accept that
errors may occur. Despite all the care and
precautions we've taken, you may
encounter problems in the documentation.
Please complete this form whenever
you'd like to report errors or suggest
improvements to us.
FAX
Address
Thank you for your kind support.
North America
Hong Kong, Philippines, Oceania
NEC Electronics Inc.
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.
Corporate Communications Dept. Fax: +852-2886-9022/9044
Fax: +1-800-729-9288
+1-408-588-6130
Korea
Europe
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.
NEC Electronics (Europe) GmbH
Seoul Branch
Technical Documentation Dept.
Fax: +82-2-528-4411
Fax: +49-211-6503-274
South America
NEC do Brasil S.A.
Fax: +55-11-6462-6829
Asian Nations except Philippines
NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Fax: +65-250-3583
Japan
NEC Semiconductor Technical Hotline
Fax: +81- 44-435-9608
Taiwan
NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd.
Fax: +886-2-2719-5951
I would like to report the following error/make the following suggestion:
Document title:
Document number:
Page number:
If possible, please fax the referenced page or drawing.
Document Rating
Excellent
Good
Acceptable
Poor
Clarity
Technical Accuracy
Organization
CS 01.2